EP3535034A2 - Structure de présentation d'informations avec changement de couleur temporaire au niveau d'une zone d'impact d'objet - Google Patents

Structure de présentation d'informations avec changement de couleur temporaire au niveau d'une zone d'impact d'objet

Info

Publication number
EP3535034A2
EP3535034A2 EP17867105.3A EP17867105A EP3535034A2 EP 3535034 A2 EP3535034 A2 EP 3535034A2 EP 17867105 A EP17867105 A EP 17867105A EP 3535034 A2 EP3535034 A2 EP 3535034A2
Authority
EP
European Patent Office
Prior art keywords
impact
area
color
largely
surface zone
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Granted
Application number
EP17867105.3A
Other languages
German (de)
English (en)
Other versions
EP3535034B1 (fr
EP3535034A4 (fr
Inventor
Ronald J. Meetin
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Individual
Original Assignee
Individual
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US15/343,130 external-priority patent/US10258826B2/en
Priority claimed from US15/343,136 external-priority patent/US10130844B2/en
Priority claimed from US15/343,140 external-priority patent/US9925415B1/en
Priority claimed from US15/343,127 external-priority patent/US10300336B2/en
Priority claimed from US15/343,121 external-priority patent/US9789381B1/en
Priority claimed from US15/343,134 external-priority patent/US9764216B1/en
Priority claimed from US15/343,149 external-priority patent/US10010751B2/en
Priority claimed from US15/343,137 external-priority patent/US10112101B2/en
Priority claimed from US15/343,133 external-priority patent/US10252108B2/en
Priority claimed from US15/343,125 external-priority patent/US10363474B2/en
Priority claimed from US15/343,123 external-priority patent/US10279215B2/en
Priority claimed from US15/343,131 external-priority patent/US9855485B1/en
Priority claimed from US15/343,148 external-priority patent/US10071283B2/en
Priority claimed from US15/343,118 external-priority patent/US10328306B2/en
Priority claimed from US15/343,113 external-priority patent/US10357703B2/en
Priority claimed from US15/343,132 external-priority patent/US10258827B2/en
Priority claimed from US15/343,115 external-priority patent/US10288500B2/en
Priority claimed from US15/343,101 external-priority patent/US10258825B2/en
Priority claimed from US15/343,143 external-priority patent/US10004948B2/en
Priority claimed from US15/343,153 external-priority patent/US9744429B1/en
Priority claimed from US15/597,050 external-priority patent/US10258859B2/en
Priority claimed from US15/597,054 external-priority patent/US10258860B2/en
Application filed by Individual filed Critical Individual
Publication of EP3535034A2 publication Critical patent/EP3535034A2/fr
Publication of EP3535034A4 publication Critical patent/EP3535034A4/fr
Publication of EP3535034B1 publication Critical patent/EP3535034B1/fr
Application granted granted Critical
Active legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Classifications

    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
    • A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
    • A63B71/00—Games or sports accessories not covered in groups A63B1/00 - A63B69/00
    • A63B71/06—Indicating or scoring devices for games or players, or for other sports activities
    • A63B71/0605—Decision makers and devices using detection means facilitating arbitration
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
    • A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
    • A63B69/00—Training appliances or apparatus for special sports
    • A63B69/38—Training appliances or apparatus for special sports for tennis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
    • A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
    • A63B71/00—Games or sports accessories not covered in groups A63B1/00 - A63B69/00
    • A63B71/06—Indicating or scoring devices for games or players, or for other sports activities
    • A63B71/0619—Displays, user interfaces and indicating devices, specially adapted for sport equipment, e.g. display mounted on treadmills
    • A63B71/0622—Visual, audio or audio-visual systems for entertaining, instructing or motivating the user
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
    • A63C—SKATES; SKIS; ROLLER SKATES; DESIGN OR LAYOUT OF COURTS, RINKS OR THE LIKE
    • A63C19/00—Design or layout of playing courts, rinks, bowling greens or areas for water-skiing; Covers therefor
    • A63C19/06—Apparatus for setting-out or dividing courts
    • A63C19/065—Line markings, e.g. tapes; Methods therefor
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
    • A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
    • A63B24/00—Electric or electronic controls for exercising apparatus of preceding groups; Controlling or monitoring of exercises, sportive games, training or athletic performances
    • A63B24/0021—Tracking a path or terminating locations
    • A63B2024/0037—Tracking a path or terminating locations on a target surface or at impact on the ground
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
    • A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
    • A63B24/00—Electric or electronic controls for exercising apparatus of preceding groups; Controlling or monitoring of exercises, sportive games, training or athletic performances
    • A63B24/0021—Tracking a path or terminating locations
    • A63B2024/0037—Tracking a path or terminating locations on a target surface or at impact on the ground
    • A63B2024/0043—Systems for locating the point of impact on a specific surface
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
    • A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
    • A63B71/00—Games or sports accessories not covered in groups A63B1/00 - A63B69/00
    • A63B71/06—Indicating or scoring devices for games or players, or for other sports activities
    • A63B71/0605—Decision makers and devices using detection means facilitating arbitration
    • A63B2071/0611—Automatic tennis linesmen, i.e. in-out detectors
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
    • A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
    • A63B71/00—Games or sports accessories not covered in groups A63B1/00 - A63B69/00
    • A63B71/06—Indicating or scoring devices for games or players, or for other sports activities
    • A63B71/0619—Displays, user interfaces and indicating devices, specially adapted for sport equipment, e.g. display mounted on treadmills
    • A63B71/0622—Visual, audio or audio-visual systems for entertaining, instructing or motivating the user
    • A63B2071/0625—Emitting sound, noise or music
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
    • A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
    • A63B71/00—Games or sports accessories not covered in groups A63B1/00 - A63B69/00
    • A63B71/06—Indicating or scoring devices for games or players, or for other sports activities
    • A63B2071/0694—Visual indication, e.g. Indicia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
    • A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
    • A63B2102/00—Application of clubs, bats, rackets or the like to the sporting activity ; particular sports involving the use of balls and clubs, bats, rackets, or the like
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
    • A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
    • A63B2220/00—Measuring of physical parameters relating to sporting activity
    • A63B2220/10—Positions
    • A63B2220/13—Relative positions
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
    • A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
    • A63B2220/00—Measuring of physical parameters relating to sporting activity
    • A63B2220/80—Special sensors, transducers or devices therefor
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
    • A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
    • A63B2220/00—Measuring of physical parameters relating to sporting activity
    • A63B2220/80—Special sensors, transducers or devices therefor
    • A63B2220/801—Contact switches
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
    • A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
    • A63B2220/00—Measuring of physical parameters relating to sporting activity
    • A63B2220/80—Special sensors, transducers or devices therefor
    • A63B2220/806—Video cameras
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
    • A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
    • A63B2220/00—Measuring of physical parameters relating to sporting activity
    • A63B2220/80—Special sensors, transducers or devices therefor
    • A63B2220/807—Photo cameras
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
    • A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
    • A63B2225/00—Miscellaneous features of sport apparatus, devices or equipment
    • A63B2225/20—Miscellaneous features of sport apparatus, devices or equipment with means for remote communication, e.g. internet or the like
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
    • A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
    • A63B2225/00—Miscellaneous features of sport apparatus, devices or equipment
    • A63B2225/74—Miscellaneous features of sport apparatus, devices or equipment with powered illuminating means, e.g. lights
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
    • A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
    • A63B2243/00—Specific ball sports not provided for in A63B2102/00 - A63B2102/38
    • A63B2243/0037—Basketball
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
    • A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
    • A63B71/00—Games or sports accessories not covered in groups A63B1/00 - A63B69/00
    • A63B71/06—Indicating or scoring devices for games or players, or for other sports activities
    • A63B71/0605—Decision makers and devices using detection means facilitating arbitration
    • A63B71/0608—Decision makers and devices using detection means facilitating arbitration using mechanical, i.e. non-electrical means

Definitions

  • This invention relates to information presentation, especially for sports such as tennis.
  • Two sides each consisting of at least one player, compete against each other in a typical sport played with an object, such as a ball, which moves above a playing surface and often impacts the surface.
  • exemplary sports include tennis and basketball.
  • the playing surface referred to as a court, consists of an inbounds ("IB") playing area and an out-of-bounds ("OB") playing area demarcated by boundary lines.
  • IB inbounds
  • OB out-of-bounds
  • the side that caused the object to go out of bounds is typically penalized.
  • a point is awarded to the other side.
  • basketball possession of the basketball is awarded to the other side.
  • Decisions as to whether the object impacts the playing surface in or out of bounds are often difficult to make for impacts close to the boundary lines.
  • the IB area typically contains internal lines that place certain requirements on the sport.
  • a tennis court contains three internal lines which, together with the tennis net and a pair of the boundary lines, define four servicecourts into which a tennis ball must be appropriately served to avoid a penalty against the server. It is often difficult to determine whether a served tennis ball impacting the playing surface close to one of these lines is "in” or "out”.
  • Each half of a basketball court usually has a three-point line. At least one shoe of a player shooting the basketball must contact the court behind the three-point line immediately prior to the shot with neither of the shooter's shoes touching the court on or inside the three-point line as the shot is taken for it to be eligible for three points. It is likewise difficult to determine whether this requirement is met when the shoes are close to the three-point line.
  • FIG.1 illustrates the layout of playing surface 20 of a standard tennis court with line width somewhat exaggerated.
  • playing surface 20 consists of rectangular IB playing area 22 and OB playing area 24 edgewise surrounding IB playing area 22 and extending to court boundary 26.
  • Singles IB playing area 22 is defined inwardly by two opposite equal-width parallel straight baselines 28 and two opposite equal-width parallel straight singles sidelines 30 extending between baselines 28.
  • Tennis net 32 is situated above a straight net line, usually imaginary but potentially real, extending parallel to baselines 28 substantially midway between them and extending lengthwise between and beyond singles sidelines 30 for dividing singles IB area 22 into two singles half courts.
  • Singles IB area 22 contains (i) two opposite equal-width parallel straight servicelines 34 situated between baselines 28 and extending lengthwise between singles sidelines 30 at equal distances from the imaginary or real net line and (ii) straight centerline 36 extending lengthwise between servicelines 34 at equal distances from singles sidelines 30.
  • Lines 30, 34, and 36 in combination with the imaginary/real net line, and thus effectively net 32, define inwardly four equal-size rectangular services courts 38.
  • Lines 28, 30, and 34 define two equal-size rectangular backcourts 40.
  • Playing surface 20 for doubles consists of IB playing area 42 and OB playing area 44 edgewise surrounding IB playing area 42 and extending to court boundary 26.
  • Doubles IB playing area 42 is defined inwardly by baselines 28 and opposite equal-width straight doubles sidelines 46 located outside singles IB area 22.
  • the imaginary/real net line situated below net 32 extends lengthwise between and beyond doubles sidelines 46 for dividing doubles IB area 42 into two doubles half courts. Net 32 extends fully across IB area 42 and into OB area 44.
  • Rectangular doubles alleys 48 extend along doubles sidelines 46 outside singles sidelines 30. Fig.
  • FIG. 2 is a less-labeled version of Fig.1 in which roughly elliptical items 50, of somewhat exaggerated size, represent examples of areas where tennis balls, including just-served tennis balls, contact playing surface 20 and which are variously so close to the tennis lines that it may be difficult to make decisions, referred to as "line calls", on whether the balls are "in” or "out".
  • FIG.3 illustrates an example of simulated trajectory 60 of tennis ball 62 tracked with Hawk- Eye on one stroke.
  • Fig.4 depicts simulated contact area 64 of ball 62 near a sideline 30 on another stroke. As Fig.4 indicates, Hawk-Eye provides a visual notification specifying whether ball 62 is in or out.
  • the Hawk-Eye simulations are displayed on a screen at which players (and officials) look to see the line calls. This disrupts play. As a result, Hawk-Eye is used for only certain line calls. In particular, officials initially make all line calls with each side allocated a small number of opportunities to challenge official-made calls per set provided that a challenge opportunity is retained if an official-made call is reversed. The use of challenges is distracting to the players. Hawk-Eye's accuracy depends on the accuracy of the predictive data analysis for the simulations and on Hawk-Eye's alignment to the tennis lines, assumed to be perfectly straight even though they are not perfectly straight.
  • Hawk-Eye appears to occasionally make erroneous calls as discussed, e.g., in "Hawk-Eye", Wikipedia, en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hawk-Eye, 18 July 2013, 8 pp. While Hawk- Eye has gained high recognition among the camera-based devices, it is desirable to have a better device than Hawk-Eye or any other camera-based device for making line calls.
  • Line-calling systems utilizing tennis balls with special electrical or chemical treatments have been proposed as, e.g., disclosed in U.S. Patents 4,109,911 and 7,632,197 B2.
  • Such systems are disadvantageous for various reasons. Erosion along the outside of a specially treated tennis ball as it contacts the tennis court and racquets may detrimentally affect the ball's ability to provide the information needed to appropriately communicate with the line-calling system.
  • the electrical or chemical treatments may so affect the bounce characteristics that some tennis players are averse to using specially treated balls.
  • Players and officials are generally unable to rapidly verify the accuracy of the calls.
  • Ferrara et al. "Intelligent design with chromogenic materials", J. Int'l Colour Ass'n, vol.13, 2014, pp.54 - 66, similarly proposes that electrochromic paint be applied at and near the lines of a tennis court for assistance in making line calls and that the same paint could be used for basketball, volleyball, and squash courts.
  • the present invention furnishes an information-presentation structure in which suitable impact of an object on an exposed surface of an object-impact (“OI") structure during an activity such as a sport causes the surface to temporarily change color largely at the impact area.
  • a variable-color (“VC") region of the OI structure extends to the surface at a surface zone and normally appears along it as a principal color.
  • An impact-dependent (“ID") portion of the VC region responds to the object impacting the surface zone at an ID object-contact (“OC”) area by temporarily appearing along an ID print area of the zone as changed color materially different from the principal color if certain conditions, described below, are met.
  • the print area closely matches the OC area in size, shape, and location.
  • the components of the VC region in a first facet (or expression) of the invention include a color- change (“CC”) component and an impact-sensitive (“IS”) component usually at least partially situated between the surface zone and the CC component.
  • An ID segment of the IS component responds to the object impacting the surface zone at the OC area by providing an impact effect if the impact meets threshold impact criteria.
  • An ID segment of the CC component responds to the impact effect by causing the ID portion to temporarily appear along the print area as the changed color.
  • the color change at the print area usually occurs very quickly.
  • the full forward transition delay from when the object just completes separation from the OC area to when the ID portion approximately first appears as the changed color is usually no more than 0.2 s.
  • the CC component often contains an electrode assembly in which a core layer lies at least partially between a near electrode structure and a far electrode structure situated farther from the surface zone than the near electrode structure.
  • Light having at least a majority component of wavelength suitable for the principal color normally leaves the core layer along the near electrode structure.
  • a CC control signal provided by the VC region in response to the impact effect is applied between locations in the near and far electrode structures. At least one of these locations depends on where the object contacts the surface zone.
  • An ID segment of the core layer responds to the control signal by enabling light having at least a majority component of wavelength suitable for color different from the principal color to temporarily leave an ID segment of the core layer along an ID segment of the near electrode structure such that the ID portion temporarily appears along the print area as the changed color.
  • the ID segment of the IS component in a second facet of the invention provides a characteristics-identifying ("CI") impact signal if the threshold impact criteria are met.
  • the CI impact signal identifies an expected location for the print area and supplemental impact information for the impact.
  • a CC controller determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides a CC initiation signal.
  • the supplemental impact criteria are typically used for distinguishing between impacts for which color change is desired and impacts, e.g., of bodies other than the object, for which color change is not desired.
  • the ID segment of the CC component responds to the initiation signal, if provided, by causing the ID portion to temporarily appear as the changed color.
  • the full forward transition delay from when the object just completes separation from the OC area to when the ID portion approximately first appears as the changed color is preferably no more than 0.2 s so that the color change at the print area occurs very quickly.
  • the CC component again typically contains an electrode assembly in which a core layer lies at least partially between a near electrode structure and a far electrode structure situated farther from the surface zone than the near electrode structure.
  • Light having at least a majority component of wavelength suitable for the principal color again normally leaves the core layer along the near electrode structure.
  • the CC controller responds to the impact signal, if provided, by determining whether the supplemental impact information meets the supplemental impact criteria and, if so, by providing the CC initiation signal applied between a location in the near electrode structure and a location in the far electrode structure.
  • the VC region contains impact-sensitive color-change ("ISCC") structure in a third facet of the invention where the shape of the OC area is capable of being arbitrary.
  • a protective structure lies at least partially between the surface zone and the ISCC structure for protecting it from being damaged by matter impacting, situated on, and/or moving along the zone.
  • the protective structure also preferably blocks at least 80% of externally incident ultraviolet radiation.
  • a surface structure lies between the surface zone and an interface with the ISCC structure.
  • the total light normally leaving the ISCC structure along the interface is of wavelength suitable for forming a principal internal color.
  • the ID portion temporarily appears as the changed color referred to here as the changed surface color the total light temporarily leaving an ID segment of the interface spanning the ID portion along the interface is of wavelength suitable for forming a changed internal color.
  • One of the internal colors is a comparatively light color. The other is a comparatively dark color.
  • the surface structure absorbs light leaving the ISCC structure along the interface such that the principal surface color is darker than the light color if the principal internal color is the light color and such that the changed surface color is darker than the light color if the changed internal color is the light color.
  • This light/dark color arrangement advantageously enables the colors implementing the principal and changed surface colors to be significantly varied by changing the light absorption characteristics of the surface structure without changing the ISCC structure.
  • the principal and changed surface colors can also be created in different shades by varying the reflection characteristics of the surface structure without changing the ISCC structure.
  • the ID segment of the ISCC structure in a fifth facet of the invention provides a CI impact signal if the threshold impact criteria are met.
  • the CI impact signal identifies an expected location for the print area and supplemental impact information.
  • a CC controller determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides a CC initiation signal.
  • the supplemental impact criteria are again typically used for distinguishing between impacts for which color change is desired and impacts for which color change is not desired. Except as otherwise explained, the same applies to supplemental impact criteria described in later facets of the invention.
  • the ID segment of the ISCC structure responds to the initiation signal, if provided, by causing the ID portion to temporarily appear as the changed color.
  • the VC region in a sixth facet of the invention includes pressure-sensitive color-change ("PSCC") structure and pressure-spreading structure lying at least partially between the surface zone and the PSCC structure.
  • the pressure-spreading structure has a largely internal pressure-spreading surface spaced apart from the surface zone. With the shape of the OC area being capable of being arbitrary, the pressure-spreading structure laterally spreads pressure of the impact along a corresponding ID distributed-pressure area of the pressure-spreading surface. The distributed-pressure area laterally outwardly conforms to, and is laterally larger than, the OC area.
  • An ID segment of the PSCC structure responds to the resultant excess internal pressure along the distributed-pressure area by causing the ID portion to temporarily appear along the print area as the changed color if the excess internal pressure along the distributed-pressure area meets excess internal pressure criteria, excess pressure at any location being pressure in excess of normal pressure at that location.
  • the print and OC areas would generally be separated by a band which largely remains the principal color because the excess surface pressure along the band is insufficient to meet excess surface pressure criteria for causing color change. Since (a) the pressure- spreading surface is largely internal to the OI structure, (b) the pressure criteria which must be met to cause color change are excess internal pressure criteria along the pressure-spreading surface rather than excess surface pressure criteria along the exposed surface, and (c) the pressure spreading causes the excess internal pressure to be laterally distributed more widely than the excess surface pressure caused directly by the impact, the thickness of the band largely remaining the principal color can be made very small. The print area can thereby match the OC area very closely in size, shape, and location. The principal and changed colors can also be created in different shades by varying the reflection characteristics of the pressure-spreading structure without changing the PSCC structure.
  • the ID segment of the PSCC structure in a seventh facet of the invention provides a CI impact signal if the excess internal pressure criteria are met.
  • the CI impact signal identifies an expected location for the print area and supplemental impact information.
  • a CC controller determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides a CC initiation signal.
  • the ID segment of the PSCC structure responds to the initiation signal, if provided, by causing the ID portion to temporarily appear as the changed color.
  • the VC region in an eighth facet of the invention includes ISCC structure and duration-extension ("DE") structure.
  • the ID segment of the ISCC structure responds to the object impacting the surface zone at the OC area by causing the ID portion to temporarily appear along the print area as the changed color if the impact meets the threshold impact criteria. The ID portion subsequently returns to appearing along the print area as the principal color.
  • the impact causes deformation along an ID surface deformation area of the surface zone as the ID portion initially appears along the print area as the changed color if the impact meets the threshold impact criteria.
  • the DE structure responds to the impact by causing the ISCC structure to deform along an ID internal deformation area spaced apart from the surface deformation area. This internal deformation causes the ID portion to further temporarily appear along the print area as the changed color if the threshold impact criteria are met. The duration of the ID portion appearing as the changed color is thereby extended in a controllable manner.
  • the ID portion in a ninth facet of the invention responds to the object impacting the surface zone at the OC area, whose shape is capable of being arbitrary, by temporarily emitting light suitable for forming color different from the principal color if the impact meets the threshold impact criteria such that the ID portion temporarily appears along the print area as the changed color.
  • Using light emission to produce the temporary color change at the print area is advantageous because the changed color can be virtually any possible visible color. Additionally, the print area can be quite bright, thereby enhancing visibility of the color change, particularly in dark ambient environments.
  • Piezoluminescent or/and piezochromic luminescent material in the VC region preferably provides light emission that produces the temporary color change.
  • the ID portion in a tenth facet of the invention provides a CI impact signal if the threshold impact criteria are met.
  • the CI impact signal identifies an expected location for the print area and supplemental impact information.
  • a CC controller determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides a CC initiation signal.
  • the ID portion responds to the initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily emitting light suitable for forming color different from the principal color such that the ID portion temporarily appears as changed color.
  • the VC region in an eleventh facet of the invention contains multiple VC cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a corresponding part of the surface zone.
  • the cells normally appear along their parts of the surface zone as the principal color.
  • CM criteria-meeting
  • the cell architecture is highly advantageous.
  • the boundary of the print area defined by the cell surface parts is clear.
  • the color changes along the surface part of each CM cell without the color changing along the surface part of any neighboring cell not intended to undergo color change.
  • the ambit of materials suitable for implementing the OI structure is increased because there is no need to limit the VC region to materials for which the effect of the impact does not laterally spread significantly beyond the OC area.
  • any desired print accuracy can be achieved by adjusting the cell density. If the threshold impact criteria are to vary along the surface zone, neighboring cells can readily be provided with different threshold impact criteria.
  • Each cell preferably includes an IS part and a CC part.
  • the IS part of each CM cell responds to the impact by providing a cellular impact effect.
  • the CC part of each CM cell responds to its impact effect by causing that cell to temporarily appear along its part of the surface zone as the changed color.
  • Use of separate IS and CC parts in each cell provides many benefits. More materials are capable of separately performing the impact-sensing and color-changing operations than of jointly performing them. The ambit of colors for implementing the principal and changed colors is increased. The two colors can be created in different shades by varying the reflection characteristics of the IS parts, usually largely transparent, without changing the CC parts. The ruggedness for withstanding object impacts is enhanced thereby enabling the lifetime to be increased. The ability to select and control the CC timing is improved.
  • each cell meeting the threshold impact criteria in response to the impact in a twelfth facet of the invention temporarily become a threshold CM cell that provides a CI impact signal identifying cellular supplemental impact information of the object impacting the OC area as experienced at that threshold CM cell.
  • a CC controller Responsive to the CI impact signal of each threshold CM cell, a CC controller combines the cellular supplemental information of that threshold CM cell with the cellular supplemental information of any other threshold CM cell to form general supplemental impact information. The CC controller then determines whether the general supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria, and, if so, provides a cellular CC initiation signal to each threshold CM cell for causing it to become a full CM cell and temporarily appear as the changed color.
  • the CC duration of the ID portion temporarily appearing as the changed color is, in the absence of externally caused adjustment, substantially in a CC time duration range established prior to the impact.
  • a CC controller responds to the impact and to subsequent instruction by controlling the ID portion for adjusting the CC duration subsequent to the impact.
  • the instruction for controlling the CC duration can be manually provided, directly or remotely, to the controller.
  • the CC-control instruction can also be provided, directly or remotely, by human voice to the controller.
  • the ID portion in a fourteenth facet of the invention responds to the object impacting the surface zone at the OC area by providing a CI impact signal if the impact meets the threshold impact criteria without necessarily being subject to any of the particular limitations of the preceding second, fifth, seventh, and tenth facets of the invention and the later sixteenth, twentieth, twenty-second, twenty-fourth, twenty-seventh, twenty- eighth, thirtieth, thirty-second, thirty-fourth, thirty-sixth, thirty-eighth, fortieth, and forty-third facets of the invention.
  • the CI impact signal identifies an expected location for an ID print area in the surface zone and supplemental impact information.
  • a CC controller determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides a CC initiation signal.
  • the ID portion responds to the initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing along the print area as the changed color.
  • the supplemental impact criteria enable the IP structure to largely avoid providing color change at the locations of impacts of bodies for which color change is not desired.
  • the supplemental impact criteria can include size and/or shape criteria for the print area.
  • the size criteria preferably include a maximum reference area value for the print area.
  • the controller then provides the ID portion with the CC initiation signal substantially only when the print area is expected to be of an area less than or equal to the maximum reference area value.
  • the size criteria can include a minimum reference area value for the print area if it is located substantially fully in the surface zone. If so, the controller provides the ID portion with the initiation signal when the print area is expected to be of an area greater than or equal to the minimum reference area value provided that the print area is expected to be located substantially fully in the surface zone.
  • the shape criteria can include (a) a reference shape for the print area and (b) a shape parameter set consisting of at least one shape parameter defining variations from the reference shape.
  • the controller provides the ID portion with the CC initiation signal substantially only when the print area has a shape expected to fall within the shape parameter set.
  • the supplemental impact information can include the duration of the object in contact with the OC area.
  • the supplemental impact criteria then include OC duration criteria, e.g., a maximum reference duration value. The controller provides the ID portion with the initiation signal only when the duration of the object in contact with the OC area is less than or equal to the maximum reference OC duration value.
  • An image-generating (“IG”) controller responds to the impact in a fifteenth facet of the invention by causing an IG structure to generate a principal print-area vicinity (“PAV”) image of the print area and adjacent surface extending to at least a selected location of the exposed surface if the impact meets the threshold impact criteria.
  • the PAV image helps determine how close the impact occurred to the selected surface location.
  • the PAV image is preferably automatically generated whenever a point in the print area is less than or equal to a selected distance away from (including being in) the selected surface location.
  • the IG controller also preferably responds to external instruction for causing the IG structure to generate the PAV image if the threshold impact criteria are met.
  • the IP structure provides an approximation capability for (a) determining a portion of the surface-zone boundary where the print area is nearest the boundary, (b) approximating at least that boundary portion as a smooth boundary vicinity curve, (c) approximating the print area perimeter, or a portion nearest the boundary, as a smooth perimeter vicinity curve, (d) comparing the vicinity curves to determine if they meet or overlap, and (e) providing an indication, e.g., an image, of the comparison.
  • the ID portion in a sixteenth facet of the invention provides a CI impact signal if the threshold impact criteria are met.
  • the CI impact signal identifies an expected location for the print area and supplemental impact information.
  • a CC controller determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, generates a CC initiation signal.
  • the VC region responds to the initiation signal, if provided, by causing the ID portion to temporarily appear as the changed color.
  • an object-tracking (“OT") control apparatus tracks movement of the object over the exposed surface. As the object impacts the surface zone at the OC area, the ID portion temporarily appears along the print area of the zone as the changed color if the impact meets the threshold impact criteria and if the tracking indicates that the object is highly likely to impact the OC area. Impacts of bodies not tracked by the OT control apparatus substantially do not cause color change. Color change thus occurs largely only for suitable impacts of the tracked object.
  • the VC region in the invention's seventeenth facet is capable of being enabled for, and is ordinarily disabled from being capable of, changing color.
  • the OT control apparatus estimates where the object is expected to contact the surface according to the tracking and provides a CC enable signal shortly before the impact occurs if the tracking indicates that the object is expected to contact the surface zone.
  • the CC enable signal at least partially identifies the estimated OC area in the surface zone. Responsive to the enable signal, an oversize portion of the VC region extending to an oversize area of the surface zone is temporarily enabled to be capable of changing color. The oversize area encompasses and extends beyond the estimated OC area.
  • the ID portion now temporarily enabled to be capable of changing color due because it is included in the oversize portion of the VC region, responds to the impact by temporarily appearing as the changed color if the threshold impact criteria are met.
  • the OT control apparatus provides a CC control signal during at least part of a CC initiation time period extending from when the object impacts the surface zone to when the object subsequently leaves the zone according to the tracking.
  • the ID portion responds to the control signal and to the impact by temporarily appearing as the changed color if the threshold impact criteria are met.
  • the ID portion in the invention's nineteenth facet responds to the object impacting the OC area by providing a location-identifying ("LI") impact signal if the threshold impact criteria are met.
  • the LI impact signal identifies an expected location of the print area in the surface zone.
  • the OT control apparatus estimates where the object contacted the exposed surface according to the tracking, provides an estimation impact signal indicative of estimated OC area in the surface zone if the estimated contact is at least partially in the surface zone, compares the LI and estimation impact signals, and provides a CC initiation signal if the comparison indicates that the estimated OC area and the print area at least partially overlap.
  • the ID portion responds to the initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing as the changed color.
  • the print area satisfies, in a twentieth facet of the invention, one of a plurality of mutually exclusive criteria for the location of the print area in the surface zone.
  • the location criteria encompass the entire surface zone and respectively correspond to a like plurality of specific changed colors materially different from the principal color. Two or more of the specific changed colors differ from one another.
  • a CC controller Responsive to an LI impact signal provided by the ID portion if the impact meets the threshold impact criteria, a CC controller determines which location criterion is satisfied by the print area and then provides a CC initiation signal at a corresponding condition.
  • the LI impact signal can be replaced with a CI impact signal that also identifies supplemental impact information. In that case, the controller further determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides the initiation signal.
  • the ID portion responds to the initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing along the print area largely as the specific changed color for the location criterion met by the print area. The invention thereby enables the ID portion to appear along the print area as one of two or more colors depending on where the impact occurs.
  • the changed color is a generic changed color in a twenty-first facet of the invention where the threshold impact criteria are formed with multiple sets of different threshold impact criteria respectively associated with multiple specific changed colors materially different from the principal color.
  • the impact of the object on the surface zone is potentially capable of meeting any of the criteria sets. If the object impact meets the threshold impact criteria, the generic changed color is the specific changed color for the criteria set actually met by the impact.
  • the VC region in a twenty-second facet of the invention provides a CI impact signal if the threshold impact criteria are met.
  • the CI impact signal identifies an expected location for the print area and supplemental impact information.
  • a CC controller determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides a CC initiation signal.
  • the ID portion responds to the initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing as the generic changed color.
  • the supplemental impact criteria consist of multiple sets of different supplemental impact criteria respectively associated with multiple specific changed colors materially different from the principal color.
  • the supplemental impact information is potentially capable of meeting any of the supplemental criteria sets. If the supplemental impact information meets the supplemental impact criteria, the generic changed color is the specific changed color for the criteria set actually met by the supplemental impact information.
  • threshold and supplemental impact criteria sets provides a capability to distinguish between different types of object impacts. For example, if the maximum excess surface pressure usually exerted by one implementation of the object on the surface zone exceeds the minimum excess surface pressure usually exerted by another implementation of the object on the surface zone, suitable choice of the threshold impact criteria sets enables the IP structure to distinguish between impacts of the two object implementations. Similarly, if one implementation of the object is shaped considerably differently than another implementation of the object or usually contacts the surface zone for a considerably different time duration than the other object implementation, suitable choice of the supplemental impact criteria sets enables the IP structure to distinguish between the two object implementations as they contact the surface zone.
  • sound-generating apparatus selectively generates a specified audible sound in response to the object impacting the OC area so as to meet the threshold impact criteria.
  • the specified sound is separate from any audible sound originating at the OC area due physically to (sound waves caused by) the impact.
  • the VC region usually provides an impact signal in response to the impact if it meets the threshold impact criteria. The sound-generating apparatus then generates the specified sound in response to the impact signal.
  • the ID portion in a twenty-fourth facet of the invention provides a CI impact signal if the threshold impact criteria are met.
  • the CI impact signal identifies an expected location for the print area and supplemental impact information.
  • a CC controller determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, generates a specified audible sound and provides a CC initiation signal.
  • the ID portion responds to the initiation signal by temporarily appearing as the changed color.
  • the principal and changed colors are chosen to accommodate persons having color vision deficiency, commonly termed color blindness, in twenty-fifth and twenty-sixth facets of the invention.
  • the principal and changed colors differ materially as viewed by persons having the most common color vision deficiencies of dichromacy and anomalous trichromacy.
  • Dichromacy divided into protanopia, deuteranopia, and tritanopia, occurs when a human eye lacks one of the three types of cone pigments.
  • Anomalous trichromacy divided into protanomaly, deuteranomaly, and tritanomaly, occurs when one of the eye's three cone pigments is altered in spectral sensitivity.
  • a selected one of the principal and changed colors is restricted from being any color from green to red in the visible light spectrum or any color having a non-insignificant component of any color from green to red in the light spectrum in order to accommodate persons having the predominant red-green color vision deficiencies, namely protanopia, deuteranopia, protanomaly, and deuteranomaly.
  • the remaining one of the principal and changed colors is preferably restricted from being any color from violet to yellow in the visible light spectrum or any color having a non-insignificant component of any color from violet to yellow in the light spectrum in order to also accommodate persons having the lesser common blue-yellow color vision deficiencies of tritanomaly and tritanopia.
  • the VC region in twenty-seventh and twenty-eighth facets of the invention provides a CI impact signal if the threshold impact criteria are met.
  • the CI impact signal identifies an expected location for the print area and supplemental impact information.
  • a CC controller determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides a CC initiation signal.
  • the ID portion responds to the initiation signal by temporarily appearing as the changed color.
  • the principal and changed colors differ materially as viewed by persons having dichromacy and anomalous trichromacy.
  • a selected one of the principal and changed colors is restricted from being any color from green to red in the visible light spectrum or any color having a non-insignificant component of any color from green to red in the visible light spectrum.
  • the activity in the preceding twenty-eight facets of the invention can be tennis in which the object is a tennis ball.
  • the OI structure is incorporated into a tennis court for which the exposed surface has two baselines, two sidelines, two servicelines, and a centerline arranged conventionally. Each baseline, the sidelines, and the serviceline nearest that baseline define a backcourt so as to establish two backcourts.
  • the present CC capability can be incorporated into various parts of the tennis court.
  • the surface zone can be constituted with two VC backcourt area portions which partly occupy the backcourts and respectively adjoin the servicelines along largely their entire lengths. The CC capability then helps determine whether served tennis balls are "in” or "out”.
  • the CC capability in the invention's preceding twenty-eight facets enables a viewer to readily visually determine where the object impacted the exposed surface.
  • the accuracy in determining the location of the print area is very high.
  • a tennis player playing on a tennis court having the CC capability can, in the vast majority of instances, visually see whether a tennis ball impacting the court near a tennis line is "in” or "out". Both the need to use challenges for reviewing line calls and the delay for line-call review are greatly reduced.
  • the CC capability can be used in other sports, e.g., basketball, volleyball, football, and baseball/softball. While often a ball, the object can be implemented in other form such as a shoe of a person.
  • the CC capability can also be used in activities other than sports.
  • IB in-bounds
  • OB out-of-bounds
  • the IB area has two baselines, two (singles) sidelines, two servicelines, and a centerline arranged conventionally.
  • a tennis net is situated above an imaginary or real net line located midway between the baselines.
  • a backcourt is defined by each baseline, the sidelines, and the serviceline closest to that baseline so as to establish two backcourts.
  • Four servicecourts are defined by the sidelines, the servicelines, the centerline, and the net line.
  • the OI structure contains (a) two VC line-adjoining ("LA”) backcourt (“BC”) structure portions extending to the exposed surface at two LA BC area portions partly occupying the backcourts and respectively adjoining the servicelines, (b) four VC servicecourt (“SC”) structure portions extending to the exposed surface respectively at four LA SC area portions partly occupying the servicecourts and adjoining the centerline, and/or (c) two VC OB structure portions extending to the exposed surface at two LA OB area portions partly occupying the OB area on opposite sides of the net line and respectively adjoining the baselines.
  • Each LA BC structure portion if present, normally appears along its LA BC area portion as a principal BC color.
  • Each LA SC structure portion if present, normally appears along its LA SC area portion as a principal SC color.
  • Each LA OB structure portion, if present, normally appears along its LA OB area portion as a principal OB color.
  • Each LA structure portion in the OI structure of the invention's twenty-ninth facet includes an IS component and a CC component.
  • An ID segment of the IS component responds to the object impacting the LA area portion of that LA structure portion at an ID OC area by providing an impact effect if the impact meets threshold impact criteria.
  • An ID segment of the CC component responds to the impact effect by causing an ID portion of that LA structure portion to temporarily appear along an ID print area of that LA area portion as changed color materially different from the principal color of that LA structure portion. The print area of each LA area portion closely matches its OC area.
  • each print area When the object is a tennis ball, the color change at each print area enables viewers, such as the tennis players and any official(s), to readily visually determine where the tennis ball impacted the exposed surface and thus to determine rapidly whether the ball impacted "in” or "out".
  • Use of separate IS and CC components in each LA structure portion in the OI structure provides the benefits for the invention's first facet.
  • the ID portion of that structure portion in the invention's thirtieth facet provides a CI impact signal if the threshold impact criteria are met.
  • the CI impact signal identifies an expected location for the print area of that structure portion and supplemental impact information.
  • a CC controller determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides a CC initiation signal.
  • the ID portion of that structure portion responds to its initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing along its print area as its changed color.
  • the supplemental impact criteria are preferably characteristic of a tennis ball impacting the exposed surface.
  • the supplemental impact criteria can include size and/or shape criteria for each print area as impacted by a tennis ball.
  • the supplemental impact information can include time duration of the object in contact with each OC area.
  • the supplemental impact criteria then include OC duration criteria for a tennis ball impacting each VC area portion.
  • suitable impact of an object on an exposed surface of an OI structure of a sports-playing structure causes the exposed surface to temporarily change color largely at the impact area.
  • the object can be a sports instrument or a person including any clothing worn by the person.
  • the exposed surface consists of (a) an IB area defined by a closed boundary and (b) a surrounding OB area.
  • a closed boundary line extends along the closed boundary and has opposite inside and outside edges, one of which is situated in one of the IB and OB areas and the other of which meets the other of the IB and OB areas.
  • the OI structure in the invention's thirty-first and thirty-second facets contains VC inside-edge boundary-vicinity ("BV") LA structure extending to the surface at inside-edge LA area situated in the IB area and adjoining the inside edge of the boundary line at least partly along its length or/and (b) VC outside-edge BV LA structure extending to the surface at outside-edge LA area situated in the OB area and adjoining the outside edge of the boundary line at least partly along its length.
  • Each BV LA structure normally appears along its LA area as a normal-state BV LA color if that LA structure is present in the OI structure.
  • the inside-edge LA structure is present if the boundary line, including its outside edge, is in the OB area.
  • Each BV LA structure in the OI structure of the invention's thirty-first facet includes IS and CC components.
  • An ID segment of the IS component responds to the object impacting the LA area of that LA structure at an ID OC area by providing an impact effect if the impact meets threshold impact criteria.
  • An ID segment of the CC component responds to the impact effect by causing an ID portion of that LA structure to temporarily appear along an ID print area of that LA area as changed-state BV LA color materially different from the normal-state LA color of that LA structure.
  • each BV LA structure in the OI structure of the invention's thirty-second facet responds to the object impacting the LA area of that LA structure at the OC area by providing a CI impact signal if the impact meets threshold impact criteria.
  • the CI impact signal identifies an expected location of an ID print area in that LA area and supplemental impact information.
  • a CC controller determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides a CC initiation signal.
  • the ID portion of each LA structure responds to its initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing along its print area as its changed-state BV LA color.
  • the IB area has at least one finite-width internal line having a pair of opposite edges.
  • the OI structure contains, for each internal line, VC internal LA structure extending to the surface at LA area adjoining a selected one of the edges of that internal line at least partly along its length.
  • Each internal LA structure normally appears along its LA area as a normal-state internal LA color if that LA structure is in the OI structure.
  • Each internal LA structure in the OI structure of the invention's thirty-third facet includes IS and CC components.
  • An ID segment of the IS component responds to the object impacting the LA area of that LA structure at an ID OC area by providing an impact effect if the impact meets threshold impact criteria.
  • An ID segment of the CC component responds to the impact effect by causing an ID portion of that LA structure to temporarily appear along an ID print area of that LA area as changed-state internal LA color materially different from the normal-state LA color of that LA structure.
  • each internal LA structure in the OI structure of the invention's thirty-fourth facet responds to the object impacting the LA area of that LA structure at the OC area by providing a CI impact signal if the impact meets threshold impact criteria.
  • the CI impact signal identifies an expected location of an ID print area in that LA area and supplemental impact information.
  • a CC controller determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides a CC initiation signal.
  • the ID portion of each LA structure responds to its initiation signal by temporarily appearing along its print area as its changed-state internal LA color.
  • this inventive aspect serves to help determine whether shots taken near the three-point lines in basketball qualify for three points and whether violations of the attack lines occur in volleyball.
  • Suitable impact of an object on an exposed surface of an OI structure used in playing football for thirty-fifth and thirty-sixth facets of the invention and baseball or softball for thirty-seventh and thirty-eighth facets of the invention causes the exposed surface to temporarily change color largely at the impact area.
  • the object is football or a person including any clothing, e.g., shoe, worn by the person.
  • the exposed surface for football consists of an IB area and an OB area having two end lines and two side lines extending between the end lines to define the IB area.
  • Each end or side line is an open boundary line having inside and outside edges respectively meeting the IB area and situated in the OB area.
  • the football OI structure includes (a) two VC inside-edge end-line-adjoining ("ELA”) structure parts extending to the surface at two inside-edge ELA area parts in the IB area so as to adjoin the inside edges of the end lines, (b) two VC inside-edge side-line-adjoining (“SLA”) structure parts extending to the surface at two inside-edge SLA area parts in the IB area so as to adjoin the inside edges of the side lines, (c) two VC end-line structure parts extending to the surface at the end lines, and/or (d) two VC side-line structure parts extending to the surface at the side lines.
  • ELA inside-edge end-line-adjoining
  • SLA VC inside-edge side-line-adjoining
  • Each ELA or SLA structure part is a VC LA structure part normally appearing along its LA area part as a principal ("PP") color.
  • Each end-line or side-line structure part is a VC line structure part normally appearing along its open boundary line as an additional (“AD") color.
  • Each boundary and the adjoining LA area part are usually situated on hard material of a path.
  • each LA or line structure part in the OI structure of the invention's thirty-fifth facet responds to the object impacting the area part of that structure part at an ID OC area by temporarily appearing along a closely matching ID print area of that area part as changed or altered color materially different from that structure part's PP or AD color if the impact meets threshold impact criteria.
  • the ID portion of each LA or line structure part in the OI structure of the invention's thirty-sixth facet provides a CI impact signal if the threshold impact criteria are met.
  • the CI impact signal identifies an expected location of the print area and supplemental information for the impact.
  • a CC controller determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides the ID portion of that LA or line structure part with a CC initiation signal that causes that ID portion to temporarily appear along its print area as its changed or altered color.
  • the object is a baseball or softball.
  • the exposed surface consists of (a) a fair area defined by an outfield barrier and two perpendicular foul lines having parts that extend up the barrier, (b) the inside area of the barrier, and (c) a foul area adjoining the fair area along the foul lines.
  • the fair area consists of a general infield area and a general outfield area both of which include parts of each foul line.
  • the foul area includes (a) two foul-territory ("FLT”) dirt area sections extending from home plate along the foul lines beyond their bases partway to the barrier and (b) two FLT grass area sections extending from the FLT dirt area sections along the foul lines at least partway to the barrier.
  • FLT foul-territory
  • the baseball/softball OI structure includes (a) two VC main outfield-adjoining FLT LA structure parts extending to the surface at two main outfield-adjoining FLT LA area parts adjoining the main outfield foul- line parts and/or (b) two VC main outfield foul-line structure parts extending to the surface at the main outfield foul-line parts.
  • Each main outfield-adjoining FLT LA structure part if present, normally appears along its LA area part as a PP outfield color.
  • Each main outfield foul-line structure part, if present, normally appears along its foul-line part as an AD outfield color.
  • Two channels usually extend down to hard material in grass along the foul lines.
  • the channels When the main outfield-adjoining FLT LA structure parts are present, the channels extend respectively into the FLT grass area sections so that the main outfield-adjoining FLT LA area parts are situated along the hard material.
  • each FLT LA or foul-line structure part in the OI structure of the invention's thirty- seventh facet responds to the object impacting the area part of that structure part at an ID OC area by temporarily appearing along a closely matching ID print area of that area part as changed or altered outfield color materially different from that structure part's PP or AD outfield color if the impact meets threshold impact criteria.
  • the ID portion of each FLT LA or foul-line structure part in the OI structure of the invention's thirty- eighth facet provides a CI impact signal if the threshold impact criteria are met.
  • the CI impact signal identifies an expected location of the print area and supplemental information for the impact.
  • a CC controller determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides the ID portion of that FLT LA or foul-line structure part with a CC initiation signal that causes its ID portion to temporarily appear along its print area as its changed or altered outfield color. Impacts on and near the remaining parts of the foul lines beyond their bases, including the barrier parts, are preferably handled in the same way as the main outfield foul-line parts.
  • the OI structure in thirty-ninth and fortieth facets of the invention contains a principal VC region and a secondary region extending to the exposed surface respectively at adjoining principal and secondary surface zones.
  • the principal region has the characteristics described above.
  • the secondary region fixedly appears along the secondary surface zone as a secondary color. Hence, impact of the object on the secondary zone does not cause it to significantly change color at the impact area of the secondary zone.
  • the object is spherical here.
  • each surface zone has a coefficient of orthogonal velocity restitution, i.e., the ratio of rebound orthogonal velocity component to negative incident orthogonal velocity component, and a ratio of tangential velocity restitution, i.e., the ratio of rebound tangential velocity component to incident tangential velocity component, for the object impacting that zone.
  • Restitution matching is provided across the two surface zones.
  • the coefficients of orthogonal velocity restitution for the two zones differ by no more than 15% for the object separately impacting the zones at largely identical impact conditions of incident linear and angular vector velocity.
  • the ratios of tangential velocity restitution for the two zones differ by no more than 5% for the object separately impacting the zones at largely identical impact conditions of incident linear and angular vector velocity at a reference incident angle of 16° to the exposed surface at each location where the object impacts the exposed surface.
  • the restitution matching enables the rebound characteristics of the object to be largely independent of whether it contacts the principal or secondary surface zone. This is particularly desirable in sports such as tennis where the object is a tennis ball.
  • the combination of the present CC capability and the restitution matching can be provided at various parts of the tennis court.
  • the principal and secondary surface zones can respectively be (a) two elongated VC area portions partly occupying the backcourts and respectively adjoining the servicelines along largely their entire lengths and (a) two fixed-color ("FC”) area portions partly occupying the backcourts and respectively adjoining the VC area portions along largely their entire lengths.
  • FC fixed-color
  • the CC capability is used in determining whether served tennis balls are "in” or "out” while the restitution matching desirably enables the object rebound characteristics to be quite similar for the VC and FC area portions.
  • the ID portion here is an ID portion of the principal region.
  • the ID portion responds to the object impacting the principal zone at the OC area by temporarily appearing along the print area as the changed color if the impact meets the threshold impact criteria.
  • the principal region in the invention's fortieth facet externally provides a CI impact signal if the impact causes the threshold impact criteria to be met.
  • the CI impact signal identifies an expected location for the print area and
  • a CC controller determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides a CC initiation signal.
  • the ID portion responds to the initiation signal by temporarily appearing as the changed color.
  • OT apparatus tracks movement of the object over the exposed surface and provides an image-causing tracking impact signal when the object impacts the surface zone according to the tracking.
  • An IG system responds to at least the tracking impact signal by generating a PAV image comprising an image of the print area and adjacent area of the exposed surface.
  • the IG system typically generates the PAV image in substantially sole response to the impact signal.
  • the IG system generates the PAV image in joint response to the impact signal and instruction to generate the PAV image. In either case, a visible record of the print area is generated.
  • the image-smoothening capability entails (a) determining a portion of the surface-zone boundary where the print area is nearest the boundary, (b) approximating at least that boundary portion as a smooth boundary vicinity curve, (c) approximating the print area perimeter, or a portion nearest the boundary, as a smooth perimeter vicinity curve, (d) comparing the vicinity curves to determine if they meet or overlap, and (e) providing an indication, e.g., an image, of the comparison.
  • the VC region in a forty-second facet of the invention responds to the object impacting the surface zone at the OC area by providing an LI impact signal if the impact meets the threshold impact criteria.
  • the LI impact signal identifies an ID threshold CM area where the impact meets the threshold impact criteria in the surface zone.
  • the threshold CM area is usually smaller than the OC area because the impact meets the threshold impact criteria across only part, usually an internal part, of the OC area.
  • a CC controller Responsive to the LI impact signal, if provided, a CC controller provides a CC initiation signal which designates a print area in the surface zone such that the print area is larger than the threshold CM area and at least partly encompasses, at least mostly outwardly conforms to, and is concentric with the OC area.
  • the ID portion responds to the initiation signal by temporarily appearing along the print area as the changed color.
  • the controller compensates for the threshold CM area being smaller than the OC area so that the print area can closely match the OC area in size, shape, and location.
  • a technique is preferably employed for distinguishing between impacts for which color change is desired and impacts, e.g., of bodies other than the object, for which color change is not desired.
  • the VC region provides a CI impact signal if the impact meets the threshold impact criteria instead of providing the LI signal if the threshold impact criteria are met.
  • the CI impact signal identifies an expected location for the CM area and supplemental impact information.
  • the CC controller determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides the CC initiation signal.
  • the ID portion responds to the initiation signal by temporarily appearing as the changed color.
  • OT control apparatus tracks movement of the object over the exposed surface.
  • the CC controller responds to at least the LI impact signal, if provided, by providing the initiation signal to which the ID portion responds by temporarily appearing along the print area as the changed color if the tracked movement indicates that the object is expected to impact the OC area.
  • the CC controller responds to at least the LI impact signal, if provided, by providing the initiation signal if the tracking indicates that the object impacted, or is expected to impact, the OC area.
  • the ID portion of the VC region then responds to the initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing along the print area as the changed color. In either case, a body impacting the surface zone but not being so tracked does not cause a color change at the body's impact site on the surface zone.
  • the CC capability in the last six facets of the invention enables a viewer to readily visually determine where the object impacted the exposed surface.
  • the accuracy in determining the print-area location is again very high.
  • a tennis player playing on a tennis court provided with the CC capability can, in the vast majority of instances, visually see whether a tennis ball impacting the court near a tennis line is "in” or "out".
  • the need to use challenges for reviewing line calls and the delay for such review are greatly reduced.
  • the CC capability of the invention's last six facets can be employed in other sports, e.g., basketball, volleyball, football, and baseball/softball. Although often a ball, the object can be implemented in other form such as a shoe of a person.
  • the CC capability can again be used in activities other than sports. In short, the invention provides a very large advance over the prior art.
  • Figs.1 and 2 are layout view of a standard tennis court with examples of areas where tennis balls contact the court's playing surface near the tennis lines indicated in Fig.2.
  • FIGs. 3 and 4 are schematic diagrams of simulations of a tennis ball impacting a tennis court as determined by the Hawk-Eye system.
  • Figs.5a - 5c are layout views of an object-impact (“OI") structure of an information-presentation (“IP”) structure embodiable or/and extendable according to the invention, the OI structure having a surface for being impacted by an object at an impact-dependent (“ID") area and for changing color along a corresponding print area of a variable-color (“VC”) region.
  • OI object-impact
  • ID information-presentation
  • VC variable-color
  • Figs.6a - 6c are cross-sectional side views of an embodiment of the OI structure of Figs.5a - 5c.
  • Figs.7 - 9 are graphs of spectral radiosity as a function of wavelength.
  • Fig.10 is a graph of a radiosity parameter as a function of time.
  • Figs.11a - 11c, 12a - 12c, 13a - 13c, 14a - 14c, 15a - 15c, 16a - 16c, 17a - 17c, 18a - 18c, and 19a - 19c are cross-sectional side views of nine respective further embodiments of the OI structure of Figs.5a - 5c according to the invention.
  • Figs.20a and 20b and 21a and 21b are respective cross-sectional side views of two variations of the OI structure of Figs.5a - 5c according to the invention.
  • Figs.20a and 20b are respectively taken through planes a1-a1 and b1-b1 in Figs.5a and 5b subject to deletion of the fixed-color region in the OI structure of Figs.5a and 5b.
  • Figs.21a and 21b The same applies to Figs.21a and 21b.
  • FIGs.22a and 22b are additional layout views of the OI structure of Figs.5a - 5c for different impact conditions than represented in Figs.5b and 5c.
  • Figs.23a and 23b are cross-sectional side views of the embodiment of the OI structures of Figs.6a - 6c for the impact conditions respectively represented in Figs.22a and 22b.
  • the cross sections of Figs.23a and 23b are respectively taken through planes a2-a2 and b2-b2 in Figs.22a and 22b.
  • Figs.24a and 24b are composite block diagrams/side cross-sectional views of two respective embodiments of the impact-sensitive color-change ("ISCC") structure in the OI structure of Figs.11a - 11c or 14a - 14c.
  • ISCC impact-sensitive color-change
  • Figs.25a and 25b are composite block diagrams/side cross-sectional views of two respective embodiments of the ISCC structure in the OI structure of Figs.12a - 12c, 15a - 15c, 17a - 17c, 19a - 19c, or 21a and 21b.
  • Figs.26a and 26b, 27a and 27b, 28a and 28b, 29a and 29b, 30a and 30b, and 31a and 31b are cross-sectional side views showing how color changing occurs by light reflection in VC regions.
  • Figs.26a and 26b apply to the VC region in Figs.6a - 6c or 20a and 20b.
  • Figs.27a and 27b apply to the VC region in Figs. 11a - 11c.
  • Figs.28a and 28b apply to some embodiments of the VC region in Figs.12a - 12c or 21a and 21b.
  • Figs.29a and 29b apply to the VC region in Figs.13a - 13c.
  • Figs.30a and 30b apply to the VC region in Figs. 14a - 14c.
  • Figs.31a and 31b apply to some embodiments of the VC region in Figs.15a - 15c.
  • Figs.32a and 32b, 33a and 33b, 34a and 34b, 35a and 35b, 36a and 36b, and 37a and 37b are cross-sectional side views showing how color changing occurs by light emission in VC regions.
  • Figs.32a and 32b apply to the VC region in Figs.6a - 6c or 20a and 20b.
  • Figs.33a and 33b apply to the VC region in Figs. 11a - 11c.
  • Figs.34a and 34b apply to the VC region in Figs.12a - 12c or 21a and 21b.
  • Figs.35a and 35b apply to the VC region in Figs.13a - 13c.
  • Figs.36a and 36b apply to the VC region in Figs.14a - 14c.
  • Figs.37a and 37b apply to the VC region in Figs.15a - 15c.
  • Figs.38a and 38b are layout views of a cellular embodiment of the OI structure of Figs.5a - 5c according to the invention.
  • the cross section of each of Figs.41a, 42a, 43a, 44a, 45a, 46a, 47a, 48a, 49a, and 50a described below is taken through plane a3-a3 in Fig.38a.
  • the cross section of each of Figs.41b, 42b, 43b, 44b, 45b, 46b, 47b, 48b, 49b, and 50b described below is taken through plane b3-b3 in Fig.38b.
  • Figs.39a and 39b are diagrams of exemplary quantized print areas within circular object-contact areas for the OI structure of Figs.38a and 38b.
  • Fig.40 is a graph of the ratio of the difference in area between a true circle and a quantized circle as a function of the ratio of the radius of the true circle to the length/width dimension of identical squares forming the quantized circle.
  • Figs.41a and 41b, 42a and 42b, 43a and 43b, 44a and 44b, 45a and 45b, 46a and 46b, 47a and 47b, 48a and 48b, 49a and 49b, and 50a and 50b are cross-sectional side views of ten respective embodiments of the OI structure of Figs.38a and 38b.
  • Fig.51 is an expanded cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the cellular ISCC structure in the OI structure of Figs.41a and 41b, 44a and 44b, 47a and 47b, or 49a and 49b.
  • Fig.52 is an expanded cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the cellular ISCC structure in the OI structure of Figs.42a and 42b or 45a and 45b.
  • Fig.53 is an expanded cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the cellular ISCC structure in the OI structure of Figs.43a and 43b or 46a and 46b.
  • Figs.54a and 54b are composite block diagrams/layout views of an IP structure containing an OI structure having a surface for being impacted by an object at an ID area and for changing color along a corresponding print area of a VC region under control of a duration controller for adjusting color-change ("CC") duration according to the invention.
  • CC color-change
  • Figs.55 - 58 are composite block diagrams/side cross-sectional views of four respective embodiments of the IP structure of Figs.54a and 54b according to the invention.
  • the cross section of the layout portion of each of Figs.55 - 58 is taken through plane b4-b4 in Fig.54b.
  • Figs.59a and 59b are composite block diagrams/layout views of an IP structure containing an OI structure having a surface for being impacted by an object at an ID area and for changing color along a corresponding print area of a cellular VC region under control of a duration controller for extending CC duration according to the invention.
  • Figs.60 - 63 are composite block diagrams/side cross-sectional views of four respective embodiments of the IP structure of Figs.59a and 59b according to the invention.
  • the cross section of the layout portion of each of Figs.60 - 63 is taken through plane b5-b5 in Fig.59b.
  • Figs.64a and 64b are composite block diagrams/layout views of an IP structure containing an OI structure having a surface for being impacted by an object at an ID area and for changing color along a corresponding print area of a VC region under control of an intelligent controller according to the invention.
  • Figs.65 - 68 are composite block diagrams/side cross-sectional views of four respective embodiments of the IP structure of Figs.64a and 64b according to the invention. The cross section of the layout portion of each of Figs.65 - 68 is taken through plane b6-b6 in Fig.64b.
  • Figs.69a and 69b are composite block diagrams/layout views of an IP structure containing an OI structure having a surface for being impacted by an object at an ID area and for changing color along a corresponding print area of a cellular VC region under control of an intelligent controller according to the invention.
  • Figs.70 - 73 are composite block diagrams/side cross-sectional views of four respective embodiments of the IP structure of Figs.69a and 69b according to the invention.
  • the cross section of the layout portion of each of Figs.70 - 73 is taken through plane b7-b7 in Fig.69b.
  • Figs.74 - 77 are composite block diagrams/perspective cross-sectional views of four respective IP structures, each containing an OI structure having a surface for being impacted by an object at an ID area and for changing color along a corresponding print area of a VC region and also having an image-generating capability according to the invention.
  • Figs.78a and 78b are layout views of an OI structure having a surface for being impacted by an object at an ID area and for changing color along a corresponding print area of one or both of two adjoining VC regions according to the invention.
  • Figs.79a and 79b are layout views of an OI structure having a surface for being impacted by an object at an ID area and for changing color along a corresponding print area of one or more of three consecutively adjoining VC regions according to the invention.
  • the cross section of each of Figs.80a, 81a, 82a, 83a, 84a, and 85a described below is taken through plane a8-a8 in Fig.79a.
  • the cross section of each of Figs. 80b, 81b, 82b, 83b, 84b, and 85b described below is taken through plane b8-b8 in Fig.79b.
  • Label a8* in each of Figs.80a, 81a, 82a, 83a, 84a, and 85a indicates the location of a cross section taken through plane a8*-a8* in Fig.78a.
  • Label b8* in each of Figs.80b, 81b, 82b, 83b, 84b, and 85b indicates the location of a cross section taken through plane b8*-b8* in Fig.78b.
  • Figs.80a and 80b, 81a and 81b, 82a and 82b, 83a and 83b, 84a and 84b, and 85a and 85b are cross-sectional side views of six respective embodiments of the OI structure of Figs.79a and 79b.
  • Figs.86a and 86b are layout views of an OI structure having a surface for being impacted by an object at an ID area and for changing color along a corresponding print area of one or both of two adjoining cellular VC regions according to the invention.
  • Figs.87a and 87b are layout views of an OI structure having a surface for being impacted by an object at an ID area and for changing color along a corresponding print area of one or more of three consecutively adjoining cellular VC regions according to the invention.
  • Figs.88 and 89 are composite block diagrams/layout views of two respective IP structures, each containing an OI structure having a surface for being impacted by an object at an ID area and for changing color along a corresponding print area of one or more of three consecutively adjoining VC regions under control of a CC controller according to the invention.
  • Figs.90 - 93 are composite block diagrams/perspective cross-sectional views of four respective IP structures, each containing an OI structure having a surface for being impacted by an object at an ID area and for changing color along a corresponding print area of one or more of three consecutively adjoining VC regions and having an image-generating capability according to the invention.
  • Figs.94a - 94d are layout views of four respective examples of the object-contact location and resultant print area for the object variously impacting the surface in the OI structures of Figs.5a and 5b, 78a and 78b, and 79a and 79b.
  • Figs.95a - 95d are screen views of smooth-curve approximations, according to the invention, of the print area and nearby surface area respectively for the examples of Figs.94a - 94d.
  • FIGs.96 and 97 are layout views of two respective exemplary embodiments of an IP structure implemented into a tennis court according to the invention.
  • Figs.98 - 100 are layout views of exemplary embodiments of an IP structure respectively implemented into a basketball court, a volleyball court, and a football field according to the invention.
  • Fig.101 is a perspective view of an exemplary embodiment of an IP structure implemented into a baseball or softball field according to the invention.
  • Figs.102a and 102b are cross-sectional views of two models of a hollow ball impacting an inclined surface.
  • Figs.103 and 104 are composite block diagrams/perspective cross-sectional views of two respective IP structures, each containing an OI structure having a surface for being impacted by an object at an ID area and for changing color along a corresponding print area of a VC region under control of an intelligent controller according to the invention.
  • Figs.105 and 106 are composite block diagrams/perspective cross-sectional views of two respective IP structures, each containing an OI structure having a surface for being impacted by an object at an ID area and for changing color along a corresponding print area of one or more of three consecutively adjoining VC regions under control of an intelligent controller according to the invention.
  • the visible light spectrum extends across a wavelength range specified as being as narrow as 400 - 700 nm to as wide as 380 - 780 nm.
  • Light in the visible wavelength range produces a continuous variation in spectral color from violet to red.
  • a visible color is black, any spectral color, and any color creatable from any combination of spectral colors.
  • visible color includes white, gray, brown, and magenta because each of them is creatable from spectral colors even though none of them is itself in the visible spectrum. Further recitations of color or light herein mean visible color or visible light.
  • Radiation in the ultraviolet and infrared spectra are respectively hereafter termed ultraviolet ("UV") and infrared (“IR”) radiation.
  • main spectral colors Various wavelength ranges are reported for the main spectral colors. Although indigo or/and cyan are sometimes identified as main spectral colors, the main spectral colors are here considered to be violet, blue, green, yellow, orange, and red having the wavelength ranges presented in Table 1 and determined as the averages of the ranges reported in ten references rounded off to the nearest 5 nm using the maximum specified range of 380 - 780 nm for the visible spectrum.
  • Recitations of light striking, or incident on, a surface of a body mean that the light strikes, or is incident on, the surface from outside the body.
  • the color of the surface is determined by the wavelengths of light leaving the surface and traveling away from the body.
  • Such light variously consists of incident light reflected by the body so as to leave it along the surface, light emitted by the body so as to leave it along the surface, and light leaving the body along the surface after entering the body along one or more other surfaces and passing through the body.
  • Even if the characteristics that define the color of the surface are fixed, its color can differ if it is struck by light of different wavelength characteristics. For instance, the surface appears as one color when struck by white light but as another color when struck by non-white light.
  • the color of the surface is directly determined by the wavelengths of the light traveling from the surface to the person's eye(s) and the brain's interpretation of those wavelengths. If an image of the surface is captured by a color camera whose captured image is later viewed by a person, the surface's color is initially established by the wavelengths of the light traveling from the surface to the camera. The surface's color as presented in the image is then determined by the wavelengths of the light traveling from the image to the person's eye(s) and the brain's interpretation of those wavelengths. In either case, the wavelengths of light leaving the surface define its color subject, for the camera, to any color distortion introduced by the camera.
  • the radiosity, sometimes termed intensity, of light of a particular color is the total power per unit area of that light leaving a body along a surface.
  • the spectral radiosity of light of a particular color is the total power per unit area per unit wavelength at each wavelength of light leaving a body along a surface.
  • the spectral radiosity constituency (or spectral radiosity profile) of light of a particular color is the variation (or distribution) of spectral radiosity as a function of wavelength and defines the wavelength constituency of that light. Inasmuch as the spectral radiosity of light is zero outside the visible spectrum, the radiosity of light of a particular color is the integral of the spectral radiosity constituency across the visible spectrum.
  • the spectrum-integrated absolute spectral radiosity difference between light of two different colors is the integral of the absolute value of the difference between the spectral radiosities of the two colors across the visible spectrum.
  • the spectral radiosity of light leaving it may differ from that of light entering it due to phenomena such as light absorption in the body. For instance, if light appears as a shade of a color upon entering a body and if the light's radiosity decreases in passing through the body, the light appears as a lighter shade of that color upon leaving the body.
  • each reflected component differs from each other reflected component because the light reflected by each reflected component causes its spectral radiosity constituency to differ from the spectral radiosity constituency of each other reflected component.
  • the normalized spectral radiosity of light of a particular color is its spectral radiosity divided by its radiosity.
  • the normalized spectral radiosity constituency of light of a particular color is the variation of its normalized spectral radiosity as a function of wavelength.
  • the integral of the normalized spectral radiosity constituency across the visible spectrum is one.
  • use of the same reference nomenclature to identify the light leaving the body as used to identify the light entering it means that the normalized spectral radiosity constituency remains essentially the same during passage through the body even though the spectral radiosity constituency may change during the passage. This convention is used below for light undergoing plane polarization in passing through a body.
  • Rods and cones in the human eye are sensitive to incoming light.
  • Rods are generally sensitive to the radiosity of the light.
  • Cones are generally sensitive to its spectral radiosity and thus to its wavelength constituency.
  • Cones consist of (a) short-wavelength, or "blue”, cones sensitive to light typically in the wavelength range of 380 - 520 nm with a typical peak sensitivity at 420 - 440 nm, (b) medium-wavelength, or "green”, cones sensitive to light typically in the wavelength range of 440 - 650 nm with a typical peak sensitivity at 535 - 555 nm, and (c) long-wavelength, or "red”, cones sensitive to light typically in the wavelength range of 480 - 780 nm with a typical peak sensitivity at 565 - 580 nm.
  • the sensitivity ranges overlap considerably, especially for green and red cones. Electrical impulses indicative of the stimulation of rods and cones by light are supplied to the brain which
  • a recitation that two or more colors materially differ herein means that the colors differ materially as viewed by a person of standard (or average) eyesight/brain-processing capability.
  • the verb "appear”, including grammatical variations such as “appearing”, as used herein for the chromatic characteristics of light means its apparent color as perceived by the standard human eye/brain.
  • a recitation that a body appears along a surface of the body as a specified color means that the body appears along the surface "largely” as that color.
  • the spectral radiosity constituency of light of the specified color may so vary across the surface that the specified color is a composite of different colors.
  • the surface portions from where light of wavelengths suitable for the different colors leave the body are usually so microscopically distributed among one another or/and occupy area sufficiently small that the standard human eye/brain interprets that light as essentially a single color.
  • a "species" of light means light having a particular spectral radiosity constituency. Although a light species produces a color when only light of that species leaves a surface of a body, only some of the below- described light species are described as being of wavelength suitable for forming colors. A recitation that multiple species of the total light leaving a body along a surface area form light of wavelength suitable for a particular color also means that the body appears along the area as that color. A recitation that light leaves a body along an adjoining body means that the light leaves the first body along the interface between the two bodies and vice versa. When all the light leaving a body along an internal interface with another body is of wavelength suitable for a selected color, the first body would visually appear as the selected color along the interface if it were an exposed surface.
  • Each color identified below by notation beginning with a letter, e.g., "A” or "X”, means a selected color. Each such selected color may be a single color or a combination of colors appearing as a single color due to suitable mixture of light of wavelengths of those colors.
  • the expression "light of wavelength” means one or more subranges of the wavelength range of the visible spectrum.
  • the terminology consisting of that reference notation followed by the word "light” means a species of light of wavelength of that color, i.e., suitable for forming that color.
  • V light means a species of light of wavelength suitable for forming color V.
  • a recitation that two or more colors differ means that light of those colors differs. If the colors are indicated as differing in a particular way, e.g., usually or materially, the light of those colors differ in the same way.
  • Instances occur in which a body is described as reflecting or emitting light of wavelength of a selected color. Letting that light be termed the "selected color light", the reflection or emission of the selected color light may occur generally along a surface of the body, i.e., directly at the surface or/and at locations internal to the body within short distances of the surface such that the reflected or emitted light does not undergo significant attenuation in traveling those short distances.
  • the body may be sufficiently transmissive of the selected color light that it is alternatively or additionally reflected or emitted inside the body at substantial distances away from the surface and undergoes significant attenuation before exiting the body via the surface. Light striking a body and not reflected by it is absorbed or/and transmitted by it.
  • the term "encompasses" means is common to (or includes), usually along a surface.
  • a first item partly encompasses a second item when part of the area of the second item along a suitable surface is common to the first item.
  • a description of an essentially two-dimensional first item as "outwardly conforming" to an essentially two-dimensional second item means that the perimeter of the first item, or the outer perimeter of the first item if it is shaped, e.g., as an annulus, to have outer and inner perimeters relative to its center, conforms to the perimeter of the second item, or to the outer perimeter of the second item if it is likewise shaped to have outer and inner perimeters relative to its center.
  • a "thickness location" of a body means a location extending largely fully through the body's thickness.
  • transmissivity of a body at one or more thickness locations to light perpendicularly incident on the body at at least wavelength suitable for one or more selected colors is presented as a group of transmissivity specifications.
  • transmissivity specifications include a usual minimum value for the body's transmissivity to light perpendicularly incident on a surface of the body at wavelength suitable for a selected color where the body normally visually appears along the surface as a principal color and where an impact-dependent print area of the surface changes color in response to an object impacting the surface at an object-contact area generally outwardly conforming to the print area so that it temporarily appears as changed color materially different from the principal color.
  • the body may have thickness locations where the transmissivity of the perpendicularly incident light is less than the usual minimum. If so, the corresponding locations along the surface still normally appear as the principal color due to phenomena such as light scattering and non-perpendicular light reflection and by arranging for such thickness locations to be sufficiently laterally small that their actual colors are not significantly perceivable by the standard human eye/brain. Any such corresponding locations along the print area similarly temporarily appear as the changed color.
  • the body meets the requisite color appearances along the surface, including the print area, even though the body's transmissivity to the incident light is less than the usual minimum at one or more thickness locations.
  • Material is transparent if the shape of a body separated from the material only by air or vacuum can be clearly and accurately seen through the material. The material is transparent even if the body's shape is magnified or shrunk as seen through the material. Transparent material is clear transparent if the color(s) of the body as seen through the material are the same as the body's actual color(s). Transparent material is tinted transparent if the color(s) of the body as seen through the material differ from the body's actual color(s) due to tinting light reflection by the material.
  • impact-dependent as used in describing a three-dimensional region or a surface area means that the lateral extent of the region or area depends on the lateral extent of the location where an object impacts the region or area.
  • Impact-dependent segments of auxiliary layers, electrode assemblies, electrode structures, and core layers are often respectively described below as auxiliary segments, assembly segments, electrode segments, and core segments.
  • An "arbitrary" shape means any shape and includes shapes not significantly restricted to a largely fixed characteristic, such as a largely fixed dimension, along the shape.
  • An arbitrary shape is not limited to one or more predefined shapes such as polygons, regular closed curves, and finite-width lines, straight or curved.
  • Recitations of an action occurring "along” a body or along a surface of a body mean that the action occurs within a short distance of the surface, often inside the body, and not necessarily at the surface.
  • the expressions “s “s “situated fully along”, “lying fully along”, “extending fully along”, and grammatical variations mean adjoining along substantially the entire length (of).
  • a majority component of a multi-component item is a component constituting more than 50% of the item according to a suitable measurement.
  • An N% majority component of a multi-component item is a component constituting at least N% of the item where N is a number greater than 50.
  • Each provision that light of a first species is a (or the) majority component of light of a second species means that the light of the first species is radiositywise, i.e., in terms of radiosity, a (or the) majority component of light of the second species.
  • a majority component of a color means radiositywise a majority component of light forming that color.
  • the percentage difference between two values of a parameter means the quotient, converted to percent, of their difference and average.
  • normally refers to actions occurring during the normal state, explained below, in the object-impact structures of the invention, e.g., the expression “normally appears” means visually appears during the normal state. Other time-related terms, such as “usually” and “typically”, are used to describe actions occurring during the normal state but not limited to occurring during the normal state.
  • temporary refers to actions occurring during the changed state, defined below, in the object-impact structures, e.g., the expression “temporarily appears” means visually appears during the changed state. Force acting on a body normal, i.e., perpendicular, to a surface where it is contacted by the body, is termed “orthogonal” force herein to avoid confusion with the meaning of "normal” otherwise used herein.
  • a recitation of the form "Item J1, J2, or J3 is connected to item K1, K2, or K3" means that item J1 is connected to item K1, item J2 is connected to item K2, and item J3 is connected to item K3.
  • the plural term "criteria” is generally used below to describe the various types of standards used in the invention because each type of standards is generally capable of consisting of multiple standards.
  • Each signal described below as being transmitted via a communication path is transmitted wirelessly or via one or more electrical wires of that communication path.
  • a recitation that a body undergoes a change in response to a signal means that that the change occurs due to a change in a variable, e.g., current and voltage, in which the signal exists.
  • Light provided from a particular source or in a particular way such as emission or reflection may be viewed as a light beam.
  • Light provided from multiple sources or in multiple ways may be viewed as multiple light beams.
  • conductive means electrically conductive, electrically resistive, and electrically insulating except as otherwise indicated.
  • a material having a resistivity less than 10 ohm-cm at 300°K is deemed to be conductive.
  • a material having a resistivity greater than 10 10 ohm-cm at 300°K is deemed to be insulating (or dielectric).
  • a material having a resistivity from 10 ohm-cm to 10 10 ohm-cm at 300°K is deemed to be resistive.
  • Resistive materials conduct current with the conduction capability progressively increasing as the resistivity decreases from 10 10 ohm-cm to 10 ohm-cm at 300°K.
  • conductivity-based criteria are numerically the inverse of resistivity-based criteria.
  • CI means characteristics-identifying.
  • CLA means centerline- adjoining.
  • CM means criteria-meeting.
  • COM means communication.
  • CR means changeably reflective.
  • DE means duration-extension.
  • DF means deformation.
  • DP means distributed-pressure.
  • EVA means endline-adjoining or end-line-adjoining.
  • EM means electromagnetic.
  • FA means far auxiliary.
  • FC means fixed-color.
  • FLT means foul-territory.
  • FLV means foul-line-vicinity.
  • FRT means fair-territory.
  • GAB means general assembly.
  • GFA means general far auxiliary.
  • HA means half-alley.
  • IB means inbounds.
  • ID means "impact-dependent”.
  • IDVC means impact-dependent variable-color.
  • IF means interface.
  • IG means image-generating.
  • IP means information-presentation.
  • IS means impact-sensitive.
  • ISCC means impact-sensitive color-change.
  • LA means line-adjoining.
  • LC means liquid-crystal.
  • LE means light-emissive.
  • LI means location-identifying.
  • NA means near auxiliary.
  • NE means near electrode.
  • OB means out-of-bounds.
  • OI means object-impact.
  • OS means object- separation.
  • OOT means object-tracking.
  • PA means print-area.
  • PAV means print-area vicinity.
  • PS means pressure-spreading.
  • PSCC pressure-sensitive color-change.
  • PZ means polarization.
  • RA means reflection-adjusting.
  • QC means quartercourt.
  • SC means servicecourt.
  • SF means surface.
  • SLA means sideline-adjoining or side-line-adjoining.
  • SS means surface-structure.
  • SVLA means serviceline-adjoining.
  • TH means threshold.
  • VA means voltage-application.
  • VC means variable-color.
  • WI means wavelength- independent.
  • XN means transition.
  • 3P means three-point.
  • 3PL means three-point-line.
  • 3PLV means three-point-line-vicinity.
  • Figs.5a - 5c illustrate the layout of a basic object-impact structure 100 which undergoes reversible color changes along an externally exposed surface 102 according to the invention when exposed surface 102 is impacted by an object 104 during an activity such as a sport.
  • OI object-impact
  • Impact hereafter means impact of object 104 on surface 102.
  • Fig.5a presents the general layout of OI structure 100.
  • Figs.5b and 5c depict exemplary color changes that occur along surface 102 due to the impact.
  • Object 104 leaves surface 102 subsequent to impact and is indicated in dashed line in Figs.5b and 5c at locations shortly after impact. Although object 104 is often directed toward particular locations on surface 102, object 104 can generally impact anywhere on surface 102.
  • Object 104 is typically airborne and separated from other solid matter prior to impact.
  • object 104 is typically a sports instrument such as a spherical ball, e.g., a tennis ball, basketball, or volleyball when the activity is tennis, basketball, or volleyball.
  • Object 104 can, however, be part of a larger body that may not be airborne prior to impact.
  • object 104 can be a shoe on a foot of a person such as a tennis, basketball, or volleyball player.
  • Different embodiments of OI structure 100 can be employed, usually in different parts of surface 102, so that the embodiments of object 104 differ from OI embodiment to OI embodiment.
  • OI structure 100 which serves as or in an information-presentation structure, is used in determining whether object 104 impacts a specified zone of surface 102.
  • structure 100 contains a principal variable-color region 106 and a secondary fixed-color region 108 which meet at a region-region interface 110.
  • "VC" and "FC” hereafter respectively mean variable-color and fixed-color.
  • interface 110 appears straight in Fig.5, VC region 106 and FC region 108 can be variously geometrically configured along interface 110, e.g., curved, or flat and curved. They can meet at corners.
  • FC region 108 can extend partly or fully laterally around VC region 106 and vice versa. For instance, region 108 can adjoin region 106 along two or more sides of region 106 if it is shaped laterally like a polygon and vice versa.
  • VC region 106 extends to surface 102 at a principal VC surface zone 112 and normally appears along it as a principal surface color A during the activity. See Fig.5a. "SF" hereafter means surface. This occurs because only A light normally leaves region 106 along SF zone 112. Region 106 is then in a state termed the "normal state”. Recitations hereafter of (a) region 106 normally appearing as principal SF color A mean that region 106 normally appears along zone 112 as color A, (b) A light leaving region 106 mean that A light leaves it via zone 112, and (c) colors and color changes respectively mean colors present, and color changes occurring, during the activity. Region 106 contains principal impact-sensitive color-change structure along or below all of zone 112. "ISCC” hereafter means impact-sensitive color-change. Examples of the ISCC structure, not separately indicated in Fig.5, are described below and shown in later drawings. Region 106 may contain other structure described below.
  • FC region 108 which extends to surface 102 at a secondary FC SF zone 114, fixedly appears along FC SF zone 114 as a secondary SF color A'.
  • Secondary SF color A' is often the same as, but can differ significantly from, principal color A.
  • Region 108 can consist of multiple secondary FC subregions extending to zone 114 so that consecutive ones appear along zone 114 as different secondary colors A'. Except as indicated below, region 108 is hereafter treated as appearing along zone 114 as only one color A'.
  • SF zones 112 and 114 meet at an SF edge of interface 110.
  • An impact-dependent portion of VC region 106 responds to object 104 impacting SF zone 112 at a principal impact-dependent object-contact area 116 (laterally) spanning where object 104 contacts (or contacted) zone 112 by temporarily appearing along a corresponding principal impact-dependent print area 118 of zone 112 as a generic changed SF color X (a) in some general OI embodiments if the impact meets (or satisfies) principal basic threshold impact criteria or (b) in other general OI embodiments if region 106, specifically the impact-dependent portion, is provided with a principal general color-change control signal generated in response to the impact meeting the principal basic threshold impact criteria sometimes
  • IDVC impact-dependent variable-color
  • ID OC area 116 is capable of being of substantially arbitrary shape.
  • Print area 118 constitutes part of zone 112, all of which is capable of temporarily appearing as generic changed SF color X.
  • Print area 118 closely matches OC area 116 in size, shape, and location.
  • print area 118 at least partly encompasses OC area 116, at least mostly, usually fully, outwardly conforms to it, and is largely concentric with it.
  • the principal basic TH impact criteria can vary with where print area 118 occurs in zone 112.
  • an ID segment of the ISCC structure specifically responds to object 104 impacting OC area 116 by causing the IDVC portion to temporarily appear along print area 118 as changed color X (a) in some general OI embodiments if the impact meets the basic TH impact criteria or (b) in other general OI embodiments if the ID ISCC segment is provided with the general CC control signal generated in response to the impact meeting the basic TH impact criteria again sometimes dependent on other impact criteria also being met in those other embodiments.
  • the appearance of the IDVC portion along area 118 as changed SF color X occurs because only X light temporarily leaves the IDVC portion along area 118.
  • Color X differs materially from color A and usually from color A'. Hence, X light differs materially from A light.
  • Recitations hereafter of (a) the IDVC portion temporarily appearing as color X mean that the IDVC portion temporarily appears along area 118 as color X and (b) X light leaving the IDVC portion mean that X light leaves it via area 118.
  • the impact usually leads to color change along surface 102 only at print area 118 closely matching OC area 116 in size, shape, and location.
  • a particular impact of object 104 usually does not lead to, and is usually incapable of leading to, color change at any location along surface 102 other than print area 118 for that impact.
  • Persons viewing surface 102 therefore need essentially not be concerned about a false color change along surface 102, i.e., a color change not accurately representing area 116.
  • the spectral radiosity constituency of A light may vary across SF zone 112. That is, principal color A may be a composite of different colors such as primary colors red, green, and blue.
  • the parts of zone 112 from where light of wavelengths for the different colors leaves zone 112 are usually so microscopically distributed among one another that the standard human eye/brain interprets that light as essentially a single color.
  • the spectral radiosity constituency of X light may similarly vary across print area 118 so that changed color X is also a composite of different colors.
  • One color in such a color X composite may be color A or, if it is a composite of different colors, one or more colors in the color X composite may be the same as one or more colors in the color A composite. If so, the parts of area 118 from where light of wavelengths for the different colors in the color X composite leaves area 118 are so microscopically distributed among one another that, across area 118, the standard human eye/brain does not separately distinguish color A or any color identical to a color in the color A composite. Color X, specifically the color X composite, still differs materially from color A despite the color X composite containing color A or a color identical to a color in the color A composite.
  • the principal basic TH impact criteria consist of one or more TH impact characteristics which the impact must meet for the IDVC portion to temporarily appear as color X.
  • the impact is typically characterized by an impact parameter P that varies between a perimeter (first) value P pr and an interior (second) value P in .
  • perimeter value P pr exists along the perimeter of OC area 116 while interior value P in exists at one or more points inside area 116.
  • perimeter value P pr exists along the perimeter of a projection of area 116 onto the internal plane while interior value Pin exists at one or more points inside that projection.
  • Area 116 and the projection can differ in size as long as a line extending perpendicular to area 116 through its center also extends perpendicular to the projection through its center.
  • the difference ⁇ P max between values P pr and P in is the absolute value of the maximum difference between any two values of impact parameter P across area 116 or the projection.
  • the TH impact criteria are met at each point, termed a criteria-meeting point, inside OC area 116 or the projection of area 116 where the absolute value ⁇ P of the difference between impact parameter P and perimeter value Ppr equals or exceeds a local TH value ⁇ P thl of parameter difference ⁇ P.
  • CM criteria-meeting
  • each changed-color point along zone 112 is usually located opposite, or nearly opposite, the corresponding CM point.
  • Print area 118 can be smaller or larger than OC area 116 depending on the size of area 116 relative to that of the projection. Print area 118 is usually smaller than OC area 116 when the projection is of the same size as, or smaller than, area 116. Depending on how well print area 118 outwardly conforms to OC area 116, area 118 can be partly inside and partly outside area 116 in the projection case.
  • Local TH parameter difference value ⁇ P thl is preferably the same at every point subject to the TH impact criteria. If so, local difference value ⁇ Pthl is replaced with a fixed global TH value ⁇ Pthg of parameter difference ⁇ P. Local TH value ⁇ Pthl can, however, differ from point to point subject to the TH impact criteria. In that case, the ⁇ P thl values for the points subject to the TH impact criteria form a local TH parameter difference function dependent on the location of each point subject to the TH impact criteria.
  • Impact parameter P can be implemented in various ways.
  • parameter P is pressure resulting from object 104 impacting SF zone 112, specifically OC area 116.
  • normal pressure at any point in VC region 106 means pressure existent at that point when it is not significantly subjected to any effect of the impact.
  • Normal SF pressure along zone 112 means normal external pressure, usually atmospheric pressure nominally 1 atm, along zone 112.
  • Normal internal pressure at any point inside region 106 means internal pressure existent at that point when it is not significantly subjected to any effect of the impact.
  • Excess pressure at any point of region 106 means pressure in excess of normal pressure at that point.
  • Excess SF pressure along zone 112 then means pressure in excess of normal SF pressure along zone 112.
  • Excess internal pressure at any point inside region 106 means internal pressure in excess of normal internal pressure at that point.
  • Object 104 exerts force on OC area 116 during the impact. This force is expressible as excess SF pressure across area 116.
  • the excess SF pressure reaches a maximum value at one or more points inside area 116 and drops largely to zero along its perimeter.
  • the TH impact criteria become principal basic excess SF pressure criteria requiring that the excess pressure at a point along zone 112 equal or exceed a local TH value for that point in order for it to be a TH CM point and temporarily appear as color X.
  • Each local TH excess SF pressure value which can embody local TH parameter difference value ⁇ P thl depending on the internal configuration of OI structure 100, lies between zero and the maximum excess SF pressure value.
  • the excess SF pressure causes excess internal pressure to be produced inside VC region 106.
  • the excess internal pressure is localized mostly to material along OC area 116. Similar to the excess SF pressure, the excess internal pressure along the projection of area 116 onto the internal plane reaches a maximum value at one or more points inside the projection and drops largely to zero along its perimeter.
  • the excess internal pressure along the internal plane can embody impact parameter difference ⁇ P.
  • the TH impact criteria along the internal plane become principal basic excess internal pressure criteria requiring that the excess internal pressure at a point along the internal plane equal or exceed a local TH value for that point in order for the corresponding point along SF zone 112 to temporarily appear as color X.
  • Each local TH excess internal pressure value which can embody local TH parameter difference value ⁇ P thl , lies between zero and the maximum excess internal pressure value.
  • impact parameter P can be a measure of the deformation.
  • item 122 in Fig.5b or 5c indicates the ID area where the impact causes SF zone 112 to deform.
  • Area 122 termed the principal SF deformation area, outwardly conforms to OC area 116 and encompasses at least part of, usually most of, area 116.
  • "DF" hereafter means deformation.
  • ID SF DF area 122 is sometimes slightly smaller than OC area 116
  • area 116 is also labeled as area 122 in Figs.5b and 5c and in later drawings to simplify the representation.
  • Item 124 in Fig. 5b or 5c indicates the total ID area where object 104 contacts surface 102 and, as shown in Fig.5c, can extend into FC SF zone 114.
  • the deformation reaches a maximum value at one or more points inside SF DF area 122 and drops largely to zero along its perimeter.
  • the TH impact criteria become principal basic SF DF criteria requiring that the deformation at a point along zone 112 equal or exceed a local TH value for that point in order for it to temporarily appear as color X.
  • Each local TH SF DF value lies between zero and the maximum SF DF value.
  • the TH SF DF values are chosen to be sufficiently low as to achieve good matching between areas 116 and 118 while limiting the likelihood of such undesired color changes as much as reasonably feasible.
  • the deformation along SF zone 112 may go into a vibrating mode in which the IDVC portion contracts and expands at an amplitude that rapidly dies out. Such vibrational deformation may sometimes be needed for the IDVC portion to temporarily appear as color X. If vibrational deformation occurs, the associated range of frequencies arising from the impact can be incorporated into the principal SF DF criteria to further reduce the likelihood of undesired color changes.
  • the transition from color A to color X largely starts to occur as excess pressure or deformation passes a low local TH excess pressure or DF value for each point subject to the TH impact criteria and largely completes the color change as excess pressure or deformation passes a high local TH excess pressure or DF value for that point.
  • OI structure 100 is usually arranged and operated so that generic changed color X is capable of being only a single (actual) color.
  • the principal basic TH impact criteria can consist of multiple sets of fully different, i.e., nonoverlapping, principal basic TH impact criteria respectively corresponding to multiple specific (or specified) changed colors materially different from principal color A. More than one, typically all, of the specific changed colors differ, usually materially.
  • the impact on OC area 116 of SF zone 112 is potentially capable of meeting (or satisfying) any of the principal basic TH impact criteria sets. If the impact meets the basic TH impact criteria, generic changed color X is the specific changed color for the basic TH impact criteria set actually met by the impact sometimes dependent on other criteria also being met.
  • the basic TH impact criteria sets usually form a continuous chain in which consecutive criteria sets meet each other without overlapping.
  • the basic TH impact criteria sets can sometimes be mathematically described as follows in terms of impact parameter difference ⁇ P. Letting n be an integer greater than 1, n principal basic TH impact criteria sets S1, S2, ... Sn are respectively associated with n specific changed colors X1, X2, ... Xn materially different from principal color A and with n progressively increasing local TH parameter difference values ⁇ P thl,1 , ⁇ P thl,2 , .. . ⁇ P thl,n lying between zero and maximum parameter difference ⁇ P max .
  • Each basic TH impact criteria set Si, except highest-numbered criteria set Sn, is defined by the requirement that parameter difference ⁇ P equal or exceed local TH parameter difference value ⁇ Pthl,i but be no greater than an infinitesimal amount below a higher local parameter difference value ⁇ Pthh,i less than or equal to next higher local TH parameter difference value ⁇ P thl,i+1 .
  • Each criteria set S i is a ⁇ P range R i extending between a low limit equal to TH difference value ⁇ P thl,i and a high limit an infinitesimal amount below high difference value ⁇ Pthh,i.
  • Highest-numbered criteria set Sn is defined by the requirement that difference ⁇ P equal or exceed local TH parameter difference value ⁇ Pthl,n but not exceed a higher local parameter difference value ⁇ P thh,n less than or equal to maximum parameter difference ⁇ P max .
  • highest-numbered set S n is a ⁇ P range R n extending between a low limit equal to TH difference value ⁇ P thl,n and a high limit equal to high difference value ⁇ P thh,n .
  • High-limit difference value ⁇ Pthh,i for each range Ri, except highest range Rn usually equals low- limit difference value ⁇ Pthl,i+1 for next higher range Rn+1, and high-limit difference value ⁇ Pthh,n for highest range R n usually equals maximum difference ⁇ P max .
  • criteria sets S 1 - S n substantially fully cover a total ⁇ P range extending continuously from lowest difference value ⁇ P thl,1 to maximum difference ⁇ P max . Impact parameter difference ⁇ P c potentially capable of meeting any of criteria sets S1 - Sn.
  • changed color X is specific changed color Xi for criteria set S i actually met by difference ⁇ P.
  • each local TH difference value ⁇ P thl,i be the same at every point subject to the TH impact criteria, each local TH difference value ⁇ P thl,1 is replaced with a fixed global TH value ⁇ P thg,i of difference ⁇ P.
  • the TH impact criteria sets can, for example, consist of fully different ranges of excess SF pressure across OC area 116 or excess internal pressure along the projection of area 116 onto the internal plane. Each range of excess SF or internal pressure is associated with a different one of the specific changed colors.
  • Changed color X is then specific changed color X i for the range of excess SF or internal pressure met by the impact.
  • the low limit of each pressure range is the minimum value of excess SF or internal pressure for causing color X to be specific changed color Xi for that pressure range.
  • the high limit of each pressure range, except the highest pressure range, is preferably an infinitesimal amount below the low limit of the next highest range so that the TH impact criteria sets occupy a continuous total pressure range beginning at the low limit of the lowest range. All the specific changed colors X 1 - X n preferably differ materially from one another.
  • TH impact criteria sets provide a capability to distinguish between certain different types of impacts. For instance, if the maximum excess SF pressure usually exerted by one embodiment of object 104 exceeds the minimum excess SF pressure usually exerted by another embodiment of object 104, appropriate choice of the TH impact criteria sets enables OI structure 100 to distinguish between impacts of the two object embodiments. In tennis, suitable choice of the TH impact criteria sets enables structure 100 to distinguish between impacts of a tennis ball and impacts of other bodies which usually impact SF zone 112 harder or softer than a tennis ball. Color X is generally dealt with below as a single color even though it can be provided as one of multiple changed colors dependent on the TH impact criteria sets.
  • the change, or switch, from color A to color X along print area 118 places VC region 106 in a state, termed the "changed" state, in which X light temporarily leaves the IDVC portion along area 118.
  • region 106 continues to appear as color A along the remainder of SF zone 112 except possibly at any location where another temporary change to color X occurs during the current temporary color change due to object 104 also impacting zone 112 so as to meet the TH impact criteria.
  • the IDVC portion later returns to appearing as color A. If another change to color X occurs during the current temporary color change at any location along zone 112 due to another impact, any other such location along zone 112 likewise later returns to appearing as color A.
  • Region 106 later returns to appearing as color A along all of zone 112 so as to return, or switch back, to the normal state.
  • the impacts can be by the same or different embodiments of object 104.
  • An occurrence of the changed state herein means only the temporary color change due to the impact causing that changed-state occurrence. If, during a changed-state occurrence, object 104 of the same or a different embodiment again impacts SF zone 112 sufficient to meet the TH impact criteria, any temporary color change which that further impact causes along zone 112 during the current changed-state occurrence constitutes another changed-state occurrence. Multiple changed-state occurrences can thus overlap in time. Print area 118 of one of multiple time-overlapping changed-state occurrences can also overlap with area 118 of at least one other one of those changed-state occurrences. The situation of multiple time-overlapping changed- state occurrences is not expressly mentioned further below in order to shorten this description.
  • any recitation below specifying that a VC region, such as VC region 106, returns to the normal state after the changed state means that, if there are multiple time-overlapping changed-state occurrences, the VC region returns to the normal state after the last of those occurrences without (fully) returning to the normal state directly after any earlier one of those occurrences.
  • VC region 106 is in the changed state for a CC duration (or time period) ⁇ tdr generally defined as the interval from the time at which print area 118 first fully appears as changed color X to the time at which area 118 starts returning to color A, i.e., the interval during which area 118 temporarily appears as color X.
  • CC duration ⁇ t dr is usually at least 2 s in order to allow persons using OI structure 100 sufficient time to clearly determine that area 118 exists and where it exists along SF zone 112. Duration ⁇ t dr is often at least 4 s, sometimes at least 6 s, and is usually no more than 60 s but can be 120 s or more.
  • the ⁇ tdr length depends considerably on the type of activity for which OI structure 100 is being used. If the activity is a ball-based sport such as tennis, basketball, volleyball, or baseball/softball, CC duration ⁇ t dr is desirably long enough for players and observers, including any sports official(s), to clearly determine the location of print area 118 on SF zone 112 but not so long as to significantly interrupt play.
  • CC duration ⁇ t dr is desirably long enough for players and observers, including any sports official(s), to clearly determine the location of print area 118 on SF zone 112 but not so long as to significantly interrupt play.
  • the ⁇ tdr length for such a sport is usually at least 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, or 12 s, can be at least 15, 20, or 30 s, and is usually no more than 60 s but can be longer, e.g., up to 90 or 120 s or more, or shorter, e.g., no more than 30, 20, 15, 10, 8, or 6 s.
  • duration ⁇ tdr is usually much longer than the time duration (or contact time) ⁇ toc, almost always less than 25 ms, during which the ball contacts zone 112 during the impact.
  • CC duration ⁇ t dr may be at an automatic (or natural) value ⁇ t drau that includes a base portion ⁇ t drbs passively determined by the (physical/chemical) properties of the material(s) in the ISCC structure.
  • Base duration ⁇ tdrbs is fixed (constant) for a given set of environmental conditions, including a given external temperature and a given external pressure, nominally 1 atm, at identical impact conditions.
  • VC region 106 may contain componentry, described below, which automatically extends duration ⁇ t dr by an amount ⁇ t drext beyond base duration ⁇ t drbs .
  • Automatic duration value ⁇ t drau consists of base duration ⁇ t drbs and potentially extension duration ⁇ tdrext.
  • Automatic value ⁇ tdrau is usually at least 2 s, often at least 4 s, sometimes at least 6 s, and usually no more than 60 s, often no more than 30 s, sometimes no more than 15 s. Absent externally caused adjustment, the changed state automatically terminates at the end of value ⁇ t drau .
  • Automatic duration value ⁇ t drau is usually in a principal pre-established CC time duration range, i.e., an impact-to-impact ⁇ tdr range established prior to impact.
  • the length of the pre-established CC duration range i.e., the time period between its low and high ends from impact to impact, is relatively small, usually no more than 2 s, preferably no more than 1 s, more preferably no more than 0.5 s, so that the impact-to-impact variation in automatic value ⁇ t drau is quite small.
  • VC region 106 The appearance of VC region 106 as color A during the normal state occurs while OI structure 100 is in operation.
  • the production of color A during structure operation often occurs passively, i.e., only by light reflection.
  • Region 106 thus appears as color A when structure 100 is inactive.
  • color A can be produced actively, e.g., by an action involving light emission from region 106. If so, the light emission is usually terminated to save power when structure 100 is inactive.
  • region 106 appears as another color, termed passive color P, along SF zone 112 while structure 100 is inactive.
  • Passive color P which can be the same as secondary color A', necessarily differs from color A and usually from color X.
  • Fig.5b presents an example in which object 104 contacts surface 102 fully within SF zone 112.
  • Total ID OC area 124 here is the same as OC area 116.
  • Print area 118 encompasses most of, and fully conforms to, OC area 116 so that areas 116 and 118 are largely concentric. Hence, print area 118 fully outwardly conforms to OC area 116.
  • Fig.22a below presents an example, similar to that of Fig.5b, in which print area 118 fully outwardly conforms to OC area 116 and does not fully inwardly conform to area 116.
  • Fig.5c presents an example in which object 104 contacts surface 102 within both of SF zones 112 and 114 in the same impact.
  • Total OC area 124 here consists of OC area 116 and an adjoining secondary ID OC area 126 of zone 114.
  • the impact on secondary ID OC area 126 does not cause it to change color significantly.
  • area 126 largely remains secondary color A'.
  • Print area 118 at least partly encompasses OC area 116 and may, or may not, encompass most of it depending on the sizes of OC areas 116 and 126 and perimeter band 120 relative to one another. Print area 118 fully outwardly conforms to OC area 116 so as to be largely concentric with it.
  • Fig.22b below presents an example, similar to that of Fig.5c, in which print area 118 outwardly conforms mostly, but not fully, to OC area 116 and does not inwardly conform mostly to it.
  • FC region 108 contains impact-sensitive material extending along interface 110 to a distance approximately equal to the maximum lateral dimension of print area 118 during impacts.
  • secondary OC area 126 remains color A' after the impact, the combination of the impact-sensitive material in region 108 and the ISCC material in VC region 106 causes print area 118 to temporarily appear as color X if the impact meets composite basic TH impact criteria usually numerically the same as the principal basic TH impact criteria.
  • Figs.6a - 6c, 11a - 11c, 12a - 12c, 13a - 13c, 14a - 14c, 15a - 15c, 16a - 16c, 17a - 17c, 18a -18c, and 19a - 19c present side cross sections of ten embodiments of OI structure 100 where each triad of Figs. ja - jc for integer j being 6 and then varying from 11 to 19 depicts a different embodiment.
  • Figs.6b, 11b, 12b, 13b, 14b, 15b, 16b, 17b, 18b, and 19b corresponding to Fig.5b present examples of changes that occur during the changed state when object 104 impacts fully within SF zone 112.
  • Figs.6c, 11c, 12c, 13c, 14c, 15c, 16c, 17c, 18c, and 19c present examples of changes that occur during the changed state when object 104 simultaneously impacts both of SF zones 112 and 114.
  • Figs.6a - 6c they illustrate a general embodiment 130 of OI structure 100 for which duration ⁇ t dr of the changed state is automatic value ⁇ t drau absent externally caused adjustment.
  • VC region 106 here consists only of the ISCC structure indicated here and later as item 132.
  • surface 102 is flat and extends parallel to a plane generally tangent to Earth's surface. However, surface 102 can be significantly curved. Even when surface 102 is flat, it can extend at a significant angle to a plane generally tangent to Earth's surface as exemplified below in Figs.102a and 102b.
  • Interface 110 between color regions 106 and 108 extends perpendicular to surface 102. See Fig.6a.
  • Interface 110 can be a flat surface or a curved surface which appears straight along a plane extending through regions 106 and 108 perpendicular to surface 102.
  • Regions 106 and 108 lie on a substructure (or substrate) 134 usually consisting of insulating material at least where they meet substructure 134 along a flat region-substructure interface 136 extending parallel to surface 102.
  • ARsb light Light (if any) reflected by substructure 134 so as to leave it along VC region 106 during the normal state is termed ARsb light.
  • no ARsb light is present.
  • All light striking SF zone 112 is preferably absorbed by region 106 or/and reflected by it so as to leave it via zone 112, interface 110, or another such side surface.
  • Region 106, potentially in combination with FC region 108, may be manufactured as a separate unit and later installed on substructure 134. If so, absence of ARsb light enables the color characteristics, including CC characteristics, of region 106 to be independent of the color characteristics of substructure 134.
  • ADic light normally leaving ISCC structure 132 via SF zone 112 after being reflected or/and emitted by structure 132, and thus excluding any substructure-reflected ARsb light, consists of (a) light, termed ARic light, normally reflected by structure 132 so as to leave it via zone 112 after striking zone 112 and (b) light (if any), termed AEic light, normally emitted by structure 132 so as to leave it via zone 112. Reflected ARic light is invariably always present. Emitted AEic light may or may not be present. A substantial part of any ARsb light passes through structure 132.
  • ARic light, any AEic light, and any ARsb light normally leaving structure 132, and thus VC region 106, via zone 112 form A light. Region 106 thereby normally appears as color A.
  • Each of ADic light and either ARic or AEic light is usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of A light.
  • item 138 is the IDVC portion of VC region 106, i.e., the changed portion which appears along print area 118 as color X during the changed state.
  • Area 118 is then the upper surface of IDVC portion 138, basically a cylinder whose cross-sectional area is that of area 118.
  • the lateral boundary of portion 138 extends perpendicular to SF zone 112.
  • Object 104 in Figs.6b and 6c appears above surface 102 at locations corresponding respectively to those in Figs.5b and 5c and therefore at locations subsequent to impacting OC area 116.
  • Print area 118 is shown in Figs.6b and 6c and in analogous later side cross-sectional drawings with extra thick line to clearly identify the print-area location along SF zone 112.
  • IDVC portion 138 is laterally demarcated in Fig.6b and in analogous later side cross-sectional drawings with dotted lines because its location in VC region 106 depends on where object 104 contacts zone 112.
  • Portion 138 is laterally demarcated in Fig. 6c and in analogous later side cross-sectional drawings with a dotted line and the solid line of interface 110 because portion 138 terminates along interface 110 in those drawings.
  • Item 142 in Figs.6b and 6c is the principal ID segment of ISCC structure 132 in portion 138 and is identical to it here. However, ID ISCC segment 142 is a part of portion 138 in later embodiments of OI structure 100 where region 106 contains structure besides ISCC structure 132.
  • XRsb light Light (if any) reflected by substructure 134 so as to leave it along IDVC portion 138 during the changed state is termed XRsb light.
  • XRsb light can be the same as, or significantly differ from, ARsb light depending on how the light processing in portion 138 during the changed state differs from the light processing in VC region 106 during the normal state.
  • XRsb light is absent when ARsb light is absent.
  • XDic light temporarily leaving ISCC segment 142 via print area 118 after being reflected or/and emitted by segment 142, and thus excluding any substructure-reflected XRsb light, consists of (a) light, termed XRic light, temporarily reflected by segment 142 so as to leave it via area 118 after striking area 118 and (b) light (if any), termed XEic light, temporarily emitted by segment 142 so as to leave it via area 118. Reflected XRic light is invariably always present. Emitted XEic light may or may not be present. XDic light differs materially from A and ADic light. A substantial part of any XRsb light passes through segment 142.
  • XRic light, any XEic light, and any XRsb light temporarily leaving segment 142, and thus IDVC portion 138, via area 118 form X light so that portion 138 temporarily appears as color X.
  • Each of XDic light and either XRic or XEic light is usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of X light.
  • VC region 106 of OI structure 130 starts the forward transition from the normal state to the changed state before or after object 104 leaves SF zone 112 depending on the length of duration ⁇ toc during which object 104 contacts OC area 116. Region 106 can even enter the changed state before object 104 leaves zone 112. However, a person cannot generally see print area 118 until object 104 leaves zone 112.
  • One important timing parameter is thus the full forward transition delay (response time) ⁇ t f , if any, extending from the instant, termed object-separation time tos, at which object 104 just fully separates from area 116 to the instant, termed approximate forward transition end time tfe, at which region 106 approximately completes the forward transition and IDVC portion 138 approximately first appears as changed color X.
  • object-separation time tos at which object 104 just fully separates from area 116 to the instant
  • approximate forward transition end time tfe at which region 106 approximately completes the forward transition and IDVC portion 138 approximately first appears as changed color X.
  • OS and "XN" hereafter respectively mean object-separation and transition. Determination of full forward XN delay ⁇ t f is complex because it depends on changes in spectral radiosity J ⁇ and thus on wavelength changes rather than on changes in radiosity J itself.
  • CC duration ⁇ tdr extends from forward XN end time t fe to the instant, termed approximate return XN start time t rs , at which region 106 approximately starts the return transition from the changed state back to the normal state and IDVC portion 138 approximately starts changing from appearing as color X to returning to appear as color A.
  • a final important timing parameter is the full return XN delay (relaxation time) ⁇ tr extending from approximate return XN start time trs to the instant, termed approximate return XN end time tre, at which region 106 approximately completes the return transition and portion 138 approximately first returns to appearing as color A.
  • the spectral radiosity constituency i.e., the variation of spectral radiosity J ⁇ with wavelength ⁇ , for a color consists of one or wavelength bands in the visible light spectrum. Each wavelength band may reach one or more peak values of spectral radiosity depending on what is considered to be a wavelength band.
  • Fig.7 it illustrates an exemplary spectral radiosity constituency 150 for color light such as A or X light where J ⁇ h is the top of the illustrated J ⁇ range.
  • J ⁇ constituency 150 may be viewed as consisting of three wavelength bands or two wavelength bands with the right-most band having two peaks.
  • the wavelengths encompassed by constituency 150 lie between the low end ⁇ l and high end ⁇ h of the visible spectrum where low-end wavelength ⁇ l is nominally 380 - 400 nm and high-end wavelength ⁇ h is nominally 700 - 780 nm.
  • constituency 150 degenerates into a single vertical line at the wavelength of that color.
  • Fig.8 shows how an exemplary spectral radiosity constituency 152, two bands, for A light changes with time into an exemplary spectral radiosity constituency 154, one band, for X light during the forward transition from the normal state to the changed state.
  • the top portion of Fig.8 illustrates the appearance of color ⁇ A J ⁇ constituency 152 at a time tp during the normal state and thus prior to the forward transition.
  • color ⁇ X J ⁇ constituency 154 does not exist at pre-transition time tp
  • thick-line item 154p along the wavelength axis in the top portion of Fig.8 indicates the expected wavelength extent of color ⁇ X constituency 154.
  • FIG.8 depicts an exemplary intermediate spectral radiosity constituency 156 at a time tm during the forward transition.
  • Intermediate J ⁇ constituency 156 is a combination, largely additive, of a partial version 152m of color ⁇ A constituency 152 and a partial version 154m of-color X constituency 154.
  • the right-most band of reduced color ⁇ A J ⁇ constituency 152m combined with the dashed line extending from that band to the right indicates how it would appear if color A were being converted into black.
  • Partial color ⁇ X J ⁇ constituency 154 m combined with the dashed line extending from constituency 154 m to the left indicates how constituency 154m would appear if color X were being converted from black.
  • the bottom portion of Fig.8 illustrates the appearance of color ⁇ X constituency 154 at a time tc during the changed state and thus after the forward transition.
  • color ⁇ A constituency 152 does not exist at post-transition time t c
  • the two parts of thick-line item 152 c along the wavelength axis in the bottom portion of Fig.8 indicate the exemplary wavelength extent of constituency 152.
  • Forward XN delay ⁇ tf can be determined by changes in various spectral radiosity parameters as a function of time.
  • forward delay ⁇ t f is the time for spectral radiosity J ⁇ to decrease from (i) a high value J ⁇ fh equal to or slightly less than the magnitude ⁇ J ⁇ max of the difference between the maximum J ⁇ values for the color ⁇ A and color ⁇ X J ⁇ constituencies at a wavelength present in one or both of them, i.e., at any wavelength for which spectral radiosity J ⁇ is greater than zero in at least one of the color A and color ⁇ X J ⁇ constituencies, to (ii) a low value J ⁇ fl equal or slightly greater than zero.
  • This ⁇ t f determination technique is most easily applied at a wavelength present in one of the color ⁇ A and color ⁇ X J ⁇ constituencies but not in the other. Due to noise in experimental J ⁇ data, the accuracy of the ⁇ t f determination is usually increased by choosing a wavelength at which spectral radiosity J ⁇ reaches a peak value. Dotted lines 158 and 160 in each of the three portions of Fig.8 indicate such wavelengths for J ⁇ constituencies 152 and 154.
  • J ⁇ maximum difference magnitude ⁇ J ⁇ max is then simply the maximum J ⁇ value for color ⁇ A J ⁇ constituency 152 along dotted line 158 in the top portion of Fig.8 or the maximum J ⁇ value for color ⁇ X J ⁇ constituency 154 along dotted line 160 in the bottom portion of Fig.8.
  • the length of line 158 or 160 represents difference magnitude ⁇ J ⁇ max.
  • Spectral radiosity J ⁇ can nonetheless be used to determine forward XN delay ⁇ t f at a wavelength, indicated by dotted line 162 in each of the three portions of Fig.8, common to both the color ⁇ A and color ⁇ X J ⁇ constituencies.
  • the length of dotted line 162 represents difference magnitude ⁇ J ⁇ max .
  • difference magnitude ⁇ J ⁇ max for the common-wavelength situation is usually less than magnitude ⁇ J ⁇ max when the color ⁇ A J ⁇ constituency has a wavelength not in the color ⁇ X J ⁇ constituency and vice versa.
  • High value J ⁇ fh and low value J ⁇ fl are respectively slightly less than difference magnitude ⁇ J ⁇ max and slightly greater than zero if OS time tos occurs after the instant, termed actual forward XN start time tf0, at which VC region 106 actually starts the forward transition to the changed state and IDVC portion 138 actually starts changing to appear as color X or/and if forward XN end time t fe occurs before the instant, termed actual forward XN end time t f100 , at which region 106 actually completes the forward transition to the changed state and portion 138 actually first appears as color X.
  • high value J ⁇ fh equals difference magnitude ⁇ J ⁇ max minus (a) an amount, usually small, corresponding to the difference between times tos and tf0 if OS time tos occurs after actual forward XN start time tf0 and (b) an amount, usually small, corresponding to the difference between times t f100 and t fe if actual forward XN end time t f100 ends, as usually occurs, after approximate forward XN end time t fe .
  • Value J ⁇ fh otherwise equals magnitude ⁇ J ⁇ max .
  • Low value J ⁇ fl similarly equals (a) an amount, usually small, corresponding to the difference between times tos and tf0 if OS time tos occurs after actual forward XN start time tf0 and (b) an amount, usually small, corresponding to the difference between times t f100 and t fe if actual forward XN end time t f100 ends after approximate forward XN end time t fe .
  • Value J ⁇ fl otherwise is zero.
  • the modifications to values J ⁇ fh and J ⁇ fl may be so small as to not significantly affect the ⁇ t f determination and, if so, need not be performed.
  • Forward XN delay ⁇ t f can also be determined as an average of the summation of ⁇ tf values determined at two or more suitable wavelengths using this ⁇ tf determination technique.
  • Another spectral radiosity parameter suitable for use in determining forward XN delay ⁇ tf is the spectrum-integrated absolute spectral radiosity difference ⁇ J AM , basically an integrated version of the spectral radiosity summation ⁇ t f technique.
  • J ⁇ A ( ⁇ ) and J ⁇ X ( ⁇ ) respectively represent the spectral radiosities for A and X light as a function of wavelength ⁇ for which J ⁇ constituencies 152 and 154 are respective examples.
  • J ⁇ M( ⁇ ) represent the spectral radiosity for light of wavelength of a variable color, termed variable color M, as a function of wavelength ⁇ such that IDVC portion 138 appears along print area 118 as color M.
  • Each J ⁇ constituency 152, 154, or 156 is an example of color-M spectral radiosity J ⁇ M ( ⁇ ).
  • Spectrum-integrated absolute spectral radiosity difference ⁇ J AM often simply radiosity difference ⁇ J AM , is given by the integral:
  • ⁇ JAM ⁇ VS
  • Fig.9 which, similar to Fig.8, illustrates how example 152 of color ⁇ A spectral radiosity J ⁇ A ( ⁇ ) changes into example 154 of color ⁇ X spectral radiosity J ⁇ X( ⁇ ) during the forward transition.
  • Example 152 of color ⁇ A spectral radiosity J ⁇ A( ⁇ ) occurs at time tp during the normal state as represented in the top portion of Fig.9 and is repeated in the middle and bottom portions of Fig.9 in dotted form because spectral radiosity J ⁇ A ( ⁇ ) appears in the integrand
  • variable color M is color A so that color M-spectral radiosity J ⁇ M ( ⁇ ) equals color A-spectral radiosity J ⁇ A( ⁇ ).
  • Radiosity difference ⁇ JAM is zero at time tp.
  • Variable color M is an intermediate color between colors A and X at time tm during the forward transition.
  • Color-M spectral radiosity J ⁇ M ( ⁇ ) then has a wavelength variation between the wavelength variations of spectral radiosities J ⁇ A ( ⁇ ) and J ⁇ X ( ⁇ ).
  • Radiosity difference ⁇ J AM at time t m is thus at some finite value represented by slanted-line area 164 between color ⁇ A J ⁇ constituency 152 and intermediate J ⁇ constituency 156 in Fig.9.
  • variable color M is color X so that color-M spectral radiosity J ⁇ M ( ⁇ ) equals color ⁇ X spectral radiosity J ⁇ X ( ⁇ ).
  • Radiosity difference ⁇ J AM at time t c is also at some finite value represented by slanted-line area 166 between color ⁇ A constituency 152 and color ⁇ X J ⁇ constituency 154 in Fig. 9.
  • the value of radiosity difference ⁇ JAM at time tc is usually a maximum.
  • the variation of radiosity difference ⁇ J AM with time thereby characterizes the forward transition.
  • ⁇ JAX represent the spectrum-integrated absolute spectral radiosity difference ⁇ VS
  • forward XN delay ⁇ tf is the time period for radiosity difference ⁇ JAM to change from a low value equal or slightly greater than zero to a high value equal to or slightly less than ⁇ J AX . If OS time t os occurs after actual forward XN start time t f0 , the low ⁇ J AM value is an amount corresponding to the difference between times t os and t f0 . The low ⁇ J AM value can often be taken as zero without significantly affecting the ⁇ tf determination.
  • the difference between times tf0 and tos should be added to the J ⁇ -determined ⁇ tf value to obtain actual forward delay ⁇ tf.
  • This modification is sometimes so small as to not significantly affect the ⁇ tf determination and, if so, need not be performed.
  • the high ⁇ J AM value equals ⁇ J AX minus an amount corresponding to the difference between times t f100 and t fe .
  • the high ⁇ J AM value can often be taken as ⁇ J AX without significantly affecting the ⁇ tf determination.
  • Fig.10 depicts how a general spectral radiosity parameter Jp varies with time t during a full operational cycle in which VC region 106 goes from the normal state to the changed state and then back to the normal state.
  • General radiosity parameter J p can be spectral radiosity J ⁇ or spectrum-integrated absolute spectral radiosity difference ⁇ J AM .
  • Radiosity parameter J p varies between zero and a maximum value J pmax formed with difference ⁇ J ⁇ max or the high ⁇ JAM value when parameter Jp is spectral radiosity J ⁇ or radiosity difference ⁇ JAM.
  • Curve 168 represents the Jp variation with time t.
  • Item ⁇ tf90 is the 90% forward XN time delay from time tos to 90% forward XN time tf90 during the forward transition.
  • Item ⁇ tf10 ⁇ 90 is the 10%-to-90% forward XN time delay from 10% forward XN time tf10 to time tf90 during the forward transition.
  • Item ⁇ tr50 is the 50% return XN time delay from approximate return XN start time trs to 50% return XN time tr50 during the return transition.
  • Item ⁇ tr90 is the 90% return XN time delay from time trs to 90% return XN time tr90 during the return transition.
  • Item ⁇ tr10 ⁇ 90 is the 10%-to-90% return XN time delay from 10% return XN time t r10 to time t r90 during the return transition.
  • Percentage times tf10, tf50, tf90, tr10, tr50, and tr90 can usually be ascertained relatively precisely because dJp/dt, the time rate of change of radiosity parameter Jp, is relatively high in the vicinities of those six times, especially times tf50 and tr50.
  • times tf0 and tf100 at which the forward transition actually respectively starts and ends are often difficult to determine precisely because rate dJ p /dt is relatively low in their vicinities.
  • Times t r0 and t r100 at which the return transition actually respectively starts and ends are likewise often difficult to determine precisely for the same reason.
  • the start and end of the forward transition are respectively approximated by times tfs and tfe which are relatively precisely determinable utilizing time tf50.
  • the start and end of the return transition are respectively approximated by times t rs and t re which are relatively precisely determinable utilizing time t r50 .
  • a dotted line 170 having a slope S f is tangent to curve 168 at point 172 at 50% forward XN time tf50 where radiosity parameter Jp has risen to 50% of value Jpmax.
  • Slope Sf equals rate dJp/dt at time tf50 and can be determined relatively precisely.
  • Time differences tf50 - tfs and tfe - tf50 each equal (Jpmax/2)/Sf.
  • Forward XN start time t fs and forward XN end time t fe are:
  • time tf50 can be determined relatively precisely.
  • a dotted line 174 having a slope S r is tangent to curve 168 at point 176 at 50% return XN time t r50 where parameter J p has dropped to 50% of value J pmax .
  • Slope S r equals rate dJ p /dt at time t r50 and can be determined relatively precisely. Time differences - t r50 each equal Return XN start
  • time trs and return XN end time tre are:
  • time t r50 which can be determined relatively precisely because time t r50 can be determined relatively precisely.
  • Approximate full forward XN delay ⁇ tf is usually no more than 2 s, preferably no more than 1 s, more preferably no more than 0.5 s, even more preferably no more than 0.25 s.
  • 50% forward XN delay ⁇ tf50 is usually no more than 1 s, preferably no more than 0.5 s, more preferably no more than 0.25 s, even more preferably no more than 0.125 s.
  • 90% forward XN delay ⁇ t f90 is usually less than 2 s, preferably less than 1 s, more preferably less than 0.5 s, even more preferably less than 0.25 s. The same applies to 10%-to-90% forward XN delay ⁇ t f10 ⁇ 90 .
  • return XN delays ⁇ tr, ⁇ tr10, ⁇ tr50, and ⁇ tr90 have the same usual and preferred maximum values respectively as forward XN delays ⁇ tf, ⁇ tf10, ⁇ tf50, and ⁇ tf90.
  • Return XN delays ⁇ tr, ⁇ tr10, ⁇ tr50, and ⁇ tr90 have the following maximum values for the long-delay category.
  • Delay ⁇ t r is usually no more than 10 s, preferably no more than 5 s.
  • Delay ⁇ t r50 is usually no more than 5 s, preferably no more than 2.5 s.
  • Delay ⁇ t r90 is usually less than 10 s, preferably less than 5 s. The same applies to delay
  • CC duration the difference between return XN start time t rs and forward XN end time t fe , is:
  • Fig.10 depicts the preferred situation in which OS time t os occurs after actual forward XN start time tf0.
  • Forward XN start time tf0 can, however, occur after OS time tos. If so, between times tos and tf0, there is a delay in which radiosity parameter Jp is zero.
  • Fig.10 depicts the situation in which approximate forward XN start time t fs occurs after OS time t os .
  • Forward XN start time t fs preferably occurs before OS time t os .
  • a useful parameter for dealing with the time period needed to switch from the normal state to the changed state and back to the normal state is the effective total time period ⁇ ttoteff (also not indicated in Fig.10) from OS time tos to return XN end time tre.
  • automatic value ⁇ t drau of CC duration ⁇ t dr is chosen to be close to, but less than, 15 s, e.g., usually at least 10 s, preferably at least 12 s. These ⁇ t drau values should almost always provide sufficient time to examine area 118 and either immediately determine whether the ball is "in” or "out” or, if possible, extend duration ⁇ tdr to examine area 118 more closely.
  • Non-lobbed groundstrokes hit by highly skilled tennis players typically take roughly 2 s to travel from one baseline to the other baseline and back to the initial baseline.
  • colors A and X differ materially if the standard human eye/brain can essentially instantaneously identify print area 118 when it changes from principal color A to changed color X.
  • colors A and X also differ materially if the standard human eye/brain can essentially instantaneously determine that object 104 has impacted both of zones 112 and 114 due to the difference in color between area 118 and zone 114.
  • colors A and X occur in the all-color CIE L*a*b* color space in which a color is characterized by a dimensionless lightness L*, a dimensionless green/red hue parameter a*, and a
  • hue parameter b* dimensionless blue/yellow hue parameter b*.
  • Lightness L* varies from 0 to 100 where a low number indicates dark and a high number indicates light. L* values of 0 and 100 respectively indicate black and white regardless of the a* and b* values.
  • Hue parameters a* and b* have no numerical limits but typically range from a negative value as low as -128 to a positive value as high as 127. For green/red parameter a*, a negative number indicates green and a positive number indicates red. A negative number for blue/yellow parameter indicates blue while a positive number indicates yellow. Colors of particular hues determined by hue parameters a* and b* become lighter as lightness L* increases so that the colors contain more white and darker as lighter as lightness L* decreases so that they contain more black.
  • Colors A and X have respective lightnesses LA* and LX*, respective green/red parameters aA* and aX*, and respective blue/yellow parameters bA* and bX* whose values are restricted so that color X differs materially from color A.
  • suitable minimum and maximum limits are placed on one or more of lightness pair L A * and L X *, red/green parameter pair a A * and a X *, and blue/yellow parameter pair b A * and b X * to define one or more pairs of mutually exclusive (non-overlapping) color regions for which any color in one of a pair of the color regions differs materially from any color in the other of that pair of color regions. Any color in one of each pair of the color regions embodies color A while any color in the other of that pair of color regions embodies color X and vice versa.
  • the color regions in one such pair of mutually exclusive color regions consist of a light region containing a selected one of colors A and X and a dark region containing the remaining one of colors A and X.
  • Lightness LA* or LX* of selected color A or X in the light region is at least 60 greater than lightness LX* or LA* of remaining color X or A in the dark region.
  • Selected-color lightness LA* or LX* ranges from a minimum of 60 up to 100 while remaining-color lightness L X * or L A * ranges from 0 to a maximum of 40 provided that lightnesses L A * and L X * differ by at least 60.
  • Selected color A or X is a light color while remaining color X or A is a dark color.
  • Each color A or X can be at any values of parameters aA* and bA* or aX* and bX*.
  • Lightness difference ⁇ L* i.e., the magnitude
  • ⁇ a* represent the magnitude
  • ⁇ b* represent the magnitude
  • ⁇ W* represent the weighted color difference (CL ⁇ L* 2 + Ca ⁇ a* 2 + Cb ⁇ b* 2 ) 1/2 where CL, Ca, and Cb are non- negative weighting constants usually ranging from 0 to 1 but potentially as high as 9.
  • Weighted color difference ⁇ W* can, in other examples, be used (i) alone since differences ⁇ L*, ⁇ a*, and ⁇ b* appear in the ⁇ W* formula (C L ⁇ L* 2 + C a ⁇ a* 2 + C b ⁇ b* 2 ) 1/2 or (ii) in combination with one or more of differences ⁇ L*, ⁇ a*, and ⁇ b*. In either case, color difference ⁇ W* is greater than or equal to a threshold weighted difference value ⁇ Wth*.
  • threshold weighted difference value ⁇ Wth* is sufficiently high that colors A and X materially differ for all pairs of LA*and LX* values, aA* and aX* values, and bA* and bX* values.
  • Examination of the sRGB or AdobeRGB L* examples in Hoffmann indicates that color differences are more pronounced in green/red parameter a* than in blue/yellow parameter b*.
  • one of constants C L and Ca in the ⁇ W* formula is sometimes greater than constant Cb while the other of constants CL and Ca in the ⁇ W* formula is greater than or equal to constant Cb.
  • Constants CL and Ca for this situation are typically 1 with constant Cb being 0.
  • a third general L*a*b* restriction embodiment combines placing limits on one or more of lightnesses LA* and LX*, red/green parameters aA* and aX*, and blue/yellow parameters bA* and bX* with placing limits on one or more of differences ⁇ L*, ⁇ a*, ⁇ b*, and ⁇ W* such that color X differs materially from color A.
  • lightness L A * or L X * of each color A or X is at least 50 while red/green parameter difference ⁇ a* is at least 70.
  • No limitation is placed on parameter a A *, a X *, b A *, or b X *, lightness difference ⁇ L*, or blue/yellow parameter difference ⁇ b* in this example.
  • pairs of materially different colors suitable for colors A and X include: (a) white and a non-white color having an L* value of no more than 80, preferably no more than 70; (b) an off-white color having an L* value of at least 95 and a darker color having an L* value of no more than 75, preferably no more than 65; (c) a reddish color having an a* value of at least 20, preferably at least 30, and a greenish color having an a* value of no more than -20, preferably no more than -30, each color having an L* value of at least 30, preferably at least 40; and (d) a reddish color having a b* value of at least 75 plus 1.6 times its a* value and a bluish color having a b* value of -10 minus 1.0 times its a* value, each color having an L* value of at least 30, preferably at least 40.
  • colors A and X Numerous other pairs of materially different colors, including numerous pairs of light and dark colors, are suitable for colors A and X.
  • Colors A and X often have different average wavelengths ⁇ avg .
  • the average wavelength ⁇ avg of light of a particular color is:
  • Average wavelength ⁇ avg is zero for black and approximately 550 nm for white.
  • the ratio R ⁇ avg of the difference between the average wavelengths of X and A light to the average of their average wavelengths is:
  • wavelength difference-to-average ratio R ⁇ avg is at least 0.06, preferably at least 0.08, more preferably at least 0.10, even more preferably at least 0.12.
  • ISCC structure 132 can be embodied in many ways. Structure 132 is sometimes basically a single material consisting of impact-sensitive changeably reflective or changeably emissive material where
  • “changeably reflective” means that color change occurs primarily due to change in light reflection (and associated light absorption) and where “changeably emissive” means that color change occurs primarily due to change in light emission.
  • “CR” and “CE” hereafter respectively mean changeably reflective and changeably emissive.
  • ISCC structure 132 consisting solely of impact-sensitive CR material. "IS" hereafter means impact-sensitive. During the normal state, CR ISCC structure 132 reflects ARic light striking SF zone 112. No significant amount of light is normally emitted by structure 132. Including any ARsb light passing through structure 132, A light is formed with ARic light and any ARsb light normally leaving structure 132, and thus VC region 106, via zone 112.
  • ISCC segment 142 temporarily reflects XRic light striking print area 118 in response to object 104 impacting OC area 116 so as to meet the TH impact criteria. As in the normal state, CR ISCC segment 142 does not emit any significant amount of light during the changed state. Including any XRsb light passing through segment 142, X light is formed with XRic light and any XRsb light temporarily leaving segment 142, and thus IDVC portion 138, via area 118.
  • the mechanism causing CR ISCC segment 142 to temporarily reflect XRic light is pressure or/and deformation at OC area 116 or/and SF DF area 122 due to the impact.
  • the IS CR material is typically piezochromic material which temporarily changes color when subjected to a change in pressure, here at print area 118. Examples of piezochromic material are described in Fukuda, Inorganic Chromotropism: Basic Concepts and Applications of Colored Materials (Springer), 2007, pp.28 - 32, 37, 38, and 199 - 238, and the references cited on those pages, contents incorporated by reference herein.
  • CE ISCC structure 132 may or may not significantly emit AEic light during the normal state.
  • Structure 132 normally reflects ARic light striking SF zone 112. Including any ARsb light passing through structure 132, A light is formed with ARic light and any AEic and ARsb light normally leaving structure 132, and thus VC region 106, via zone 112.
  • the IS CE material forming ISCC segment 142 temporarily emits XEic light in response to the impact so as to meet the TH impact criteria.
  • CE ISCC segment 142 usually reflects ARic light striking print area 118. Including any XRsb light passing through segment 142, X light is formed with XEic and ARic light and any XRsb light temporarily leaving segment 142, and thus IDVC portion 138, via area 118.
  • the temporary emission of XEic light may so affect segment 142 that it temporarily largely ceases to reflect ARic light striking area 118 and, instead, temporarily reflects XRic light materially different from ARic light.
  • X light is now formed with XEic and XRic light and any XRsb light temporarily leaving segment 142, and therefore portion 138, via area 118.
  • CE ISCC segment 142 The mechanism causing CE ISCC segment 142 to temporarily emit XEic light is pressure or/and deformation at SF DF area 122 due to the impact.
  • the IS CE material is typically piezoluminescent material which temporarily emits light (luminesces) upon being subjected to a change in pressure, here at print area 118. Examples of piezoluminescent material are presented in "Piezoluminescence", Wikipedia, en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Piezoluminescence, 16 Mar.2013, 1 p., and the references cited therein, contents incorporated by reference herein.
  • the IS CE material is typically piezochromic luminescent material which continuously emits light whose color changes when subjected to a change in pressure, again here at area 118.
  • CC duration ⁇ tdr is usually automatic value ⁇ tdrau formed by base portion ⁇ tdrbs passively determined by the properties of the IS CR or CE material.
  • VC region 106 may contain componentry, described below, which excites the CR or CE material so as to automatically extend automatic value ⁇ t drau by amount ⁇ t drext beyond base duration ⁇ t drbs .
  • VC region 106 often contains multiple subregions stacked one over another up to SF zone 112.
  • a recitation that light of a particular species, i.e., light identified by one or more alphabetic or alphanumeric characters, leaves a specified one of these subregions mean that the light leaves the specified subregion along zone 112 if the specified subregion extends to zone 112 or, if the specified subregion adjoins another subregion lying between the specified subregion and zone 112, along the adjoining subregion, i.e., via the interface between the two subregions.
  • a recitation that light of a particular species leaves a segment or part of the specified subregion similarly mean that the light leaves that segment or subregion part along the corresponding segment or part of zone 112 if the specified subregion extends to zone 112 or, if the specified subregion adjoins another subregion lying between the specified subregion and zone 112, along the corresponding segment or part of the adjoining subregion, i.e., via the corresponding segment or part of the interface between the two subregions.
  • Figs.11a - 11c illustrate an embodiment 180 of OI structure 130 in which VC region 106 is again formed solely with ISCC structure 132.
  • Region 106, and thus structure 132 here consists of a principal IS component 182 and a principal CC component 184 that meet at a flat principal light-transmission interface 186 extending parallel to SF zone 112 and interface 136.
  • IS component 182 extends between zone 112 and interface 186.
  • CC component 184 extends between interfaces 186 and 136 and therefore between IS component 182 and substructure 134.
  • ADcc light normally leaves CC component 184 after being reflected or/and emitted by it during.
  • ADcc light which excludes any ARsb light, consists of (a) light, termed ARcc light, normally reflected by component 184 so as to leave it via interface 186 after striking SF zone 112 and passing through IS component 182 and (b) light (if any), termed AEcc light, normally emitted by component 184 so as to leave it via interface 186.
  • Reflected ARcc light which is of wavelength for a normal reflected main color ARcc is invariably always present.
  • Emitted AEcc light which is of wavelength for a normal emitted main color AEcc may or may not be present.
  • Any ARsb light passes in substantial part through CC component 184.
  • the total light, termed ATcc light, normally leaving component 184 (along IS component 182) consists of ARcc light, any AEcc light, and any ARsb light leaving component 184. Substantial parts of the ARcc light, any AEcc light, and any ARsb light pass through IS component 182.
  • component 182 may normally reflect light, termed ARis light, which leaves it via SF zone 112 after striking zone 112.
  • a light is formed with ARcc light, any AEcc light, and any ARis and ARsb light normally leaving component 182 and thus VC region 106.
  • Each of ADcc light and either ARcc or AEcc light is usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of each of A and ADic light.
  • item 192 is the ID segment of IS component 182 present in IDVC portion 138.
  • Print area 118 is the upper surface of ID segment 192.
  • Item 194 is the underlying ID segment of CC component 184 present in portion 138.
  • Item 196 is the ID segment of interface 186 present in portion 138.
  • "IF" hereafter means interface.
  • ID IS segment 192 Responsive to object 104 impacting OC area 116 so as to meet the TH impact criteria, ID IS segment 192 provides a principal general ID impact effect usually resulting from the pressure of the impact on area 116 or from deformation that object 104 causes along SF DF area 122.
  • the general ID impact effect is typically an electrical effect consisting of one or more electrical signals but can be in other form depending on the configuration and operation of IS component 182.
  • IS segment 192 can generate the impact effect piezoelectrically as described below for Figs.24a, 24b, 25a, and 25b or using a resistive touchscreen technique.
  • CC segment 194 responds to the effect or to the control signal by changing in such a way that light, termed XDcc light, temporarily leaves segment 194 after being reflected or/and emitted by it as VC region 106 goes to the changed state.
  • XDcc light which excludes any XRsb light, consists of (a) light, termed XRcc light, temporarily reflected by segment 194 so as to leave it via ID IF segment 196 after striking print area 118 and passing through IS segment 192 and (b) light (if any), termed XEcc light, temporarily emitted by CC segment 194 so as to leave it via IF segment 196.
  • Reflected XRcc light which is of wavelength for a temporary reflected main color XRcc is invariably always present.
  • Emitted XEcc light which is of wavelength for a temporary emitted main color XEcc may or may not be present.
  • Any XRsb light passes in substantial part through CC segment 194.
  • the total light, termed XTcc light, temporarily leaving segment 194 (along IS segment 192) consists of XRcc light, any XEcc light, and any XRsb light leaving segment 194.
  • Substantial parts of the XRcc light, any XEcc light, and any XRsb light pass through IS segment 192.
  • IS component 182 may reflect ARis light during the normal state
  • segment 192 may reflect ARis light which leaves it via print area 118 during the changed state.
  • X light is formed with XRcc light, any XEcc light, and any ARis and XRsb light leaving segment 192 and thus IDVC portion 138.
  • XDcc light differs materially from A, ADic, and ADcc light.
  • Each of XDcc light and either XRcc or XEcc light is usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of each of X and XDic light.
  • the principal general impact effect consists of one of multiple different principal specific impact effects respectively corresponding to the specific changed colors.
  • IS component 182, specifically IS segment 192 provides the general impact effect as the specific impact effect for the basic TH criteria set (Si) met by the impact.
  • CC component 184 specifically CC segment 194, responds (a) in some general OI embodiments to that specific impact effect or (b) in other general OI embodiments to the general CC control signal then generated in response to that specific effect sometimes dependent on the above-mentioned other impact criteria also being met in those other embodiments, by causing IDVC portion 138 to appear as the specific changed color (Xi) for that criteria set.
  • the control signal may, for example, be generatable at multiple control conditions respectively associated with the criteria sets. The control signal is then actually generated at the control condition for the criteria set met by the impact.
  • X light advantageously generally becomes more distinct from A light as the ratio RARis/ADcc of the radiosity of ARis light leaving IS component 182 during the normal state to the radiosity of ADcc light leaving component 182 during the normal state decreases and as the ratio RARis/XDcc of the radiosity of ARis light leaving IS segment 192 during the changed state to the radiosity of XDcc light leaving segment 192 during the changed state likewise decreases.
  • the radiosity of ARis light during the normal and changed states is usually made as small as reasonably feasible.
  • the sum of radiosity ratios RARis/ADcc and RARis/XDcc is usually no more than 0.4, preferably no more than 0.3, more preferably no more than 0.2, even more preferably no more than 0.1.
  • Performing the impact-sensing and color-changing operations with separate components 182 and 184 provides many benefits. More materials are capable of separately performing the impact-sensing and color- changing operations than of jointly performing those operations. As a result, the ambit of colors for embodying colors A and X is increased. Different shades of the embodiments of colors A and X existent in the absence of ARis light can be created by varying the reflection characteristics of IS component 182, specifically the wavelength and intensity characteristics of ARis light, without changing CC component 184. Print area 118 can be even better matched to OC area 116. The ruggedness, especially the ability to successfully withstand impacts, is enhanced. Consequently, the lifetime can be increased.
  • Full forward XN delay ⁇ tf can be as high as 0.4 s, sometimes as high as 0.6, 0.8, or 1.0 s but is usually reduced to no more than 0.2 s, preferably no more than 0.1 s, more preferably no more than 0.05 s, even more preferably no more than 0.025 s.
  • 50% forward XN delay ⁇ t f50 correspondingly can be as high as 0.2 s, sometimes as high as 0.3, 0.4, or 0.5 s but is usually reduced to no more than 0.1 s, preferably no more than 0.05 s, more preferably no more than 0.025 s, even more preferably no more than 0.0125 s.
  • These low maximum usual and preferred values for delays ⁇ tf and ⁇ tf50 are highly advantageous when the activity is a sport such as tennis in which players and any official(s) need to make quick decisions on the impact locations of a tennis ball embodying object 104.
  • the last 10% of the actual print-area transition from color A to color X is comparatively long in some embodiments of OI structure 180.
  • the time period from OS time tos to actual forward XN end time tf100 is considerably greater than approximate full forward delay ⁇ tf. See Fig.10.
  • the comparatively long duration of the last 10% of the A-to-X transition is generally not significant because a person viewing surface 102 can usually readily identify print area 118 when it is close to, but not exactly, color X.
  • 90% forward XN delay ⁇ t f90 and 10%-to-90% forward XN delay ⁇ t f10 ⁇ 90 are important timing parameters.
  • delay ⁇ t f90 can be greater than or less than delay ⁇ t f10 ⁇ 90 depending on whether OS time t os occurs before or after 10% forward XN time t f10 .
  • each delay ⁇ t f90 or ⁇ t f10 ⁇ 90 can be as high as 0.4 s, sometimes as high as 0.6, 0.8, or 1.0 s but is usually less than 0.2 s, preferably less than 0.1 s, more preferably less than 0.05 s, even more preferably less than 0.025 s. This is likewise particularly advantageous when the activity is a sport such as tennis in which quick decisions are needed on tennis-ball impact locations.
  • OC duration ⁇ t oc although usually quite small, can be long enough that 90% forward XN time t f90 occurs before OS time t os when ISCC structure 132 is formed with components 182 and 184. If so, 90% forward XN delay ⁇ t f90 and 10%-to-90% forward XN delay ⁇ t f10 ⁇ 90 become zero. Also, approximate forward XN end time t fe may occur before OS time t os . If so, full forward delay ⁇ t f drops to zero. 50% forward XN delay ⁇ t f50 also drops to zero and, in fact, becomes zero whenever time tf50 occurs before OS time tos.
  • a consequence of the reduced maximum ⁇ t f , ⁇ t f50 , ⁇ t f90 , and ⁇ t f10 ⁇ 90 values arising from forming ISCC structure 132 with components 182 and 184 is that return XN delays ⁇ t r , ⁇ t r50 , ⁇ t r90 , and ⁇ t r10 ⁇ 90 are reduced.
  • Approximate full return XN delay ⁇ tr usually has the same reduced maximum values as full forward delay ⁇ tf.
  • 50% return XN delay ⁇ tr50 usually has the same reduced maximum values as 50% forward delay ⁇ tf50.
  • 90% return XN delay ⁇ tr90 and 10%-to-90% return XN delay ⁇ tr10 ⁇ 90 usually have the same reduced maximum values as forward delays ⁇ tf90 and ⁇ tf10 ⁇ 90.
  • the general impact effect can be transmitted outside VC region 106.
  • the effect can take the form of a general location-identifying impact signal supplied to a separate general CC duration controller as described below for Figs.54a and 54b or a characteristics-identifying impact signal supplied to a separate general intelligent CC controller as described below for Figs.64a and 64b.
  • the effect can also take the form of multiple cellular location-identifying impact signals supplied to a separate cell CC duration controller as described below for Figs.59a and 59b or multiple characteristics-identifying impact signals supplied to a separate intelligent cell CC controller as described below for Figs.69a and 69b.
  • the effect is also provided to ID portion 138, or is converted into the general CC control signal provided to portion 138, for producing a color change at print area 118.
  • the effect is not provided to portion 138 or always converted into the control signal when an intelligent controller is used. Instead, the intelligent controller makes a decision to provide, or not provide, portion 138 with a CC initiation signal which implements, or leads to the generation of, the control signal that produces a color change at area 118.
  • components 182 and 184 can sometimes be reversed so that IS component 182 extends between CC component 184 and substructure 134. SF zone 112 is then the upper surface of component 184. Components 182 and 184 still meet at interface 186. In this reversal, the pressure of the impact on OC area 116 or the deformation that object 104 causes along SF DF area 122 is transmitted pressure-wise through component 184 to produce excess internal pressure at IF segment 196.
  • IS segment 192 responds to the excess internal pressure at IF segment 196, and thus to object 104 impacting OC area 116 so as to meet excess internal pressure criteria that embody the TH impact criteria, by providing the general impact effect supplied to CC segment 194 or/and outside VC region 106 for potential generation of the general CC control signal.
  • CC component 184 in OI structure 180 can be embodied in various ways to perform the CC function in accordance with the invention.
  • the core of the mechanism used to achieve color changing is light reflection (and associated light absorption).
  • Component 184 in these embodiments is, for simplicity, termed “CR component 184" where "CR” again means changeably reflective.
  • Light emission is the core of the mechanism used to achieve color changing in another group of embodiments.
  • Component 184 in these other embodiments is termed “CE component 184" where "CE” again means changeably emissive.
  • CR component 184 no significant amount of light is emitted by it so as to leave it during the normal or changed state.
  • CR component 184 normally reflects ARcc light which passes in substantial part through IS component 182.
  • Normal reflected main color ARcc may be termed the first reflected main color.
  • a light is formed with ARcc light and any ARis and ARsb light normally leaving component 182 and thus VC region 106.
  • ARcc light a reflective implementation of ADcc light here, is usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of A light.
  • ID segment 194 of CR component 184 temporarily reflects XRcc light, materially different from ARcc light, which passes in substantial part through IS segment 192 during the changed state. Temporary reflected main color XRcc may be termed the second reflected main color. If IS component 182 normally reflects ARis light, segment 192 continues to reflect ARis light.
  • X light is formed with XRcc light and any ARis and XRsb light leaving segment 192 and thus IDVC portion 138.
  • XRcc light a reflective implementation of XDcc light here, is usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of X light.
  • CR component 184 is an electrochromic structure or a photonic crystal structure in a basic embodiment.
  • An electrochromic structure contains electrochromic material which temporarily changes color upon undergoing a change in electronic state, such as a change in charge condition resulting from a change in electric field across the material, in response to an electrical-effect implementation of the general impact effect provided by IS segment 192. Examples of electrochromic material are described in Fukuda, Inorganic
  • CR component 184 is one or more of the following light-processing structures in which the light processing generally involves reflecting light off particles: a dipolar suspension structure, an electrofluidic structure, an electrophoretic structure, and an electrowetting structure.
  • CR component 184 may also be a reflective liquid-crystal structure or a reflective microelectricalmechanicalsystem (display) structure such as an interferometric modulator structure or a transflective digital micro shutter structure.
  • CE component 184 can be embodied to operate in either of two modes termed the single-emission and double-emission modes. These two embodiments of CE component 184 are respectively termed single- emission CE component 184 and double-emission CE component 184.
  • the normal and changed states of VC region 106 can be respectively designated as non-emissive and emissive states because significant light emission occurs during the changed state but not during the normal state.
  • Single-emission CE component 184 operates the same during the normal (non-emissive) state as CR component 184.
  • ID segment 194 of single-emission CE component 184 temporarily emits XEcc light which passes in substantial part through IS segment 192 during the changed (emissive) state.
  • CC segment 194 usually continues to reflect ARcc light which passes in substantial part through IS segment 192.
  • XEcc and ARcc light form XDcc light. Since IS component 182 may normally reflect ARis light, segment 192 may reflect ARis light.
  • X light is formed with XEcc and ARcc light and any ARis and XRsb light leaving segment 192 and thus IDVC portion 138.
  • XEcc light an emissive component of XDcc light here, differs materially from A, ADic, ADcc, and ARcc light. Either XEcc or ARcc light is usually a majority component of X light.
  • the emission of XEcc light may so affect CC segment 194 of single-emission CE component 184 during the changed state that segment 194 ceases to reflect ARcc light and, instead, temporarily reflects XRcc light significantly different from ARcc light.
  • the XRcc light passes in substantial part through IS segment 192.
  • XEcc and XRcc light now form XDcc light.
  • the processing of any ARis and XRsb light is the same.
  • X light is then formed with XEcc and XRcc light and any ARis and XRsb light leaving segment 192 and thus IDVC portion 138. Either XEcc or XRcc light is usually a majority component of X light.
  • double-emission CE component 184 the normal and changed states of VC region 106 can be respectively designated as first emissive and second emissive states because significant light emission occurs during both the normal and changed states.
  • Double-emission CE component 184 operates as follows during the normal (first emissive) state. For the normal state, CE component 184 normally emits AEcc light which passes in substantial part through IS component 182. Normal emitted main color AEcc may be termed the first emitted main color.
  • CE component 184 usually normally reflects ARcc light which passes in substantial part through IS component 182.
  • Double-emission CE component 184 responds, during the changed (second emissive) state, (a) in some general OI embodiments to the general impact effect for the impact meeting the TH impact criteria or (b) in other general OI embodiments to the general CC control signal generated in response to the effect sometimes dependent on other impact criteria also being met in those other embodiments basically the same as single- emission CE component 184 responds during the changed (emissive) state.
  • ID segment 194 of double-emission CE component 184 temporarily emits XEcc light which passes in substantial part through IS segment 192.
  • Temporary emitted main color XEcc which may be termed the second emitted main color, differs materially from normal (or first) emitted main color AEcc.
  • CC segment 194 can implement this change by ceasing to emit AEcc light and replacing it with XEcc light or by ceasing to emit one or more components, but not all, of AEcc light, potentially accompanied by emitting additional light.
  • ID segment 194 of double-emission CE component 184 usually continues to reflect ARcc light which passes in substantial part through IS segment 192. Since IS component 182 may normally reflect ARis light, segment 192 may again reflect ARis light. Including any XRsb light passing through segment 192, X light is formed with XEcc and ARcc light and any ARis and XRsb light leaving segment 192 and thus IDVC portion 138. Either XEcc or ARcc light is usually a majority component of X light.
  • the emission of XEcc light may so affect ID segment 194 of double-emission CE component 184 that CC segment 194 temporarily ceases to reflect ARcc light and instead temporarily reflects XRcc light which passes through IS segment 192.
  • segment 194 changing from emitting AEcc light to emitting XEcc light by ceasing to emit AEcc light and replacing it with XEcc light or by ceasing to emit one or more components, but not all, of AEcc light, possibly accompanied by emitting additional light
  • the operation of double-emission CE component 184 during the changed state in this alternative is the same as that of single- emission CE component 184 during the changed state in the corresponding alternative.
  • CE component 184 may variously be one or more of the following light-processing structures that emit light: a backlit liquid-crystal structure, a cathodoluminescent structure, a digital light processing structure, an electrochromic fluorescent structure, an electrochromic luminescent structure, an electrochromic phosphorescent structure, an electroluminescent structure, an emissive microelectricalmechanicalsystem (display) structure (such as a time-multiplexed optical shutter or a backlit digital micro shutter structure), a field-emission structure, a laser phosphor (display) structure, a light-emitting diode structure, a light-emitting electrochemical cell structure, a liquid-crystal-over- silicon structure, an organic light-emitting diode structure, an organic
  • CC component 184 is particularly suitable for embodying CC component 184 as a CR CC component, especially an electrochromic or photonic crystal structure, or a CE CC component, especially an electrochromic fluorescent, electrochromic luminescent, electrochromic phosphorescent structure, or electroluminescent structure.
  • Figs.12a - 12c illustrate an embodiment 200 of OI structure 180 and thus of OI structure 130.
  • CC component 184 in OI structure 200 consists of a principal electrode assembly 202, an optional principal near (first) auxiliary layer 204 extending between electrode assembly 202 and interface 186 to meet IS component 182, and an optional principal far (second) auxiliary layer 206 extending between assembly 202 and substructure 134.
  • the adjectives "near” and "far” are used to differentiate near auxiliary layer 204 and far auxiliary layer 206 relative to their distances from SF zone 112, far auxiliary layer 206 being farther from zone 112 than near auxiliary layer 204.
  • "NA” and "FA” hereafter respectively mean near auxiliary and far auxiliary.
  • Assembly 202, NA layer 204, and FA layer and 206 all usually extend parallel to one another and parallel to zone 112 and interface 136.
  • NA layer 204 usually contains insulating material for isolating IS component 182 and assembly 202 from each other as necessary.
  • FA layer 206 if present, usually contains insulating material for appropriately isolating assembly 202 from substructure 134 as desired.
  • Auxiliary layers 204 and 206 may perform other functions. Electrical conductors may be incorporated into NA layer 204 for electrically connecting selected parts of component 182 to selected parts of assembly 202. If VC region 106, potentially in combination with FC region 108, is manufactured as a separate unit and later installed on substructure 134, FA layer 206 protects assembly 202 during the time between manufacture of the unit and its installation on substructure 134.
  • NA layer 204 includes a polarizer while FA layer 206 includes a polarizer and either a light reflector or a light emitter.
  • Light travels from interface 186 through NA layer 204, usually transparent, to assembly 202 and vice versa. Hence, light leaves assembly 202 along layer 204. In some embodiments of CC component 184, light also travels from interface 186 through both NA layer 204 and assembly 202 to FA layer 206 and vice versa. Light leaves FA layer 206 along assembly 202 in those embodiments. Preferably, no light striking layer 206 along assembly 202 passes fully through layer 206 to interface 136 during the normal or changed state. In particular, all light striking layer 206 along assembly 202 is preferably either absorbed or reflected by layer 206 so that there is no ARsb or XRsb light.
  • Auxiliary layers 204 and 206 may or may not be significantly involved in determining color change along print area 118. If layer 204 or 206 is significantly involved in determining color change, the involvement is usually passive. That is, light processed by layer 204 or 206 undergoes changes largely caused by changes in light processed by assembly 202 rather than partly or fully by changes in the physical or/and chemical characteristics of layer 204 or 206.
  • FA layer 206 (if present) operates during the normal state according to a light non-outputting normal general far auxiliary mode or one of several versions of a light outputting normal general far auxiliary mode depending on how subcomponents 202, 204, and 206 are configured and constituted.
  • GFA hereafter means general far auxiliary. Largely no light leaves FA layer 206 along assembly 202 in the light non-outputting normal GFA mode.
  • the light outputting normal GFA mode consists of one or both of the following actions: (i) any ARsb light passes in substantial part through layer 206 and (ii) light, termed ADfa light, is reflected or/and emitted by layer 206 so as to leave it along assembly 202.
  • ADfa light which excludes any ARsb light, consists of (a) light (if any), termed ARfa light, normally reflected by FA layer 206 so as to leave it along assembly 202 after striking SF zone 112, passing through IS component 182, NA layer 204 (if present), and assembly 202 and (b) light (if any), termed AEfa light, normally emitted by layer 206 so as to leave it along assembly 202. Reflected ARfa light is typically present when ADfa light is present.
  • the total light (if any), termed ATfa light, leaving layer 206 in the light outputting normal GFA mode consists of any ARfa and AEfa light provided directly by layer 206 and any ARsb light passing through it. This operation of layer 206 applies to situations in which it is both significantly used, and not used, in determining color change along zone 112.
  • a recitation that light leaves assembly 202 means that the light leaves it along IS component 182, and thus via interface 186, if layer 204 is absent.
  • Assembly 202 operates during the normal state according to a light non-outputting normal general assembly mode or one of a group of versions of a light outputting normal general assembly mode depending on how subcomponents 202, 204, and 206 are configured and constituted.
  • "GAB" hereafter means general assembly. Largely no light normally leaves assembly 202 along NA layer 204 in the light non-outputting normal GAB mode.
  • the light outputting normal GAB mode consists of one or more of the following actions: (i) a substantial part of any ARsb light passing through FA layer 206 passes through assembly 202, (ii) substantial parts of any FA-layer-provided ARfa and AEfa light pass through assembly 202, and (iii) light, termed ADab light, is reflected or/and emitted by assembly 202 so as to leave it along NA layer 204.
  • ADab light which excludes any ARfa or ARsb light, consists of (a) light (if any), termed ARab light, normally reflected by assembly 202 so as to leave it along NA layer 204 after striking SF zone 112, passing through IS component 182, and layer 204 and (b) light (if any), termed AEab light, normally emitted by assembly 202 so as to leave it along layer 204. Reflected ARab light is typically present when ADab light is present.
  • ATab light The total light, termed ATab light, leaving assembly 202 in the light outputting normal GAB mode consists of any ARab and AEab light provided directly by assembly 202, any FA-layer-provided ARfa and AEfa light passing through it, and any ARsb light passing through it.
  • ADfa light is present in some versions, but absent in other versions, of the light outputting normal GAB mode. When ADfa light is absent, ARsb light is also usually absent. Emitted AEab light is typically absent from the light outputting normal GAB mode when emitted AEfa light is present in it and vice versa. Either ADab or ADfa light, and therefore one of ARab, AEab, ARfa, and AEfa light, is usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of each of A, ADic, and ADcc light depending on how subcomponents 202, 204, and 206 are configured and constituted.
  • Substantial parts of any ARab, AEab, ARfa, AEfa, and ARsb light leaving assembly 202 pass through NA layer 204.
  • layer 204 may normally reflect light, termed ARna light, which leaves it via interface 186 after striking SF zone 112 and passing through IS component 182 and which thus excludes any ARab, ARfa, or ARsb light.
  • Total ATcc light normally leaving layer 204, and therefore CC component 184 consists of any assembly-provided ARab and AEab light passing through layer 204, any FA-layer-provided ARfa and AEfa light passing through it, any ARna light reflected by it, and any ARsb light passing through it.
  • ATcc light leaving CC component 184 is also expressed as consisting of ATab light and any ARna light leaving layer 204.
  • any ARab, AEab, ARfa, AEfa, and ARna light leaving layer 204 form ADcc light leaving component 184.
  • Substantial parts of any ARab, AEab, ARfa, AEfa, ARna, and ARsb light leaving component 184 pass through IS component 182.
  • a light is formed with any ARab, AEab, ARfa, AEfa, ARis, ARna, and ARsb light normally leaving component 182 and thus VC region 106.
  • Changes in the color of IDVC portion 138 occur due to changes in assembly 202 in responding (a) in first general OI embodiments to the general impact effect provided by IS segment 192 for the impact meeting the basic TH impact criteria or (b) in second general OI embodiments to the general CC control signal generated in response to the effect sometimes dependent on other impact criteria also being met in the second embodiments.
  • the assembly changes are sometimes accompanied, as mentioned above, by changes in the light processed by NA layer 204, if present, or/and FA layer 206, if present.
  • item 212 is the ID segment of assembly 202 present in portion 138.
  • Items 214 and 216 respectively are the ID segments of auxiliary layers 204 and 206 present in portion 138.
  • ID segment 216 of FA layer 206 temporarily operates, usually passively, according to a light non-outputting changed GFA mode or one of several versions of a light outputting changed GFA mode.
  • AB light non-outputting changed GFA mode
  • the light outputting changed GFA mode consists of one or both of the following actions: (i) any XRsb light passes in substantial part through FA segment 216 and (ii) light, termed XDfa light, is reflected or/and emitted by segment 216 so as to leave it along AB segment 212.
  • XDfa light which excludes any XRsb light, consists of (a) light (if any), termed XRfa light, temporarily reflected by FA segment 216 so as to leave it along AB segment 212 after striking print area 118, passing through IS segment 192, ID segment 214 of NA layer 204 (if present), and AB segment 212 and (b) light (if any), termed XEfa light, temporarily emitted by FA segment 216 so as to leave it along AB segment 212. Reflected XRfa light is typically present when XDfa light is present.
  • Reflection of XRfa light or/and emission of XEfa light leaving FA segment 216 along AB segment 212 usually occur under control of segment 212 in response (a) in the first general OI embodiments to the general impact effect for the impact meeting the basic TH impact criteria or (b) in the second general OI embodiments to the general CC control signal generated in response to the effect sometimes dependent on other impact criteria also being met in the second embodiments.
  • FA layer 206 normally reflects ARfa light or/and emits AEfa light, a change in which largely no light temporarily leaves FA segment 216 likewise usually occurs under control of AB segment 212 in responding to the impact effect or to the control signal.
  • the total light (if any), termed XTfa light, leaving FA segment 216 in the light outputting changed GFA mode consists of any XRfa and XEfa light provided directly by segment 216 and any XRsb light passing through it.
  • FA segment 216 applies to situations in which FA layer 206 is both significantly used, and not used, in determining color change along print area 118.
  • XDfa light usually differs materially from A, ADic, ADcc, ADab, and ADfa light if layer 206 is significantly involved in determining color change along area h.
  • a recitation that light leaves AB segment 212 means that the light leaves segment 212 along IS segment 192, and thus via IF segment 196, if layer 204 is absent.
  • AB segment 212 responds (a) in the first general OI embodiments to the general impact effect or (b) in the second general OI embodiments to the general CC control signal generated in response to the effect sometimes dependent on both the TH impact criteria and other criteria being met by temporarily operating according to a light non-outputting changed GAB mode or one of a group of versions of a light outputting changed GAB mode.
  • the light outputting changed GAB mode consists of one or more of the following actions: (i) a substantial part of any XRsb light passing through FA segment 216 passes through AB segment 212, (ii) substantial parts of any FA-segment-provided XRfa and XEfa light pass through segment 212, and (iii) light, termed XDab light, is reflected or/and emitted by segment 212 so as to leave it along NA segment 214.
  • XDab light which excludes any XRfa or XRsb light, consists of (a) light (if any), termed XRab light, temporarily reflected by AB segment 212 so as to leave it along NA segment 214 after striking print area 118, passing through IS segment 192 and NA segment 214 and (b) light (if any), termed XEab light, temporarily emitted by AB segment 212 so as to leave it along NA segment 214. Reflected XRab light is typically present when XDab light is present.
  • the total light, termed XTab light, leaving AB segment 212 in the light outputting changed GAB mode consists of any XRab and XEab light provided directly by segment 212, any FA-segment- provided XRfa and XEfa light passing through it, and any XRsb light passing through it.
  • XDfa light is present in some versions, but is absent in other versions, of the light outputting changed GAB mode. When XDfa light is absent, XRsb light is also usually absent. Emitted XEab light is typically absent from the light outputting changed GAB mode when emitted XEfa light is present in it and vice versa. XDab light usually differs materially from A, ADic, ADcc, ADab, and ADfa light if FA layer 206 is not significantly involved in determining color change along print area 118.
  • Either XDab or XDfa light, and thus one of XRab, XEab, XRfa, and XEfa light, is usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of each of X, XDic, and XDcc light depending on the configuration and constitution of subcomponents 202, 204, and 206.
  • XRna light is usually largely ARna light.
  • Total XTcc light temporarily leaving NA segment 214, and therefore CC segment 194 consists of any AB-segment- provided XRab and XEab light passing through segment 214, any FA-segment-provided XRfa and XEfa light passing through it, any XRna light directly reflected by it, and any XRsb light passing through it.
  • XTcc light leaving CC segment 194 is also expressed as consisting of XTab light and any XRna light leaving NA segment 214.
  • Any XRab, XEab, XRfa, XEfa, and XRna light leaving segment 214 form XDcc light leaving CC segment 194.
  • Substantial parts of any XRab, XEab, XRfa, XEfa, XRna, and XRsb light leaving segment 194 pass through IS segment 192. If IS component 182 normally reflects ARis light, segment 192 continues to reflect ARis light.
  • X light is formed with any XRab, XEab, XRfa, XEfa, ARis, XRna, and XRsb light temporarily leaving segment 192 and thus IDVC portion 138.
  • Different shades of the embodiments of colors A and X occurring in the absence of ARna and XRna light can be created by varying the reflection characteristics of NA layer 204, specifically the wavelength and intensity characteristics of ARna and XRna light, without changing assembly 202 or FA layer 206.
  • NA layer 204 can thus strongly influence color A or/and color X.
  • Either of the changed GAB modes can generally be employed with either of the normal GAB modes, including any of the versions of the light outputting normal GAB mode, in an embodiment of CC component 184 except for employing the light non-outputting changed GAB mode with the light non-outputting normal GAB mode provided, however, that the operation of the changed GAB mode is compatible with the operation of normal GAB mode in that embodiment.
  • This compatibility requirement may effectively preclude employing certain versions of the light outputting changed GAB mode with certain versions of the light outputting normal GAB mode.
  • the major combinations of one of the changed GAB modes with one of the normal GAB modes consist of employing the light non-outputting changed GAB mode or the light outputting changed GAB mode for a version in which (a) XRfa or/and XEfa light provided by FA segment 216 passes through AB segment 212 or/and (b) XRab or/and XEab light is provided directly by segment 212 with the light non-outputting normal GAB mode or the light outputting normal GAB mode for a version in which (a) ARfa or/and AEfa light provided by FA layer 206 passes through assembly 202 or/and (b) ARab or/and AEab light is provided directly by assembly 202 again except for employing the light non-outputting changed GAB mode with the light non-outputting normal GAB mode.
  • Electrode assembly 202 in OI structure 200 consists of a principal core layer 222, principal near (first) electrode structure 224, and principal far (second) electrode structure 226 located generally opposite, and spaced apart from, near electrode structure 224.
  • Core layer 222 lies between electrode structures 224 and 226.
  • NE and FE hereafter respectively mean near electrode and far electrode.
  • FE structure 226 is farther away from SF zone 112 than NE structure 224 so that structures 224 and 226 respectively meet auxiliary layers 204 and 206.
  • Core layer 222 and structures 224 and 226 all usually extend parallel to one another and to auxiliary layers 204 and 206, zone 112, and interface 136.
  • Each structure 224 or 226 contains a layer (not separately shown) for conducting electricity.
  • Structures 224 and 226 control core layer 222 as further described below and typically process light, usually passively, which affects the operation of layer 222 and thus CC component 184.
  • Light travels from NA layer 204 or, if it is absent, from interface 186 through NE structure 224 (including its electrode layer) to core layer 222 and vice versa. Accordingly, light leaves layer 222 along structure 224.
  • CC component 184 light travels from interface 186 through structure 224, layer 222, and FE structure 226 (similarly including its electrode layer) to FA layer 206 and vice versa so that light leaves layer 206 along structure 226.
  • FE structure 226 operates as follows during the normal state. When assembly 202 is in the light non-outputting normal GAB mode, largely no light leaves structure 226 along core layer 222. One or more of the following actions occur with structure 226 when assembly 202 is in the light outputting normal GAB mode: (i) a substantial part of any ARsb light passing through FA layer 206 (if present) passes through structure 226, (ii) substantial parts of any ARfa and AEfa light provided by layer 206 pass through structure 226, and (iii) structure 226 reflects light, termed ARfe light, which leaves it along core layer 222 after striking SF zone 112 and passing through IS component 182, NA layer 204 (if present), NE structure 224, and core layer 222 and which thus excludes any ARfa or ARsb light.
  • ATfe light The total light (if any), termed ATfe light, normally leaving structure 226 consists of any ARfa and AEfa light provided by FA layer 206 so as to pass through structure 226, any ARfe light directly reflected by it, and any ARsb light passing through it.
  • Core layer 222 operates as follows during the normal state. When assembly 202 is in the light non- outputting normal GAB mode, largely no light normally leaves layer 222 along NE structure 224. One or more of the following actions occur with layer 222 when assembly 202 is in the light outputting normal GAB mode so as to implement it for layer 222: (i) a substantial part of any ARsb light passing through FE structure 226 passes through layer 222, (ii) substantial parts of any FA-layer-provided ARfa and AEfa light passing through structure 226 pass through layer 222, (iii) a substantial part of any ARfe light reflected by structure 226 passes through layer 222, and (iv) light, termed ADcl light and of wavelength for a normal reflected/emitted core color ADcl, is reflected or/and emitted by layer 222 so as to leave it along NE structure 224.
  • ADcl light which excludes any ARfe, ARfa, or ARsb light, consists of (a) light (if any), termed ARcl light and of wavelength for a normal reflected core color ARcl, normally reflected by core layer 222 so as to leave it along NE structure 224 after striking SF zone 112, passing through IS component 182, NA layer 204, and structure 224 and (b) light (if any), termed AEcl light and of wavelength for a normal emitted core color AEcl, normally emitted by core layer 222 so as to leave it along structure 224. Reflected ARcl light is typically present when ADcl light is present.
  • the total light, termed ATcl light and of wavelength for a normal total core color ATcl, leaving layer 222 in the light outputting normal GAB mode consists of any ARcl and AEcl light provided directly by layer 222 and any ARfa, AEfa, ARfe, and ARsb light passing through it.
  • Emitted AEcl light is typically absent from the light outputting normal GAB mode when emitted AEfa light is present in it and vice versa.
  • each of ADcl light and either ARcl or AEcl light is usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of each of A, ADic, ADcc, and ADab light depending on how subcomponents 202, 204, and 206 are configured and constituted.
  • Substantial parts of any ARcl, AEcl, ARfa, AEfa, ARfe, and ARsb light normally leaving core layer 222 pass through NE structure 224.
  • structure 224 may normally reflect light, termed ARne light, which leaves it along NA layer 204 after striking SF zone 112 and passing through IS component 182 and layer 204 and which thus excludes any ARcl, ARfa, ARfe, or ARsb light.
  • Total ATab light normally leaving structure 224, and therefore assembly 202 consists of any ARcl, AEcl, ARfa, AEfa, ARfe, and ARsb light passing through structure 224 and any ARne light directly reflected by it.
  • Any ARcl, AEcl, ARne, and ARfe light leaving NE structure 224 form ADab light leaving assembly 202.
  • Any ARcl, AEcl, ARfa, AEfa, ARna, ARne, and ARfe light leaving NA layer 204 form ADcc light leaving CC component 184.
  • ARcc light reflected by component 184 consists of any ARab, ARfa, and ARna light, ARab light being formed with any ARcl, ARne, and ARfe light.
  • AEcc light emitted by component 184 consists of any AEab and AEfa light, AEab light being formed with any AEcl light.
  • Changes in AB segment 212 during the changed state arise from electrical signals applied to electrode structures 224 and 226 in response (a) in the first general OI embodiments to the general impact effect provided by IS segment 192 for the impact meeting the basic TH impact criteria or (b) in the second general OI embodiments to the general CC control signal generated in response to the effect sometimes dependent on other impact criteria also being met in the second embodiments.
  • item 232 is the ID segment of core layer 222 present in IDVC portion 138.
  • Items 234 and 236 respectively are the ID segments of structures 224 and 226 present in portion 138.
  • ID FE segment 236 operates as follows during the changed state. When assembly 202 is in the light non-outputting changed GAB mode, largely no light leaves FE segment 236 along ID core segment 232. One or more of the following actions occur with FE segment 236 when assembly 202 is in the light outputting changed GAB mode: (i) a substantial part of any XRsb light passing through ID segment 216 of FA layer 206 (if present) passes through segment 236, (ii) substantial parts of any XRfa and XEfa light provided by FA segment 216 pass through segment 236, and (iii) segment 236 reflects light, termed XRfe light, which leaves it along core segment 232 after striking print area 118 and passing through IS segment 192, segment 214 of NA layer 204 (if present), ID NE segment 234, and core segment 232 and which thus excludes any XRfa or XRsb light.
  • the total light (if any), termed XTfe light, temporarily leaving FE segment 236 consists of any FA-segment-provided XRfa and XEfa light passing through segment 236, any XRfe light directly reflected by it, and any XRsb light passing through it.
  • XRfe light can be the same as, or significantly different from, ARfe light depending on how the light processing in IDVC portion 138 during the changed state differs from the light processing in VC region 106 during the normal state.
  • Core segment 232 responds (a) in the first general OI embodiments to the general impact effect or (b) in the second general OI embodiments to the general CC control signal generated in response to the effect sometimes dependent on both the TH impact criteria and other criteria being met by temporarily operating as follows during the changed state.
  • assembly 202 is in the light non-outputting changed GAB mode, largely no light leaves segment 232 along NE segment 234.
  • One or more of the following actions occur in core segment 232 when assembly 202 is in the light outputting changed GAB mode so as to implement it for segment 232: (i) a substantial part of any XRsb light passing through FE segment 236 passes through core segment 232, (ii) substantial parts of any FA-segment-provided XRfa and XEfa light passing through FE segment 236 pass through core segment 232, (iii) a substantial part of any XRfe light reflected by FE segment 236 passes through core segment 232, and (iv) light, termed XDcl light and of wavelength for a temporary reflected/emitted core color XDcl, is reflected or/and emitted by segment 232 so as to leave it along NE segment 234.
  • XDcl light which excludes any XRfa, XRfe, or XRsb light, consists of (a) light (if any), termed XRcl light and of wavelength for a temporary reflected core color XRcl, temporarily reflected by core segment 232 so as to leave it along NE segment 234 after striking print area 118, passing through IS segment 192, NA segment 214, and NE segment 234 and (b) light (if any), termed XEcl light and of wavelength for a temporary emitted core color XEcl, temporarily emitted by core segment 232 so as to leave it along NE segment 234. Reflected XRcl light is typically present when XDcl light is present.
  • the total light, termed XTcl light and of wavelength for a temporary total core color XTcl, leaving core segment 232 in the light outputting changed GAB mode consists of any XRcl and XEcl light provided directly by segment 232 and any XRfa, XEfa, XRfe, and XRsb light passing through it.
  • XTcl light differs materially from ATcl light.
  • Emitted XEcl light is typically absent from the light outputting changed GAB mode when emitted XEfa light is present in it and vice versa.
  • XDcl light usually differs materially from A, ADic, ADcc, ADab, ADcl, and ADfa light if FA layer 206 is not significantly involved in determining color change along print area 118. The same applies usually to XRcl and AEcl light if both are present and, of course, to XRcl or XEcl light if it is present but respective XEcl or XRcl light is absent.
  • each of XDcl light and either XRcl or XEcl light is usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of each of X, XDic, XDcc, and XDab light depending on how subcomponents 202, 204, and 206 are configured and constituted.
  • NE segment 234 Substantial parts of any XRcl, XEcl, XRfa, XEfa, XRfe, and XRsb light leaving core segment 232 during the changed state pass through NE segment 234. If NE structure 224 reflects ARne light during the normal state, segment 234 reflects light, termed XRne light, which leaves it along NA segment 214 during the changed state after striking print area 118 and passing through IS segment 192 and NA segment 214 and which thus excludes any XRcl, XRfa, XRfe, or XRsb light. XRne light is usually largely ARne light.
  • Total XTab light temporarily leaving NE segment 234, and therefore AB segment 212 consists of any XRcl, XEcl, XRfa, XEfa, XRfe, and XRsb light passing through NE segment 234 and any XRne light reflected by it.
  • XTab light differs materially from ATab light.
  • Any XRcl, XEcl, XRne, and XRfe light leaving NE segment 234 form XDab light leaving AB segment 212.
  • Any XRcl, XEcl, XRfa, XEfa, XRna, XRne, and XRfe light leaving NA segment 214 form XDcc light leaving CC segment 194.
  • XRcc light reflected by segment 194 consists of any XRab, XRfa, and XRna light, XRab light being formed with any XRcl, XRne, and XRfe light.
  • XEcc light emitted by segment 194 consists of any XEab light and any XEfa light, XEab light being formed with any XEcl light.
  • the major combinations of one of the changed GAB modes with one of the normal GAB modes consist of employing the light non-outputting changed GAB mode or the light outputting changed GAB mode for a version in which (a) XRfa or/and XEfa light provided by FA segment 216 passes through AB segment 212 or/and (b) XRcl or/and XEcl light provided by core segment 232 passes through NE segment 234 with the light non-outputting normal GAB mode or the light outputting normal GAB mode for a version in which (a) ARfa or/and AEfa light provided by FA layer 206 passes through assembly 202 or/and (b) ARcl or/and AEcl light provided by core layer 222 passes through NE structure 224 again except for employing the light non-outputting changed GAB mode with the light non-outputting normal GAB mode.
  • the reliability and longevity of OI structure 200 are generally enhanced when the pressure inside assembly 202, specifically inside core layer 222, is close to atmospheric pressure. More particularly, the average pressure across layer 222 of any fluid (liquid or/and gas) in layer 222 during operation of structure 200 is preferably at least 0.25 atm, more preferably at least 0.5 atm, even more preferably at least 0.75 atm, yet more preferably at least 0.9 atm, and is preferably no more than 2 atm, more preferably no more than 1.5 atm, even more preferably no more than 1.25 atm, yet more preferably no more than 1.1 atm.
  • each NE or FE layer may be implemented with two or more electrode sublayers.
  • each electrode layer is a patterned layer laterally extending largely across the full extent of VC region 106.
  • one electrode layer typically the NE layer, is a patterned layer extending largely across the full lateral extent of region 106 while the other electrode layer is a blanket layer (or sheet) extending largely across the full lateral extent of region 106.
  • Each patterned electrode layer may consist of one electrode or multiple electrodes spaced laterally apart from one another.
  • the space to the sides of each patterned electrode layer is typically largely occupied with insulating material but can be largely empty or largely occupied with gas such as air. If each patterned electrode layer consists of multiple electrodes, one or more layers of conductive material may lie over or/and under the electrodes for electrical contacting them.
  • each electrode layer is a patterned layer formed with multiple electrodes
  • the patterns can be the same such that the electrodes in each electrode layer lie respectively opposite the electrodes in the other electrode layer.
  • the cellular structures described below for VC region 106 in regard to Figs.38a, 38b, 43a, 43b, 46a, 46b, 48a, 48b, 50a, 50b, and 53 present examples in which each electrode layer is a patterned layer consisting of multiple electrodes with the space to the sides of the electrodes largely occupied with insulating material and with the electrodes in each electrode layer lying respectively opposite the electrodes in the other electrode layer.
  • the patterns in the electrode layers can differ materially so that the electrodes in the NE layer materially overlap the electrodes in the FE layer at selected sites across region 106.
  • each electrode layer is a blanket layer laterally extending largely across the full extent of VC region 106.
  • the conductivity of one of the blanket electrode layers, typically the NE layer, is usually so low that a voltage applied to a specified point in that blanket layer attenuates relatively rapidly in spreading across the layer so as to effectively be received only in a relatively small area containing the voltage-application point of that electrode layer.
  • Core layer 222 contains thickness locations, termed chief core thickness locations, lying between opposite portions of the electrode layers, e.g., thickness locations extending perpendicular to both electrode layers. Depending on how the electrode layers are configured, layer 222 may also have thickness locations, termed subsidiary core thickness locations, not lying between opposite portions of the electrode layers.
  • a subsidiary core thickness location occurs when an infinitely long straight line extending through that location generally parallel to its lateral surfaces, generally parallel to the lateral surfaces of the nearest chief core thickness location, and generally perpendicular to the electrode layers extends through only one of the electrode layers or through neither electrode layer.
  • V n represent the controllable voltage, termed the near (or first) controllable voltage, at any point in the NE layer
  • Vf represent the controllable voltage, termed the far (or second) controllable voltage, at any point in the FE layer
  • Vnf represent the control voltage difference Vn - V f between controllable voltages V n and V f at those two points in the electrode layers.
  • near controllable voltage Vn is normally largely at the same near normal control value VnN throughout the NE layer regardless of whether it consists of one electrode, patterned or unpatterned (blanket), or multiple electrodes.
  • far controllable voltage Vf is normally largely at the same far normal control value VfN throughout the FE layer regardless of whether it is formed with a single electrode, patterned or unpatterned, or multiple electrodes.
  • VnfN represent the normal value VnN - VfN of control voltage V nf constituted as difference V n - V f .
  • the electrode layers normally apply (a) a voltage equal to normal control value V nfN across essentially every chief thickness core location and (b) a voltage of the same sign as, but of lesser magnitude than, normal value VnfN across any subsidiary thickness core location.
  • core layer 222 and the core-layer voltage distribution resulting from normal control value V nfN are chosen so that, during the normal state, total ATab light consists of any ADab, ADfa, and ARsb light.
  • ADab light again consists of any ARcl, AEcl, ARne, and ARfe light while ADfa light consists of any ARfa and AEfa light.
  • NA layer 204 is sufficiently transmissive of ATab light that ATcc light formed with ATab light and any ARna light normally leaves CC component 184.
  • IS component 182 is sufficiently transmissive of ATcc light that A light formed with ATcc light and any ARis light normally leaves VC region 106.
  • VC region 106 often provides the principal general CC control signal in response to the general impact effect supplied by IS segment 192.
  • the control signal consists of changing control voltage Vnf for IDVC portion 138 to a changed control value VnfC materially different from normal control value V nfN .
  • Region 106 goes to the changed state.
  • the control signal as formed with changed control value V nfC can be generated by various parts of region 106, e.g., by component 182, specifically segment 192, or by a portion, such as NA layer 204, of CC component 184.
  • Voltage V nf remains substantially at normal value VnfN for the remainder of region 106.
  • the general CC control signal can alternatively originate outside VC region 106.
  • the control signal can be a general CC initiation signal conditionally supplied from an intelligent CC controller as described below for Figs.64a and 64b.
  • the control signal can consist of multiple cellular CC initiation signals supplied respectively to full CM cells, specifically to their electrode parts, as described below for Fig.71 or 73.
  • VA voltage-application location in the NE layer
  • VnC near (or first) CC control value
  • V fC far (or second) CC control value
  • CC values V nC and V fC may be respectively the same as, or respectively differ from, normal values VnN and VfN as long as far CC value VfC differs materially from far normal value VfN if near CC value VnC is the same as near normal value VnN and vice versa. In any event, CC values VnC and VfC are chosen so that changed value VnfC differs materially from normal value VnfN.
  • the VA locations in the electrode layers can be variously implemented depending on their configurations. If each electrode layer is a patterned layer, the VA location in the NE layer extends partly or fully across ID segment 234 of NE structure 224, and the VA location in the FE layer extends partly or fully across ID segment 236 of FE structure 226.
  • the VA location in the patterned electrode layer extends partly or fully across its electrode segment 234 or 236, and the VA location in the other electrode layer extends partly or fully across the other electrode segment 236 or 234 and laterally beyond that other electrode segment 236 or 234, e.g., across the full lateral extent of VC region 106.
  • the VA location in that multi-electrode electrode layer may partly or fully encompass two or more of its electrodes.
  • each electrode layer is a blanket layer with the conductivity of one of the electrode layers, again typically the NE layer, being so low that a voltage applied to a specified point in that blanket electrode layer attenuates relatively rapidly in spreading across it so as to effectively be received only in a relatively small area containing that layer's VA point
  • the small area in that blanket electrode layer constitutes its VA location and lies in electrode segment 234 or 236 where voltage V n or V f is effectively received at CC value V nC or V fC .
  • the VA location in the other electrode layer usually extends partly or fully across its electrode segment 236 or 234 and laterally beyond its electrode segment 236 or 234, e.g., again across the full lateral extent of VC region 106.
  • electrode segments 234 and 236 The common feature of the preceding ways of configuring the electrode layers is that the general CC control signal is applied between electrode segments 234 and 236. Ignoring any dielectric or semiconductor material between core layer 222 and either electrode layer, electrode segments 234 and 236 temporarily apply (a) a voltage equal to changed control value V nfC across essentially every chief thickness core location in core segment 232 and (b) a voltage of the same sign as, but of lesser magnitude than, changed value VnfC across any subsidiary thickness core location in segment 232. If there is no subsidiary thickness location in segment 232, the control signal is simply applied across segment 232, again ignoring any dielectric or semiconductor material between core layer 222 and either electrode layer.
  • core layer 222 and the core-segment voltage distribution resulting from changed value VnfC are chosen so that core segment 232 responds to the general CC control signal, and thus to the general impact effect from which the control signal is generated for the impact meeting the basic TH impact criteria sometimes dependent on other impact criteria also being met, by undergoing internal change that enables XTab light leaving AB segment 212 to consist of any XDab, XDfa, and XRsb light.
  • XDab light consists of any XRcl, XEcl, XRne, and XRfe light while XDfa light consists of any XRfa and XEfa light.
  • NA layer 204 is sufficiently transmissive of XTab light that XTcc light formed with XTab light and any XRna light temporarily leaves CC segment 194.
  • IS component 182 is sufficiently transmissive of XTcc light that X light formed with XTcc light and any ARis light temporarily leaves IDVC portion 138.
  • NA layer 204 can include a programmable reflection-adjusting layer (not separately shown), typically separated from assembly 202 by insulating material, for being electrically programmed subsequent to manufacture of OI structure 200 for adjusting colors A and X.
  • "RA" hereafter means reflection-adjusting.
  • the RA layer is preferably clear transparent prior to programming. The programming causes the RA layer to become tinted transparent or more tinted transparent if it originally was tinted transparent. ARna light is thereby adjusted. XRna light is also adjusted, typically in a way corresponding to the ARna adjustment.
  • colors A and X are adjusted respectively from an initial principal color A i and an initial changed color X i prior to programming to a final principal color A f and a final changed color X f subsequent to programming.
  • the programming of the RA layer can be variously done.
  • a temporary blanket conductive programming layer is deployed on SF zone 112 prior to programming.
  • OI structure 200 includes a permanent blanket conductive programming layer, typically constituted with part of NA layer 204, lying between zone 112 and the RA layer.
  • a programming voltage is applied between the programming layer and NE structure 224 sufficiently long to cause the RA layer to change to a desired tinted transparency.
  • the programming layer if a temporary one, is usually removed from zone 112.
  • the tinting adjustment can be caused by introduction of RA ions into the RA layer. If the NE layer is patterned, the RA material to the sides of the patterned NE layer usually undergoes the same tinting adjustment as the RA material between the programming layer and the NE layer.
  • core layer 222 can include a programmable RA layer lying along NE structure 224 and having the preceding transparency characteristics.
  • the core RA layer is programmed to a desired tinted transparency by applying a programming voltage between the NE and FE layers for a suitable time period. Introduction of RA ions into the core RA layer can cause the tinting adjustment. If the NE or FE layer is patterned, the RA material to the sides of the patterned NE or FE layer usually undergoes the same tinting adjustment as the RA material between the NE and FE layers.
  • the magnitude of the programming voltage is usually much greater than the magnitudes of control values VnfN and VnfC.
  • the programming voltage can be a selected one of plural different programming values for causing final principal color A f to be a corresponding one of like plural different specific final principal colors and for causing final changed color Xf to be a corresponding one of like plural different specific final changed colors.
  • the NE layer transmits at least 40% of incident light across at least part of the visible spectrum and consists of conductive material or/and resistive material whose resistivity is, for example, 10 - 100 ohm-cm at 300°K.
  • This conductive or/and resistive material is termed transparent conductive material since the resistivity of the resistive material, when present, is close to the upper limit,10 ohm-cm at 300°K, of the resistivity for conductive material.
  • TCM hereafter means transparent conductive material.
  • the FE layer is similarly formed with TCM if visible light is intended to pass fully through one or more thickness locations of core layer 222 at certain times.
  • the selection of colors of light to be transmitted by the thin layer is limited to the part of the visible spectrum across which the layer transmits at least 40% of incident light.
  • the part of the visible spectrum across which a thin layer of a TCM transmits at least 40% of incident light may be single portion continuous in wavelength or a plurality of portions separated by portions in which the thin layer transmits less than 40% of incident light.
  • the transmissivity of incident visible light of a thin layer of the TCM across part, preferably all, of the visible spectrum is usually at least 50%, preferably at least 60%, more preferably at least 80%, even more preferably at least 90%, yet further preferably at least 95%.
  • the thicknesses of a TCM layer meeting the preceding transmissivity criteria is typically 0.1 - 0.2 ⁇ m but can be more or less.
  • the layer thickness can generally be controlled. However, the layer thickness is sometimes determined by the characteristics of the TCM. For instance, the thickness of graphene when used as the TCM is largely the diameter of a carbon atom because graphene consists of a single layer of hexagonally arranged carbon atoms.
  • the transmissivity normally increases with increasing resistivity and vice versa. In particular, decreasing the TCM layer thickness (when controllable) typically causes the transmissivity and resistivity of the TCM layer to increase and vice versa.
  • the transmissivity and resistivity of a TCM layer often depend on how it is fabricated. All of the materials identified below as TCM candidates meet the preceding TCM transmissivity and resistivity criteria for at least one set of TCM manufacturing conditions. If the transmissivity is too low, the transmissivity can generally be increased at the cost of increasing the resistivity by appropriately adjusting the manufacturing conditions or/and reducing the TCM layer thickness (when controllable). If the resistivity is too high, the resistivity can generally be reduced at the cost of reducing the transmissivity by appropriately adjusting the manufacturing conditions or/and increasing the TCM layer thickness (when controllable).
  • TCM candidates are transparent conductive oxides generally classified as (i) n ⁇ type meaning that majority conduction is by electrons or (ii) p ⁇ type meaning that majority conduction is by holes.
  • TCO hereafter means transparent conductive oxide.
  • N ⁇ type TCOs are generally much more conductive than p ⁇ type TCOs.
  • the resistivities of n ⁇ type TCOs are often several factors of 10 below 1 ohm-cm at 300°K whereas the resistivities of p ⁇ type TCOs are commonly 1 - 10 ohm-cm at 300°K.
  • TCOs include undoped (essentially pure) metallic oxides and doped metallic oxides.
  • a dopant metal atom may replace a primary metal atom.
  • a dopant metal atom may be added to the undoped TCO.
  • the molar amount of dopant metal in a doped TCO is usually considerably less than the molar amount of primary metal in the TCO. If the molar amount of "dopant" metal approaches the molar amount of primary metal, the TCO is often described below as a mixture of oxides of the constituent metals. In some situations, a TCM candidate containing multiple metals is identified below both as a doped TCO and as a mixture of oxides of the metals.
  • TCM candidates are insulators or semiconductors in their pure stoichiometric formulations. Conductivity sufficiently high for those materials to be TCMs arises from defects in the materials or/and TCM formulations that are somewhat non-stoichiometric.
  • p ⁇ type (hole) conductivity sufficiently high to enable an undoped TCO to be a p ⁇ type TCM commonly arises when the molar amount of oxygen in the TCO is somewhat above the stoichiometric oxygen amount (oxygen excess) or, equivalently, the molar amount of metal in the TCO is somewhat below the stoichiometric metal amount.
  • Identification of a p ⁇ type TCO, doped or undoped, by its stoichiometric chemical name or/and its stoichiometric chemical formula similarly includes formulations in which the molar amount of oxygen in the TCO is somewhat above the stoichiometric amount.
  • Identification of such an n ⁇ type doped TCO by its stoichiometric chemical name or/and its stoichiometric chemical formula includes formulations in which the molar amount of oxygen in the TCO is somewhat above the stoichiometric amount.
  • the following conventions are employed in presenting TCM candidates. Alternative chemical names for some TCM candidates are presented in brackets after their IUPAC names.
  • the name of a TCM candidate consisting essentially of a mixture of two or more compounds is presented as the names of the compounds with a dash separating the names of each pair of constituent compounds.
  • the name of a TCM candidate containing dopant is presented as the name of the undoped compound followed by a colon and the name of the dopant.
  • TCM candidates are placed in sets having certain characteristics in common. In some situations, a TCM candidate has the characteristics for multiple TCM sets. The TCM candidate then generally appears in each appropriate TCM set.
  • the formula for a TCM candidate consisting of an indefinite number of repeating units is generally given as the repeating unit followed by the subscript "n", e.g., Cn for a carbon TCM.
  • n e.g., Cn for a carbon TCM.
  • each constituent's portion of the formula is generally given as that constituent's repeating unit followed by a subscript consisting of "n” and a sequentially increasing number beginning with "1", e.g. C n1 -(C 6 H 4 O 2 S) n2 for graphene-poly(3,4- ethyldioxythiophene).
  • Preferred TCM candidates are graphene-containing materials because they generally provide high transmissivity in the visible spectrum, relatively high conductivity, high shock resistance, and high mechanical strength.
  • graphene-containing TCM candidates include bilayer graphene C n , few-layer graphene C n , graphene foam C n , graphene-graphite C n1 ⁇ C n2 , graphene-carbon nanotubes C n1 ⁇ C n2 , few-layer graphene-carbon nanotubes Cn1 ⁇ Cn2, graphene-gold Cn ⁇ Au, few-layer graphene-gold Cn ⁇ Au, few-layer graphene-iron trichloride C n -FeCl 3 , graphene-diindium trioxide [graphene-indium oxide] C n -In 2 O 3 , graphene- poly(3,4-ethyldioxythiophene) Cn1
  • TCM candidates are carbon-nanotube-containing materials because they generally provide high transmissivity in the visible spectrum, relatively high conductivity, high shock resistance, and high mechanical strength.
  • carbon-nanotube-containing TCM candidates include carbon nanotubes-gold C n ⁇ Au and nitric acid-thionyl chloride-doped carbon nanotubes C n :HNO 3 -SOCl 2 (p ⁇ type) plus graphene-carbon nanotubes, few-layer graphene-carbon nanotubes, and graphene-doped carbon nanotubes also in the graphene-containing TCM candidates.
  • Certain organic materials including materials formed with both organic and non-organic constituents, can serve as the TCM. Although organic TCM candidates generally have considerably higher resistivities than graphene and carbon nanotubes, some transparent organic materials provide relatively high shock resistance and relatively high mechanical strength.
  • Organic TCM candidates of this type include poly(3,4- ethylenedioxythiophene) termed PEDOT, poly(3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene)-poly(styrenesulfonate) and methanol-doped poly(3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene)- , plus graphene- poly(3,4-ethyldioxythiophene), graphene-doped poly(3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene)-poly(styrenesulfonate), and tetracyanoquinodimethane-doped graphene also in the graphene-containing TCM candidates.
  • Each organic TCM candidate is a polymer or a polymer-containing material.
  • the preceding graphene-containing, carbon-nanotube-containing, and organic TCM candidates constitute sets of a larger set of carbon-containing TCM candidates.
  • the set of carbon-containing TCM candidates are part of an even larger set of transparent non-oxide TCM candidates that includes a set of halide-containing TCM candidates, a set of metal sulfide-containing TCM candidates, a set of metal nitride-containing TCM candidates, and a set of metal nanowire-containing TCM candidates.
  • halide-containing non-oxide TCM candidates include p ⁇ type copper-containing halides barium copper selenium fluoride BaCuSeF, barium copper tellurium fluoride BaCuTeF, and copper iodide CuI.
  • Metal sulfide-containing non-oxide TCM candidates include barium dicopper disulfide BaCu 2 S 2 (p ⁇ type), copper aluminum disulfide CuAlS 2 (p ⁇ type), and dopant-containing materials aluminum-doped zinc sulfide ZnS:Al and zinc-doped copper aluminum disulfide CuAlS 2 :Zn (p ⁇ type).
  • Metal nitride-containing non-oxide TCM candidates include gallium nitride GaN and titanium nitride TiN.
  • Metal nanowire-containing non-oxide TCM candidates include copper nanowires Cu, gold nanowires Au, and silver nanowires Ag plus graphene-silver nanowires also in the graphene-containing TCM candidates.
  • Undoped n ⁇ type TCO candidates for the TCM include cadmium oxide CdO, cadmium oxide- diindium trioxide [cadmium-indium oxide] CdO-In2O3, cadmium oxide-diindium trioxide-tin dioxide [cadmium- indium-tin oxide] CdO-In2O3-SnO2 [Cd ⁇ In ⁇ Sn ⁇ O], cadmium oxide-tin dioxide [cadmium-tin oxide] CdO-SnO2 [Cd ⁇ Sn ⁇ O], cadmium tin trioxide CdSnO 3 , dicobalt trioxide-nickel oxide [cobalt-nickel oxide] Co 2 O 3 -NiO, digallium trioxide [gallium oxide] Ga 2 O 3 , digallium trioxide-tin dioxide [gallium-tin oxide] Ga 2 O 3 -SnO 2 , diindium trioxide [indium oxide] In2
  • Undoped n ⁇ type TCO TCM candidates further include spinel-structured materials cadmium digallium tetroxide CdGa 2 O 4 , cadmium diindium tetroxide CdIn 2 O 4 , dicadmium tin tetroxide Cd2SnO4, dizinc tin tetroxide Zn2SnO4, magnesium diindium tetroxide MgIn2O4, and zinc digallium tetroxide ZnGa2O4.
  • spinel-structured materials cadmium digallium tetroxide CdGa 2 O 4 , cadmium diindium tetroxide CdIn 2 O 4 , dicadmium tin tetroxide Cd2SnO4, dizinc tin tetroxide Zn2SnO4, magnesium diindium tetroxide MgIn2O4, and zinc digallium tetroxide ZnGa2O4.
  • a first set of doped n ⁇ type TCO TCM candidates consists of zinc oxide singly doped with certain elements including aluminum, arsenic, boron, cadmium, chlorine, cobalt, copper, fluorine, gallium, germanium, hafnium, hydrogen, indium, iron, lithium, manganese, molybdenum, nickel, niobium, nitrogen, phosphorus, scandium, silicon, silver, tantalum, terbium, tin, titanium, tungsten, vanadium, yttrium, and zirconium.
  • a second set of doped n ⁇ type TCO TCM candidates consists of zinc oxide codoped with two or more of the preceding elements.
  • n ⁇ type dopant combinations for zinc oxide include aluminum-boron, aluminum-fluorine, aluminum-nitrogen, boron-fluorine, gallium-aluminum, indium-aluminum, indium-fluorine, scandium-aluminum, silver-nitrogen, titanium-aluminum, tungsten-hydrogen, tungsten-indium, tungsten-manganese, yttrium- aluminum, and zirconium-aluminum.
  • a third set of doped n ⁇ type TCO TCM candidates consists of tin dioxide singly doped with certain elements including aluminum, antimony, arsenic, boron, cadmium, chlorine, cobalt, copper, fluorine, gallium, indium, iron, lithium, manganese, molybdenum, niobium, silver, tantalum, tungsten, zinc, and zirconium. Most of the tin dioxide dopants are zinc oxide dopants.
  • a fourth set of doped n ⁇ type TCO TCM candidates consists of tin dioxide codoped with two or more of the preceding elements and hafnium. Specific n ⁇ type dopant combinations for tin dioxide include hafnium-antimony and indium-gallium.
  • a fifth set of doped n ⁇ type TCO TCM candidates consists of diindium trioxide singly doped with certain elements including fluorine, gallium, germanium, hafnium, iodine, magnesium, molybdenum, niobium, tantalum, tin, titanium, tungsten, zinc, and zirconium. Most of the indium oxide dopants are zinc oxide dopants.
  • a sixth set of doped n ⁇ type TCO TCM candidates consists of diindium trioxide codoped with two or more of the preceding elements and cadmium. Specific n ⁇ type dopant combinations for diindium trioxide include cadmium- tin, magnesium-tin, and zinc-tin.
  • a seventh set of doped n ⁇ type TCO TCM candidates consists of cadmium oxide singly doped with certain elements including aluminum, chromium, copper, fluorine, gadolinium, gallium, germanium, hydrogen, indium, iron, molybdenum, samarium, scandium, tin, titanium, yttrium, and zinc. Most of the cadmium oxide dopants are zinc oxide dopants.
  • An eighth set of doped n ⁇ type TCO TCM candidates consists of indium gallium trioxide singly doped with certain elements including germanium and tin.
  • a ninth set of doped n ⁇ type TCO TCM candidates consists of barium tin trioxide BaSnO 3 singly doped with certain elements including antimony and lanthanum.
  • a tenth set of doped n ⁇ type TCO TCM candidates consists of strontium tin trioxide SrTiO 3 singly doped with certain elements including antimony, lanthanum, and niobium.
  • An eleventh set of doped n ⁇ type TCO TCM candidates consists of titanium dioxide TiO 2 singly doped with certain elements including cobalt, niobium, and tantalum.
  • a twelfth set of doped n ⁇ type TCO TCM candidates consists of zinc oxide-diindium trioxide singly doped with certain elements including aluminum, gallium, germanium, and tin.
  • a thirteenth set of doped n ⁇ type TCO TCM candidates consists of zinc oxide-magnesium oxide singly doped with certain elements including aluminum, gallium, indium, and nitrogen.
  • n ⁇ type TCO TCM candidates include antimony-doped strontium tin trioxide SrSnO 3 :Sb, bismuth-doped lead dioxide PbO 2 :Bi, niobium-doped calcium titanium trioxide CaTiO 3 :Nb, tin-doped iron copper dioxide FeCuO 2 :Sn, yttrium-doped cadmium diantimony hexoxide CdSb 2 O 6 :Y, gadolinium-cerium-doped cadmium oxide CdO:Gd ⁇ Ce, neodymium-niobium-doped strontium titanium trioxide SrTiO 3 :Nd ⁇ Nb, and hydrogen-doped ultraviolet-irradiated dodecacalcium heptaluminum tritricontoxide
  • Undoped p ⁇ type TCO candidates for the TCM include disilver oxide Ag2O, iridium dioxide, lanthanum copper selenium oxide LaCuSeO, nickel oxide NiO, ruthenium dioxide, silver oxide AgO, tristrontium discandium dicopper disulfur pentoxide [dicopper disulfide-tristrontium discandium pentoxide] Sr3Sc2Cu2S2O5 [Cu 2 S 2 -Sr 3 Sc 2 O 5 ], dicobalt trioxide-nickel oxide, digallium trioxide-tin dioxide, zinc oxide-beryllium oxide ZnO- BeO, and zinc oxide-magnesium oxide, some of which are undoped n ⁇ type TCO TCM candidates.
  • Undoped p ⁇ type TCO TCM candidates include certain copper-containing and silver-containing delafossite-structured materials having the general formula MaMbO3 where the valence of metal Ma is +1 and the valence of metal Mb is +3, Ma appearing after Mb when Ma is more electronegative than Mb.
  • the undoped copper-containing delafossite-structured materials include chromium copper dioxide CrCuO 2 , cobalt copper dioxide CoCuO2, copper aluminum dioxide CuAlO2, copper boron dioxide CuBO2, copper gallium dioxide CuGaO2, copper indium dioxide CuInO2, iron copper dioxide FeCuO2, scandium copper dioxide ScCuO2, and yttrium copper dioxide YCuO2.
  • the undoped silver-containing delafossite-structured materials include cobalt silver dioxide CoAgO 2 , scandium silver dioxide ScAgO 2 , silver aluminum dioxide AgAlO 2 , and silver gallium dioxide AgGaO2.
  • Other undoped p ⁇ type TCO TCM candidates include certain copper-containing dumbbell- octahedral-structured materials having the general formula McCu 2 O 2 where the valence of metal Mc is +2.
  • the undoped copper-containing dumbbell-octahedral-structured materials include barium dicopper dioxide BaCu2O2, calcium dicopper dioxide CaCu2O2, magnesium dicopper dioxide MgCu2O2, and strontium dicopper dioxide SrCu 2 O 2 .
  • a first set of doped p ⁇ type TCO TCM candidates consists of zinc oxide singly doped with certain elements including antimony, arsenic, bismuth, carbon, cobalt, copper, indium, lithium, manganese, nitrogen, phosphorus, potassium, sodium, and silver.
  • a second set of doped p ⁇ type TCO TCM candidates consists of zinc oxide codoped with two or more of the preceding elements and aluminum, boron, copper, gallium, tantalum, and zirconium.
  • Specific p ⁇ type dopant combinations for zinc oxide include aluminum-arsenic, copper-aluminum, and nitrogen-containing dopant combinations aluminum-nitrogen, boron-nitrogen, gallium-nitrogen, indium- nitrogen, lithium-nitrogen, silver-nitrogen, tantalum-nitrogen, and zirconium-nitrogen.
  • a third set of doped p ⁇ type TCO TCM candidates consists of tin dioxide singly doped with certain elements including antimony, cobalt, gallium, indium, lithium, and zinc.
  • a fourth set of doped p ⁇ type TCO TCM candidates consists of diindium trioxide singly doped with certain elements including silver and zinc.
  • a fifth set of doped p ⁇ type TCO TCM candidates consists of nickel oxide singly doped with certain elements including copper and lithium.
  • a sixth set of doped p ⁇ type TCO TCM candidates consists of zinc oxide-magnesium oxide singly doped with certain elements including nitrogen and potassium.
  • Doped p ⁇ type TCO TCM candidates additionally include aluminum-nitrogen-doped zinc oxide-magnesium oxide ZnO-MgO:Al ⁇ N, indium-doped molybdenum trioxide MoO 3 :In, indium-gallium-doped tin dioxide SnO 2 :In ⁇ Ga, magnesium-doped lanthanum copper selenium oxide LaCuSeO:Mg, magnesium-nitrogen-doped dichromium trioxide [magnesium-nitrogen-doped chromium oxide] Cr 2 O 3 :Mg ⁇ N, silver-doped dicopper oxide Cu 2 O:Ag, and tin-doped diantimony tetroxide Sb 2 O 4 :Sn.
  • Some of the doped p ⁇ type TCO TCM candidates are doped n
  • Doped p ⁇ type TCO TCM candidates further include certain copper-containing delafossite-structured materials having the general formula CuMbO2:Md where the valence of metal Mb is +3, Cu appearing after Mb when Cu is more electronegative than Mb, and Md is a dopant, usually a metal.
  • Doped copper-containing delafossite-structured materials include calcium-doped copper indium dioxide CuInO 2 :Ca, calcium-doped yttrium copper dioxide YCuO2:Ca, iron-doped copper gallium dioxide CuGaO2:Fe, magnesium-doped chromium copper dioxide CrCuO2:Mg, magnesium-doped copper aluminum dioxide CuAlO2:Mg, magnesium-doped iron copper dioxide FeCuO 2 :Mg, magnesium-doped scandium copper dioxide ScCuO 2 :Mg, oxygen-doped scandium copper dioxide ScCuO2:O, and tin-antimony-doped nickel copper dioxide NiCuO2:Sn ⁇ Sb.
  • doped p ⁇ type TCO TCM candidates include certain copper-containing dumbbell-octahedral-structured materials McCu2O2 where the valence of metal Mc is +2.
  • Doped copper-containing dumbbell-octahedral-structured materials include barium- doped strontium dicopper dioxide SrCu2O2:Ba, calcium-doped strontium dicopper dioxide SrCu2O2:Ca, and potassium-doped strontium dicopper dioxide SrCu 2 O 2 :K.
  • CC component 184 in OI structure 200 can be embodied in various ways.
  • Four general embodiments of component 184 are based on changes in light reflection including light scattering. These four embodiments are termed the mid-reflection, mixed-reflection RT, mixed-reflection RN, and deep-reflection embodiments. None of these embodiments usually employs significant light emission.
  • Substructure-reflected ARsb or XRsb light is absent.
  • IS segment 192 reflects ARis light during the changed state if IS component 182 reflects ARis light during the normal state.
  • XRna and XRne light respectively reflected by NA segment 214 and NE segment 234 during the changed state are respectively the same as ARna and ARne light respectively reflected by NA layer 204 and NE structure 224 during the normal state.
  • XRna and/or XRne light are to be respectively substituted for ARna and/or ARne light in the following material describing the changed-state operation.
  • Some reflected light invariably leaves VC region 106 during the normal state and IDVC portion 138 during the changed state.
  • the mid-reflection embodiment utilizes normal ARab light reflection and temporary XRab light reflection or, more specifically, normal ARne/ARcl/ARfe light reflection and temporary ARne/XRcl/XRfe light reflection respectively due mostly to ARcl/ARfe light reflection and XRcl/XRfe light reflection.
  • FA layer 206 if present, is usually not involved in color changing in the mid-reflection embodiment. There is largely no ARfa or XRfa light, and thus largely no total ATfa or XTfa light, here.
  • Core layer 222 normally reflects ARcl light or/and FE structure 226 normally reflects ARfe light that passes through layer 222.
  • ARcl or ARfe light usually ARcl light, is a majority component of A light.
  • Total ATcl light consists mostly, usually nearly entirely, of normally reflected ARcl light and any normally reflected ARfe light passing through layer 222, typically mostly ARcl light, and is a majority component of A light.
  • Total ATab light consists mostly, usually nearly entirely, of ARab light formed with ARcl light passing through NE structure 224, any ARne light reflected by it, and any ARfe light passing through it, likewise typically mostly ARcl light, and is also a majority component of A light.
  • Total ATcc light consists mostly, usually nearly entirely, of ARcl light passing through NA layer 204, any ARna light reflected by it, and any ARne and ARfe light passing through it, again typically mostly ARcl light. Including any ARis light reflected by IS component 182, A light is formed with ARcl light and any ARis, ARna, ARne, and ARfe light normally leaving component 182 and thus VC region 106.
  • core segment 232 responds to the general CC control signal applied between at least oppositely situated parts of electrode segments 234 and 236 by temporarily reflecting XRcl light or/and allowing XRfe light temporarily reflected by FE segment 236 to pass through core segment 232.
  • XRcl or XRfe light usually XRcl light, is a majority component of X light.
  • Total XTcl light consists mostly, usually nearly entirely, of temporarily reflected XRcl light and any temporarily reflected XRfe light passing through segment 232, typically mostly XRcl light, and is a majority component of X light.
  • Total XTab light consists mostly, usually nearly entirely, of XRab light formed with XRcl light passing through NE segment 234, any ARne light reflected by it, and any XRfe light passing through it, likewise typically mostly XRcl light, and is also a majority component of X light.
  • Total XTcc light consists mostly, usually nearly entirely, of XRcl light passing through NA segment 214, any ARna light reflected by it, and any ARne and XRfe light passing through it, again typically mostly XRcl light. Including any ARis light reflected by IS segment 192, X light is formed with XRcl light and any ARis, ARna, ARne, and XRfe light temporarily leaving segment 192 and thus IDVC portion 138.
  • Assembly 202 in the mid-reflection embodiment of CC component 184 may be embodied with one or more of the following light-processing arrangements: a dipolar suspension arrangement, an electrochromic arrangement, an electrofluidic arrangement, an electrophoretic arrangement (including an electroosmotic arrangement), an electrowetting arrangement, and a photonic crystal arrangement.
  • One implementation of the mid-reflection embodiment employs translation (movement) or/and rotation of a multiplicity (or set) of particles dispersed, usually laterally uniformly, in a supporting medium in core layer 222 for changing the reflection characteristics of core segment 232.
  • the particles often titanium dioxide, are normally distributed or/and oriented in the medium so as to cause layer 222 to normally reflect ARcl light such that total ATcl light formed with the ARcl light and any FE-structure-reflected ARfe light passing through layer 222 is at least a majority component of A light.
  • Segment 232 contains a submultiplicity (or subset) of the particles.
  • the particles in segment 232 translate or/and rotate for enabling it to temporarily reflect XRcl light such that total XTcl light formed with the XRcl light and any FE-segment- reflected XRfe light passing through segment 232 is at least a majority component of X light.
  • ARcl and XRcl light are usually respective majority components of A and X light.
  • the particles are charged particles of largely one color while the supporting medium is a fluid of largely another color.
  • the fluid is typically of a color ARclm quite close to normal reflected core color ARcl and having a majority component of wavelength suitable for color A.
  • the fluid reflects ARclm light while absorbing or/and transmitting, preferably absorbing, other light.
  • the particles are largely of a color XRclm quite close to temporary reflected core color XRcl and having a majority component of wavelength suitable for color X. The particles thereby reflect XRclm light.
  • Color XRclm usually lighter than color ARclm here, differs materially from color ARclm.
  • Setting control voltage Vnf at normal value VnfN laterally along core layer 222 causes the particles to be averagely, i.e., on the average, remote from (materially spaced apart from) NE structure 224.
  • the particles are normally dispersed throughout the fluid or situated adjacent to (close to or adjoining) FE structure 226. Because the XRclm-colored particles are normally averagely remote from NE structure 224 and because the ARclm-colored fluid absorbs or/and transmits light other than ARclm light, the large majority of both reflected ARcl light and total ATcl light, formed with ARcl light and any ARfe light, leaving layer 222 is provided by reflection of ARclm light off the fluid. ATcl light leaving layer 222 is largely ARclm light.
  • the particle charging and the V nfC polarity are chosen such that the particles in core segment 232 translate so as to be adjacent to NE segment 234 when voltage Vnf along core segment 232 goes to changed value VnfC.
  • the large majority of both reflected XRcl light and total XTcl light, formed with XRcl light and any XRfe light, leaving segment 232 is now provided by reflection of XRclm light off the particles in segment 232.
  • XTcl light leaving segment 232 is largely XRclm light. Since color XRclm differs materially from color ARclm, temporary reflected core color XRcl differs materially from normal reflected core color ARcl. The same result is achieved by reversing both the particle charging and the VnfC polarity.
  • the fluid can alternatively be of color XRclm. If so, the fluid reflects XRclm light and absorbs or/and transmits, preferably absorbs, other light.
  • the particles are of color ARclm usually now lighter than color XRclm, and either the particle charging or the V nfC polarity is reversed from that just described.
  • the ARclm-colored particles are normally adjacent to NE structure 224. The large majority of both reflected ARcl light and total ATcl light is provided by reflection of ARclm light off the particles. ATcl light leaving core layer 222 is again largely ARclm light.
  • V nf in core segment 232 Changing voltage V nf in core segment 232 to value V nfC causes the particles in segment 232 to translate materially away from NE segment 234 so as to be dispersed throughout the segment of the fluid in core segment 232 or situated adjacent to FE segment 236. Because the particles in core segment 232 are now averagely remote from NE segment 234 and because the XRclm-colored fluid absorbs non-XRclm light, the large majority of both reflected XRcl light and total XTcl light is provided by reflection of XRclm light off the fluid in core segment 232. XTcl light leaving segment 232 is again largely XRclm light.
  • the particles in another version of the particle translation or/and rotation implementation consist of two groups of particles of different colors.
  • the supporting medium is a transparent fluid, typically a liquid.
  • the particles in one group are typically largely of color ARclm while the particles in the other group are largely of color XRclm.
  • the particles have characteristics which enable the ARclm-colored particles to translate oppositely to the XRclm-colored particles in the presence of an electric field.
  • the particles can be charged so that the XRclm-colored particles are charged oppositely to the ARclm-colored particles.
  • the charge on each XRclm- colored particle can be of the same magnitude as, or a different magnitude than, the charge on each ARclm- colored particle.
  • V nfN polarity and particle characteristics are chosen such that setting voltage Vnf at normal value VnfN laterally along core layer 222 causes the ARclm-colored particles to be adjacent to NE structure 224 while the XRclm-colored particles are averagely remote from structure 224.
  • the large majority of both reflected ARcl light and total ATcl light is normally provided by reflection of ARclm light off the ARclm-colored particles.
  • ATcl light leaving layer 222 is largely ARclm light.
  • the ARclm light reflected by the ARclm-colored particles can be specularly reflected, scattered, or a combination of specularly reflected and scattered.
  • the radiosity of the reflected ARclm or XRclm light can be very low such that color ARclm or XRclm is quite dark, sometimes nearly black. If so, the ARclm-colored or XRclm-colored particles absorb the large majority of incident light.
  • the particles in one group are of color ARclm while the particles in the other group are of a color F1Rc significantly different from colors ARcl and XRcl.
  • the F1Rc-colored particles reflect F1Rc light considerably different from ARcl and XRcl light.
  • the particles have characteristics enabling the ARclm-colored particles to remain adjacent to NE structure 224 in the presence of an electric field that changes polarity while the F1Rc-colored particles translate, to the extent possible, toward or away from structure 224 depending on the field polarity.
  • the F1Rc particles can be charged while the ARclm-colored particles are largely uncharged but have physical properties attracting them to structure 224.
  • VnfN polarity and particle characteristics are chosen such that setting voltage Vnf at normal value V nfN laterally across core layer 222 causes the ARclm-colored particles to be adjacent to NE structure 224 while the F1Rc-colored particles are averagely remote from structure 224.
  • the large majority of both reflected ARcl light and total ATcl light is provided by reflection of ARclm light off the ARclm-colored particles.
  • ATcl light leaving layer 222 is again largely ARclm light.
  • VnfN polarity and particle characteristics are chosen such that setting voltage Vnf at normal value VnfN laterally across core layer 222 causes the ARclm-colored particles to be adjacent to NE structure 224 while the F1Rc-colored particles are averagely remote from structure 224.
  • the large majority of both reflected ARcl light and total ATcl light is provided by reflection of ARclm light off the ARclm-colored particles.
  • ATcl light leaving layer 222 is again largely ARclm light.
  • the particles in one group are of color XRclm while the particles in the other group are of a color G1Rc significantly different from colors ARcl and XRcl.
  • the G1Rc-colored particles reflect G1Rc light considerably different from ARcl and XRcl light.
  • the particles have characteristics enabling the XRclm-colored particles to remain adjacent to NE structure 224 in the presence of an electric field that changes polarity while the G1Rc-colored particles translate, to the extent possible, toward or away from structure 224 depending on the field polarity.
  • the G1Rc-colored particles can be charged while the XRclm- colored particles are largely uncharged but have physical properties attracting them to structure 224.
  • V nfN polarity and particle characteristics are chosen such that setting voltage V nf at normal value V nfN laterally across core layer 222 causes both the XRclm-colored and G1Rc-colored particles to be adjacent to NE structure 224.
  • the large majority of both reflected ARcl light and total ATcl light is then normally provided by reflection of G1Rc and XRclm light off both the G1Rc-colored and XRclm-colored particles.
  • ATcl light leaving layer 222 consists of a G1Rc and XRclm light.
  • the ATcl combination of G1Rc and XRclm light is chosen to differ materially from XRcl light and, in particular, to have a majority component suitable for color A.
  • the surface of each particle consists of two portions of different colors.
  • the particles are optically and electrically anisotropic.
  • the optical anisotropicity is achieved by arranging for the outer surface of each particle to consist of one SF portion of color ARclm and another SF portion of color XRclm.
  • the two SF portions are usually of approximately the same area.
  • the particles can be generally spherical with the two SF portions of each particle being hemispherical surfaces.
  • the electrical anisotropicity is achieved by providing the two SF portions of each particle with different zeta potentials.
  • Each particle is usually a dipole with one SF portion negatively charged and the other positively charged.
  • the supporting medium is a solid transparent sheet having cavities in which the particles are respectively located. Each cavity is slightly larger than its particle. The part of each cavity outside its particle is filled with transparent dielectric fluid for enabling each particle to rotate freely in its cavity.
  • Voltage values VnfN and VnfC are chosen so that one is positive and the other is negative. If value V nfN is positive, the ARclm-colored SF portions are negatively charged while the XRclm-colored SF portions are positively charged. The opposite surface-portion charging is used if value V nfN is positive. Either way, setting voltage Vnf at normal value VnfN causes the particles to rotate so that their ARclm-colored SF portions face NE structure 224. The large majority of both reflected ARcl light and total ATcl light is provided by reflection of ARclm light off the ARclm-colored SF portions of the particles. ATcl light leaving core layer 222 is largely ARclm light.
  • the particles in the remainder of core layer 222 largely maintain the particle orientations or/and average locations existent during the normal state.
  • the large majority of both reflected light and total light leaving the remainder of layer 222 consists of reflected ARclm light or, in the last-mentioned example of the version using two groups of particles of different colors, a reflected combination of XRclm and G1Rc light identical to that normally present and thereby forming ARcl light.
  • CC component 184 Another implementation of the mid-reflection embodiment of CC component 184 entails changing the absorption characteristics of particles dispersed, usually uniformly, in a supporting medium usually a fluid such as a liquid in which the particles are suspended.
  • the particles normally absorb much, usually most, of the light striking SF zone 112 so that ATcl light normally leaves layer 222.
  • the particles in core segment 232 respond to the general CC control signal by scattering much, usually most, of the light striking print area 118. This causes XTcl light, including XRcl light, to temporarily leave segment 232.
  • the particles in layer 222 normally scatter much, usually most, of the light striking zone 112 so that ATcl light, including ARcl light, normally leaves layer 222.
  • the particles in segment 232 respond to the control signal by absorbing much, usually most, of the light striking area 118 for causing XTcl light to temporarily leave segment 232.
  • the particles in core layer 222 in another version of the absorption-characteristics-changing implementation are elongated dichroic particles normally at largely random orientations with largely no electric field existing across layer 222.
  • the particles in layer 222 normally absorb much, usually most, of the light striking SF zone 112 so that ATcl light normally leaves layer 222.
  • the particles in core segment 232 align generally with an electric field produced across segment 232.
  • Much, usually most, of the light striking print area 118 is transmitted through segment 232 for causing XTcl light, including reflected XRfe light, to temporarily leave segment 232.
  • an electric field normally exists across all of layer 222.
  • the particles in layer 222 align with the electric field for enabling much, usually most, of the light striking zone 112 to be transmitted through layer 222 so that ATcl light, including reflected ARfe light, normally leaves layer 222.
  • ATcl light including reflected ARfe light
  • the particles in segment 232 become largely randomly oriented for absorbing much, usually most, of the light striking area 118.
  • XTcl light temporarily leaves segment 232.
  • Core layer 222 in a further implementation, an example being an electrowetting or electrofluidic arrangement, of the mid-reflection embodiment of CC component 184 employs a liquid whose shape is suitably manipulated to change the layer's reflection characteristics.
  • the liquid is in a first shape for causing layer 222 to reflect ARcl light such that ATcl light formed with the ARcl light and any FE-structure-reflected ARfe light passing through layer 222 is a majority component of A light.
  • the liquid in core segment 232 temporarily changes to a second shape materially different from the first shape in segment 232 for causing it to reflect XRcl light such that total XTcl light formed with XRcl light and any FE-segment- reflected XRfe light passes through segment 232 and is a majority component of X light.
  • Exemplary shapes for the liquid are described in U.S. Patents 6,917,456 B2, 7,463,398 B2, and 7,508,566 B2, contents incorporated by reference herein.
  • Three major versions of the liquid shape-changing implementation entail arranging for (a) ARcl light to be a majority component of A light with XRcl light being a majority component of X light, (b) ARcl light to be a majority component of A light with XRfe light being a majority component of X light, and (c) ARfe light to be a majority component of A light with XRcl light being a majority component of X light.
  • each mixed-reflection embodiment utilizes FA layer 206 for reflecting light in achieving color changing.
  • Light striking core layer 222 along NE structure 224 passes through layer 222 to FE structure 226 at selected thickness locations along layer 222 at certain times and is blocked, i.e., reflected or/and absorbed, by layer 222 at other times.
  • Light passing through selected thickness locations of layer 222 then passes through corresponding thickness locations of structure 226 and undergoes substantial reflection at corresponding thickness locations of FA layer 206.
  • Assembly 202 functions as a light valve.
  • the difference between the mixed-reflection embodiments is that FA layer 206 reflects light only during the changed state in the mixed-reflection RT embodiment and only in the normal state in the mixed- reflection RN embodiment.
  • the mixed-reflection RT embodiment employs normal ARab light reflection and temporary XRab/XRfa light reflection or, more specifically, normal ARne/ARcl/ARfe light reflection and temporary
  • the mixed-reflection RT embodiment operates the same as the mid- reflection embodiment.
  • Core segment 232 in the mixed-reflection RT embodiment responds to the general CC control signal applied between at least oppositely situated parts of electrode segments 234 and 236 during the changed state by allowing a substantial part of light striking print area 118 and passing through IS segment 192, NA segment 214, and NE segment 234 to temporarily pass through core segment 232 such that a substantial part of that light passes through FE segment 236.
  • FA segment 216 temporarily reflects XRfa light, a majority component of X light. Total XTfa light consists mostly, preferably only, of temporarily reflected XRfa light.
  • Total XTcl light consists of XRfa light passing through segment 232, any XRcl light reflected by it, and any FE-segment-reflected XRfe light passing through it, mostly reflected XRfa light.
  • Total XTab light consists of XRfa light passing through NE segment 234 and any XRab light formed with any ARne light reflected by segment 234 and any XRcl and XRfe light passing through it, likewise mostly XRfa light.
  • Total XTcc light consists of XRfa light passing through NA segment 214, any ARna light reflected by it, and any ARne, XRcl, and XRfe light passing through it, again mostly XRfa light. Including any ARis light reflected by IS segment 192, X light is formed with XRfa light and any ARis, ARna, ARne, XRcl, and XRfe light temporarily leaving segment 192 and thus IDVC portion 138.
  • the mixed-reflection RN embodiment employs normal ARab/ARfa light reflection and temporary XRab light reflection or, more specifically, normal ARne/ARcl/ARfe/ARfa light reflection and temporary
  • ARne/XRcl/XRfe light reflection respectively due mostly to ARfa light reflection and XRcl/XRfe light reflection.
  • core layer 222 allows light striking SF zone 112 and passing through IS component 182, NA layer 204, and NE structure 224 to normally pass through core layer 222 such that a substantial part of that light normally passes through FE structure 226.
  • FA layer 206 reflects ARfa light, a majority component of A light. Total ATfa light consists mostly, preferably only, of normally reflected ARfa light.
  • Total ATcl light consists of ARfa light passing through layer 222, any ARcl light reflected by it, and any FE-structure-reflected ARfe light passing through it, mostly reflected ARfa light.
  • Total ATab light consists of ARfa light passing through NE structure 224 and any ARab light formed with any ARne light reflected by structure 224 and any ARcl and ARfe light passing through it, likewise mostly ARfa light.
  • Total ATcc light consists of ARfa light passing through NA layer 204, any ARna light reflected by it, and any ARne, ARcl, and ARfe light passing through it, again mostly ARfa light. Including any ARis light reflected by IS component 182, A light is formed with ARfa light and any ARis, ARna, ARne, ARcl, and ARfe light normally leaving component 182 and thus VC region 106.
  • Core segment 232 in the mixed-reflection RN embodiment responds to the general CC control signal the same as in the mid-reflection embodiment. Accordingly, the mixed-reflection RN embodiment operates the same in the changed state as the mid-reflection embodiment.
  • core layer 222 contains core particles distributed laterally across the layer's extent and switchable between light-transmissive and light- blocking states.
  • NA layer 204 may be present or absent.
  • FA layer 206 contains a light reflector extending along, and generally parallel to, FE structure 226. The light reflector may be a specular (mirror-like) reflector or a diffuse reflector that reflectively scatters light.
  • the core particles are usually dimensionally anisotropic, each particle typically shaped generally like a rod or a sheet.
  • a rod-shaped core particle having (a) a maximum dimension, termed the long dimension, (b) a shorter dimension which reaches a maximum value, termed the first short dimension, in a plane perpendicular to the long dimension, and (c) another shorter dimension which extends perpendicular to the other two dimensions and which reaches a maximum value, termed the second short dimension, no greater than the first short dimension, the long dimension is at least twice, preferably at least four times, more preferably at least eight times, the first short dimension.
  • the first long dimension is at least twice, preferably at least four times, more preferably at least eight times, the short dimension.
  • the core particles in core layer 222 in the mixed-reflection RT version are normally oriented largely randomly relative to electrode structures 224 and 226. This enables the core particles in layer 222 to absorb or/and scatter light striking it along NE structure 224. Either way, light striking SF zone 112 and passing through IS component 182 and NA layer 204 so as to strike core layer 222 along structure 224 is normally blocked from passing through layer 222.
  • Total ATcl light leaving layer 222 consists of any ARcl light reflected by it and any FE-structure-reflected ARfe light passing through it.
  • This orientation enables light striking print area 118 and passing through IS segment 192 and NA segment 214 so as to strike core segment 232 along NE segment 234 to be temporarily transmitted through core segment 232 and reflected by the segment of the light reflector in FA segment 216.
  • the temporarily reflected XRfa light passes in substantial part back through core segment 232.
  • Total XTcl light leaving segment 232 consists of XRfa light passing through it, any XRcl light reflected by it, and any FE-segment-reflected XRfe light passing through it.
  • the core particles present in core layer 222 are normally oriented generally perpendicular to electrode structures 224 and 226. Specifically, the long dimension of a rod-shaped core particle extends generally perpendicular to structures 224 and 226 while one of the long dimensions of a sheet-shaped core particle extends generally perpendicular to structures 224 and 226 so that the general plane of the sheet-shaped particle is perpendicular to structures 224 and 226.
  • Light striking SF zone 112 and passing through IS component 182 and NA layer 204 so as to strike core layer 222 along NE structure 224 is transmitted through layer 222 and reflected by the light reflector.
  • Total ATcl light leaving layer 222 consists of ARfa light passing through it, any ARcl light reflected by it, and any FE-structure-reflected ARfe light passing through it.
  • Core layer 222 consists of liquid-crystal material formed with elongated liquid-crystal molecules that constitute the core particles in another version of the mixed-reflection RT or RN embodiment of CC component 184 where it is a reflective liquid-crystal arrangement, usually polarizer-free.
  • LC hereafter means liquid-crystal.
  • the LC molecules which switch between light-transmissive and light-scattering states, can employ various LC phases such as nematic, smectic, and chiral.
  • the LC material typically has no pre-established twist.
  • the surfaces of electrode structures 224 and 226 along layer 222 are preferably flat rather than grooved.
  • the reflected XRfa or ARfa light in each LC version of the mixed-reflection RT or RN embodiment usually appears along NE structure 224 as a dark color but, depending on the constituency of core layer 222, can appear along structure 224 as a light color.
  • the dark color can be largely black.
  • the scattered ARcl or XRcl light usually appears along NE structure 224 as a light color but, likewise depending on the constituency of layer 222, can appear along structure 224 as a dark color.
  • the light color can be white or largely white.
  • core layer 222 is formed with a fluid, typically a liquid, in which dipolar particles constituting the core particles are colloidally suspended.
  • the dipolar particles usually dichroic, can be elongated rod-like particles or flat sheet-like particles. Each dipole particle has a positively charged end and a negatively charged end. Voltage Vnf across opposite segments of electrode structures 224 and 226 is usually largely zero when the intervening dipole particles are randomly oriented so as to scatter or/and absorb light striking them.
  • Adjusting voltage Vnf across opposite segments of structures 224 and 226 to a non-zero value causes the intervening dipole particles to align generally perpendicular to those two electrode segments with the positively charged end of each intervening dipolar particle closest to the more negative one of the electrode segments and vice versa.
  • the scattered ARcl or XRcl light in each mixed-reflection version can appear along NE structure 224 as a light color, or as a dark color, if the dipolar particles across layer 222 or in segment 232 scatter incident light due to being randomly oriented relative to structures 224 and 226.
  • the reflected XRfa or ARfa light correspondingly appears along NE structure 224 as a dark color, or as a light color, depending on the characteristics of the light reflector.
  • the deep-reflection embodiment of CC component 184 employs normal ARab/ARfa light reflection and temporary XRab/XRfa light reflection or, more specifically, normal ARne/ARcl/ARfe/ARfa light reflection and temporary ARne/XRcl/XRfe/XRfa light reflection respectively due mostly to ARfa light reflection and XRfa light reflection.
  • Light striking SF zone 112 passes through IS component 182, NA layer 204, NE structure 224, core layer 222, and FE structure 226, is reflected by FA layer 206, and then passes back through subcomponents 226, 222, 224, and 182.
  • Core layer 222 and auxiliary layers 204 and 206 usually impose certain traits, e.g., wavelength-independent traits such as polarization traits, on the light. "WI" hereafter means wavelength- independent.
  • NA layer 204 typically imposes a WI NA incoming trait on light normally passing from IS component 182 through layer 204 so that the light has the NA incoming trait upon reaching core layer 222, "NA" again meaning near auxiliary.
  • Layer 222 imposes a WI primary incoming trait on light normally passing from NE structure 224 through layer 222 so that the light has the primary incoming trait upon reaching FA layer 206.
  • the primary incoming trait usually differs materially from the NA incoming trait.
  • FA layer 206 normally reflects ARfa light, a majority component of A light, so that total ATfa light consists mostly, preferably only, of normally reflected ARfa light.
  • layer 206 typically imposes a WI FA trait on ARfa light leaving layer 206 along FE structure 226, "FA" again meaning far auxiliary.
  • the FA trait is usually applied to light just before and after reflection by layer 206.
  • the FA trait can be the same as, or significantly different from, the NA incoming trait.
  • the ARfa light passes in substantial part through FE structure 226.
  • Total ATfe light consists of ARfa light passing through structure 226 and any ARfe light reflected by it, mostly ARfa light having the FA trait.
  • the ATfe light passes in substantial part through core layer 222 and NE structure 224.
  • layer 222 imposes a WI primary outgoing trait on ATfe light passing from FE structure 226 through layer 222 so that the ATfe light has the primary outgoing trait upon reaching NA layer 204.
  • the primary outgoing and incoming traits are usually the same.
  • Total ATcl light consists of ARfa light passing through core layer 222, any ARcl light reflected by it, and any ARfe light passing through it, mostly ARfa light having the primary outgoing trait.
  • the ATcl light passes in substantial part through NE structure 224.
  • Total ATab light consists of ARfa light passing through structure 224 and any ARab light formed with any ARne light reflected by structure 224 and any ARcl and ARfe light passing through it, likewise mostly ARfa light.
  • the ATab light passes in substantial part through NA layer 204 and IS component 182. If the NA incoming trait is imposed on light passing from component 182 through layer 204, layer 204 usually imposes a WI NA outgoing trait on ATab light passing from NE structure 224 through layer 204 so that ATab light has the NA outgoing trait upon reaching component 182.
  • the NA outgoing and incoming traits are usually the same.
  • Total ATcc light consists of ARfa light passing through layer 204, any ARna light reflected by it, and any ARne, ARcl, and ARfe light passing through it, again mostly ARfa light. Including any ARis light normally reflected by component 182, A light is formed with ARfa light and any ARis, ARna, ARne, ARcl, and ARfe light normally leaving component 182 and thus VC region 106.
  • Core segment 232 in the deep-reflection embodiment responds to the general CC control signal applied between at least oppositely situated parts of electrode segments 234 and 236 by causing light passing from NE segment 234 through core segment 232 to be temporarily of a WI changed incoming trait such that the light has the changed incoming trait upon reaching FA segment 216. More particularly, if NA layer 204 imposes the NA incoming trait on light normally passing from IS component 182 through layer 204, NA segment 214 imposes the NA incoming trait on light passing from IS segment 192 through segment 214 so that the light has the NA incoming trait upon reaching core segment 232. Segment 232 then imposes the changed incoming trait on light temporarily passing from NE segment 234 through segment 232 so that the light has the changed incoming trait upon reaching FA segment 216. The changed incoming trait differs materially from the primary incoming trait.
  • FA segment 216 temporarily reflects XRfa light, a majority component of X light, so that total XTfa light consists mostly, preferably only, of temporarily reflected XRfa light.
  • the material difference between them is chosen to cause color XRfa to differ materially from color ARfa. More specifically, colors ARfa and XRfa usually have the same wavelength characteristics but differ materially in radiosity so as to differ materially in lightness/darkness and therefore materially in color.
  • Core segment 232 and AB segment 212 function as a light valve in producing the color difference.
  • FA segment 216 In the course of reflecting XRfa light, FA segment 216 imposes the FA trait on XRfa light leaving it along FE segment 236 if FA layer 206 imposes the FA trait on ARfa light leaving layer 206 along FE structure 226.
  • the FA trait is usually applied to light just before and after reflection by FA segment 216.
  • the XRfa light passes in substantial part through FE segment 236.
  • Total XTfe light consists of XRfa light passing through segment 236 and any XRfe light reflected by it, mostly XRfa light having the FA trait.
  • the XTfe light passes in substantial part through core segment 232.
  • segment 232 In transmitting XTfe light, segment 232 imposes a WI changed outgoing trait on XTfe light passing from FE segment 236 through segment 232 so that the XTfe light has the changed outgoing trait upon reaching NA segment 214.
  • the changed outgoing trait usually the same as the changed incoming trait, differs materially from the primary incoming and outgoing traits.
  • Total XTcl light consists of XRfa light passing through core segment 232, any XRcl light reflected by it, and any XRfe light passing through it, mostly XRfa light now having the changed outgoing trait. Any XRcl light is usually largely ARcl light.
  • the XTcl light passes in substantial part through NA segment 214.
  • Total XTab light consists of XRfa light passing through NE segment 234 and any XRab light formed with any ARne light reflected by segment 234 and any XRcl and XRfe light passing through it, likewise mostly XRfa light.
  • the XTab light passes in substantial part through NA segment 214 and IS segment 192. If NA segment 214 imposes the NA incoming trait on light passing from IS segment 192 through NA segment 214, segment 214 imposes the NA outgoing trait on XTab light passing from NE segment 234 through segment 214 so that XTab light has the NA outgoing trait upon reaching IS segment 192. Including any ARna light reflected by NA segment 214, total XTcc light consists of XRfa light passing through segment 214, any ARna light reflected by it, and any ARne, XRcl, and XRfe light passing through it, again mostly XRfa light.
  • X light is formed with XRfa light and any ARis, ARna, ARne, XRcl, and XRfe light leaving segment 192 and thus IDVC portion 138.
  • the deep-reflection embodiment of CC component 184 is typically a reflective LC structure in which core layer 222 consists largely of LC material such as nematic liquid crystal formed with elongated LC particles.
  • FA layer 206 contains a light reflector extending along, and generally parallel to, FE structure 226.
  • the light reflector specular or diffuse, is designed to reflect ARfa light during the normal state such that the segment of the light reflector in FA segment 216 reflects XRfa light during the changed state.
  • the reflector is a white-light reflector if one of colors ARfa and XRfa is white. If neither is white, the reflector can be a color reflector or a white-light reflector and a color filter lying between the white-light reflector and structure 226.
  • NA layer 204 usually contains a near (first) plane polarizer extending along, and generally parallel to, NE structure 224. If so, FA layer 206 contains a far (second) plane polarizer extending along, and generally parallel to, FE structure 226 so as to extend generally parallel to the near polarizer. The far polarizer is located between structure 226 and the light reflector.
  • Each polarizer has a polarization direction parallel to the plane of that polarizer.
  • PZ hereafter means polarization.
  • the PZ direction of the near polarizer is termed the p direction.
  • the direction parallel to the plane of the near polarizer and perpendicular to the p direction is termed the s direction.
  • the PZ direction of the far polarizer is typically perpendicular to, or parallel to, the near polarizer's PZ direction but can be at a non-zero angle materially different from 90° to the PZ direction.
  • the polarizers have perpendicular PZ directions so that the far polarizer's PZ direction is the s direction.
  • incoming light striking NA layer 204 consists of a p directional component and an s directional component.
  • the near polarizer transmits a high percentage, usually at least 70%, preferably at least 80%, more preferably at least 90%, even more preferably at least 95%, of the p component and blocks, preferably absorbs, the s component.
  • Light passing through the near polarizer so as to strike assembly 202 is plane polarized in the PZ direction of the near polarizer, i.e., the p direction.
  • the plane polarized light passes in substantial part through the LC material.
  • the elongated particles of the LC material in core layer 222 are normally in an orientation which causes the PZ direction of incoming incident p polarized light to rotate a primary LC amount so that the transmitted light leaving the LC material and striking the far polarizer is plane polarized in a direction materially different from the p direction.
  • the primary LC amount of the PZ direction rotation is usually 45° - 90° for which an actual PZ direction rotation of greater than 360° is converted to an effective PZ direction rotation by subtracting 360° one or more times until the resultant rotation value is less than 360°.
  • the far polarizer transmits a high percentage, usually at least 70%, preferably at least 80%, more preferably at least 90%, even more preferably at least 95%. of incident s polarized light and blocks, preferably absorbs, any other incident light.
  • the radiosity of the s polarized light passing through the far polarizer increases as the effective PZ direction rotation provided by the LC material moves toward 90°.
  • a substantial part of the plane polarized light passing through the far polarizer is normally reflected by the light reflector and passes back through the far polarizer, the LC material, and the near polarizer.
  • the far polarizer blocks, preferably absorbs, any reflected incident light plane polarized in any direction other than the s direction so that reflected light passing through the far polarizer largely forms ARfa light plane polarized in the s direction.
  • the LC material causes reflected incident s polarized ARfa light to undergo a rotation in PZ direction largely equal to the primary LC amount.
  • the near polarizer blocks, preferably absorbs, any reflected incident light plane polarized in largely any direction other than the p direction so that reflected light passing through the near polarizer includes ARfa light plane polarized in the p direction.
  • the radiosity of the reflected p polarized ARfa light passing through the near polarizer increases as the effective PZ direction rotation provided by the LC material moves toward 90°.
  • Core segment 232 responds to the general CC control signal provided during the changed state by causing the LC particles in segment 232 to change to an orientation materially different from their orientation in the normal state such that incoming plane polarized light passing through segment 232 and striking the segment of the far polarizer in segment 216 of FA layer 206 is plane polarized in a materially different direction than incoming plane polarized light passing through core layer 222 and striking the far polarizer during the normal state.
  • the LC-particle orientation change in core segment 232 may entail rotating the PZ direction of plane polarized light passing through segment 232 by a changed LC rotational amount usually less than 45°. If so, the effective PZ direction rotation provided by segment 232 during the changed state is materially different from, usually materially less than, the effective PZ direction rotation provided by layer 222 during the normal state.
  • the far polarizer segment in FA segment 216 transmits a high percentage of incident polarized light plane polarized in the s direction and blocks, preferably absorbs, incident light plane polarized in largely any other direction just as in the normal state.
  • the radiosity of the reflected s polarized light temporarily passing through the far polarizer segment in FA segment 216 differs materially from, is usually materially less than, the radiosity of the reflected s polarized light normally passing through the far polarizer because the effective PZ direction rotation, if any, temporarily provided by the LC material in core segment 232 differs materially from, is usually materially less than, the effective PZ direction rotation normally provided by the LC material in core layer 222.
  • a substantial part of the plane polarized light passing through the far polarizer segment in FA segment 216 during the changed state is reflected by the segment of the light reflector in FA segment 216 and passes back through the far polarizer segment in segment 216, core segment 232, and the segment of the near polarizer in NA segment 214.
  • the far polarizer segment in FA segment 216 blocks, preferably absorbs, any reflected incident light plane polarized in any direction other than the s direction so that reflected light passing through the far polarizer segment in segment 216 largely forms XRfa light plane polarized in the s direction.
  • the LC material in core segment 232 causes reflected incident s polarized XRfa light to undergo the same rotation in PZ direction.
  • the near polarizer segment in NA segment 214 blocks, preferably absorbs, any reflected incident light plane polarized in any direction other than the p direction so that reflected light passing through the near polarizer segment in NA segment 214 includes XRfa light plane polarized in the p direction.
  • Colors ARfa and XRfa normally have the same wavelength characteristics. However, the material difference in radiosity between the resultant reflected p plane polarized XRfa light temporarily leaving NA segment 214 and the resultant reflected p plane polarized ARfa light normally leaving NA layer 204 by itself, or in combination with other reflected light leaving print area 118 during the
  • color X is materially lighter than color A even though the wavelength characteristics of ARfa and XRfa light are the same. For instance, color X can be pink while color A is red.
  • the WI traits in the deep-reflection embodiment are embodied as follows in the reflective LC structure with the polarizers having perpendicular PZ directions.
  • the near polarizer causes light passing either way through NA layer 204 to be plane polarized in the p direction.
  • the far polarizer causes light passing either way through the FA layer 206 to be plane polarized in the s direction.
  • the LC material in core layer 222 causes the PZ direction of plane polarized light passing either way through layer 222 during the normal state to rotate the primary LC rotational amount, usually 45° - 90°.
  • the segment of the LC material in core segment 232 causes the PZ direction of light passing through segment 232 during the changed state to rotate the changed LC rotational amount, usually less than 45°, if the LC material in segment 232 undergoes any PZ direction rotation during the changed state.
  • the actions performed by the far polarizer and the LC material during the normal and changed states are opposite from the actions performed by the far polarizer and the LC material when the polarizers in the reflective LC structure have perpendicular PZ directions.
  • the WI traits in the deep-reflection embodiment are then embodied as follows. For the FA trait, the far polarizer causes light passing either way through FA layer 206 to be plane polarized in the p direction.
  • the LC material in core layer 222 causes the PZ direction of plane polarized light normally passing either way through layer 222 to rotate a primary LC amount, usually less than 45°, if the LC material in layer 222 normally undergoes any PZ direction rotation.
  • the segment of the LC material in core segment 232 causes the PZ direction of light temporarily passing through segment 232 to rotate a changed LC amount, usually 45° - 90°.
  • CC component 184 in OI structure 200 Six general embodiments of CC component 184 in OI structure 200 are based on changes in light emission. These six embodiments are termed the mid-emission ET, mid-emission EN, mid-emission EN-ET, deep-emission ET, deep-emission EN, and deep-emission EN-ET embodiments.
  • the above-described preliminary specifications for the four CC-component light-reflection embodiments apply to these six CC- component light-emission embodiments.
  • FA layer 206 is not significantly involved in color changing in any of the mid-emission embodiments.
  • the difference between the two single mid-emission embodiments is that core layer 222 emits light only during the changed state in the mid-emission ET embodiment and only during the normal state in the mid-emission EN embodiment. Layer 222 emits light during both states in the mid-emission EN-ET
  • the mid-emission ET embodiment utilizes normal ARab light reflection and temporary XEab light emission-XRab light reflection or, more specifically, normal ARne/ARcl/ARfe light reflection and temporary XEcl light emission-ARne/XRcl/XRfe light reflection respectively due mostly to ARcl/ARfe light reflection and XEcl light emission.
  • the mid-emission ET embodiment operates the same as the mixed-reflection RT embodiment and thus the same as the mid-reflection embodiment.
  • core segment 232 in the mid-emission ET embodiment responds to the general CC control signal applied between at least oppositely situated parts of electrode segments 234 and 236 by temporarily emitting XEcl light, usually a majority component of X light.
  • Total XTcl light consists of XEcl light, any XRcl light reflected by segment 232, and any FE-segment-reflected XRfe light passing through it, usually mostly temporarily emitted XEcl light. Any reflected XRcl light is usually largely ARcl light.
  • Total XTab light consists of XDab light formed with XEcl light passing through NE segment 234, any ARne light reflected by it, and any XRcl and XRfe light passing through it, likewise usually mostly XEcl light.
  • Total XTcc light consists of XEcl light passing through NA segment 214, any ARna light reflected by it, and any ARne, XRcl, and XRfe light passing through it, again usually mostly XEcl light.
  • X light is formed with XEcl light and any ARis, ARna, ARne, XRcl and XRfe light leaving segment 192 and thus IDVC portion 138.
  • the mid-emission EN embodiment utilizes normal AEab light emission-ARab light reflection and temporary XRab light reflection or, more specifically, normal AEcl light emission-ARne/ARcl/ARfe light reflection and temporary ARne/XRcl/XRfe light reflection respectively due mostly to AEcl light emission and XRcl/XRfe light reflection.
  • core layer 222 normally emits AEcl light, usually a majority component of A light.
  • Total ATcl light consists of AEcl light, any ARcl light reflected by layer 222, and any FE-structure- reflected ARfe light passing through it, usually mostly normally emitted AEcl light.
  • Total ATab light consists of ADab light formed with AEcl light passing through NE structure 224, any ARne light reflected by it, and any ARcl and ARfe light passing through it, likewise usually mostly AEcl light.
  • Total ATcc light consists of AEcl light passing through NA layer 204, any ARna light reflected by it, and any ARne, ARcl, and ARfe light passing through it, again usually mostly AEcl light.
  • a light is formed with AEcl light and any ARis, ARna, ARne, ARcl, and ARfe light normally leaving component 182 and thus VC region 106.
  • Core layer 222 in the mid-emission EN embodiment responds to the general CC control signal the same as in the mixed-reflection RN embodiment. Hence, the mid-emission EN embodiment operates the same in the changed state as the mid-reflection embodiment.
  • Assembly 202 in mid-emission EN or ET embodiment may be one or more of the following light- processing arrangements: a cathodoluminescent arrangement, an electrochromic fluorescent arrangement, an electrochromic luminescent arrangement, an electrochromic phosphorescent arrangement, an
  • electroluminescent arrangement an emissive microelectricalmechanicalsystem (display) arrangement (such as a time-multiplexed optical shutter or a backlit digital micro shutter structure), a field-emission arrangement, a light-emitting diode arrangement, a light-emitting electrochemical cell arrangement, an organic light-emitting diode arrangement, an organic light-emitting transistor arrangement, a photoluminescent arrangement, a plasma panel arrangement, a quantum-dot light-emitting diode arrangement, a surface-conduction-emission arrangement, and a vacuum fluorescent (display) arrangement.
  • emissive microelectricalmechanicalsystem (display) arrangement such as a time-multiplexed optical shutter or a backlit digital micro shutter structure
  • field-emission arrangement such as a time-multiplexed optical shutter or a backlit digital micro shutter structure
  • a field-emission arrangement such as a time-multiplexed optical shutter or a backlit digital micro shutter structure
  • a field-emission arrangement
  • Core layer 222 in each light-processing arrangement usually contains a multiplicity of light-emissive elements distributed laterally uniformly across layer 222.
  • "LE” hereafter means light-emissive.
  • Each LE element lies between a small part of NE structure 224 and a generally oppositely situated small part of FE structure 226 for which these two parts of electrode structures 224 and 226 occupy approximately the same lateral area as that LE element.
  • the LE elements continuously or selectively emit light during operation of OI structure 200 depending on factors such as their locations in layer 222.
  • the LE elements reflect light constituting part or all of the ARcl light during the normal state.
  • Core segment 232 contains a submultiplicity of the LE elements.
  • the LE elements in segment 232 reflect light constituting part or all of the XRcl light during the changed state.
  • each light-processing arrangement with control voltage V nf along core layer 222 at normal value V nfN , the LE elements either no light or emit light provided that little, preferably none, of the emitted light leaves layer 222 along NE structure 224.
  • voltage Vnf along core segment 232 goes to value VnfC to initiate the changed state, the LE elements in segment 232 emit XEcl light, again usually a majority component of X light, leaving segment 232.
  • voltage Vnf along segment 232 returns to value VnfN, the LE elements in segment 232 return to emitting no light or to emitting light provided that little, preferably none, of the emitted light leaves segment 232 along NE segment 234.
  • the LE elements are at fixed locations in core layer 222, and thus in CC component 184, in one version of the mid-emission ET or EN embodiment.
  • the LE elements emit no light during the normal state.
  • the LE elements in core segment 232 largely cease emitting light in response to the general CC control signal so as to emit no light during the changed state.
  • Each LE element has an element emissive area across which AEcl light is emitted during the normal state in the mid-emission EN embodiment and XEcl light is emitted during the changed state in the mid- emission ET embodiment if that LE element is in IDVC portion 138.
  • AEcl or XEcl light of each LE element can be emitted relatively uniformly across its emissive area.
  • each LE element includes three or more LE subelements, each operable to emit light of a different one of three or more primary colors, e.g., red, green, and blue, combinable to produce many colors usually including white.
  • Each LE subelement usually emits its primary color across a subelement emissive subarea of the emissive area of its LE element. The standard human eye/brain would interpret the combination of the primary colors of the light emitted by the LE
  • each LE element of the mid-emission EN embodiment as color AEcl if the AEcl light traveled to the human eye unaccompanied by other light.
  • color XEcl and XEcl light for each LE element in portion 138 of the mid-emission ET embodiment.
  • the radiosities of the light of the primary colors emitted from each element emissive area can be programmably adjusted subsequent to manufacture of OI structure 200 for adjusting AEcl light, and thus A light, in the mid-emission EN embodiment and XEcl light, and thus X light, in the mid-emission ET embodiment.
  • the programming is performed, as necessary, for each primary color, by providing the LE subelements operable for emitting light of that primary color with a programming voltage that causes them to emit light of their primary color at radiosity suitable for the desired AEcl light in the mid-emission EN embodiment and suitable for the desired XEcl light in the mid-emission ET embodiment.
  • Another version of the mid-emission ET or EN embodiment entails providing the LE elements in a supporting medium, usually a fluid such as a liquid, in core layer 222.
  • the supporting medium is a medium color M1Rc materially different from temporary emitted core color XEcl. Hence, the medium reflects M1Rc light and absorbs or/and transmits other light.
  • the LE elements have electrical characteristics, typically electrical charging, which enable them to translate (move) in response to a changing electric field. Also, the LE elements are usually of an LE-element color L1Rc so as reflect L1Rc light and absorb or/and transmit, preferably absorb, other light.
  • setting voltage Vnf at normal value VnfN laterally along core layer 222 results in the LE elements being normally distributed in the medium such that, even if they emit light, largely none of the emitted light leaves layer 222 along NE structure 224.
  • the LE elements are normally dispersed throughout the medium or situated adjacent to FE structure 226 so as to be averagely remote from NE structure 224.
  • the medium absorbs any light emitted by the LE elements and traveling toward structure 224. Since the medium reflects M1Rc light and since the LE elements reflect L1Rc light, ARcl light normally leaving layer 222 consists of M1Rc light and any L1Rc light.
  • Total ATcl light consists of M1Rc light and any L1Rc and XRfe light. Any LiRc light normally leaving layer 222 along structure 224 is of low radiosity compared to M1Rc light normally leaving layer 222 along structure 224.
  • V nfC polarity and the characteristics, e.g., charging, of the LE elements are chosen such that the LE elements in core segment 232 translate so as to be adjacent to NE segment 234 when voltage Vnf along segment 232 goes to changed value VnfC.
  • the LE elements in segment 232 then emit XEcl light leaving it.
  • XRcl light leaving segment 232 consisting of M1Rc and L1Rc light
  • total XTcl light consists of XEcl, M1Rc, and L1Rc light and any ARfe light so as to differ materially from the ATcl light normally leaving core layer 222.
  • the same result is achieved by reversing both the V nfC polarity and the characteristics of the LE elements.
  • the mid-emission EN translating-element version operates in the opposite way.
  • Setting voltage Vnf at value VnfN laterally along core layer 222 results in the LE elements normally being adjacent to NE structure 224.
  • the LE elements normally emit AEcl light leaving layer 222. Since the medium reflects M1Rc light and since the LE elements reflect L1Rc light, ARcl light normally leaving layer 222 consists of M1Rc and L1Rc light.
  • Total ATcl light consists of AEcl, M1Rc, and L1Rc light and any ARfe light.
  • Changing voltage Vnf in core segment 232 to value VnfC causes the LE elements in segment 232 to translate so as to be averagely remote from NE segment 234.
  • the LE elements in segment 232 become dispersed throughout it or situated adjacent to FE segment 236.
  • the segment of the medium in core segment 232 absorbs any light emitted by the LE elements in segment 232 and traveling toward NE segment 234.
  • total XTcl light consists largely of M1Rc light and any L1Rc and ARfe light and differs materially from the ATcl light normally leaving core layer 222.
  • Any LiRc light temporarily leaving segment 232 along NE segment 234 is of low radiosity compared to M1Rc light temporarily leaving segment 232 along NE segment 234.
  • the same result is again achieved by reversing both the VnfC polarity and the characteristics of the LE elements.
  • Various mechanisms can cause the LE elements in the translating-element version of the mid- emission ET or EN embodiment to emit XEcl or AEcl light.
  • the LE elements can emit light an electrochromic fluorescently, electrochromic luminescently, electrochromic phosphorescently, or electroluminescently in response to an alternating-current voltage signal imposed on voltage V nf .
  • the LE elements can emit light photoluminescently in response to electromagnetic radiation provided from a source outside assembly 202.
  • "EM” hereafter means electromagnetic.
  • the EM radiation is typically IR radiation but can be light or UV radiation, usually UV radiation just beyond the visible spectrum.
  • the radiation source is typically in FA layer 206 but can be in NA layer 204.
  • the EM radiation can sometimes simply be ambient light.
  • the LE elements can sometimes emit light naturally, i.e., without external stimulus.
  • the LE elements in the translating-element version of the mid-emission ET or EN embodiment can emit light continuously during operation of OI structure 200. This can occur in response to EM radiation provided from a source of EM radiation. If so and if the EM radiation source is capable of being switched between radiating (on) and non-radiating (off) states, the radiation source is usually placed in the non-radiating state when structure 200 is out of operation so as to save power.
  • the LE elements in core segment 232 of the mid-emission ET version can emit XEcl light in response to the general CC control signal but be non-emissive of light at other times.
  • the LE elements in segment 232 of the mid-emission EN version can normally emit AEcl light and become non-emissive of light in response to the control signal.
  • the mid-emission EN-ET embodiment utilizes normal AEab light emission-ARab light reflection and temporary XEab light emission-XRab light reflection or, more specifically, normal AEcl light emission- ARne/ARcl/ARfe light reflection and temporary XEcl light emission-ARne/XRcl/XRfe light reflection respectively due mostly to AEcl light emission and XEcl light emission.
  • the mid-emission EN-ET embodiment operates the same during the normal state as the mid-emission EN embodiment.
  • Core segment 232 in the mid-emission EN- ET embodiment responds to the general CC control signal the same as in the mid-emission ET embodiment.
  • the mid-emission EN-ET embodiment operates the same during the changed state as the mid-emission ET embodiment.
  • Assembly 202 in the mid-emission EN-ET embodiment can generally be any one or more of the above light-processing arrangements usable to implement the mid-emission EN and ET embodiments subject to modification of each light-processing arrangement to be capable of emitting both AEcl light and XEcl light.
  • core layer 222 contains a multiplicity of first LE elements distributed laterally uniformly across layer 222 and a multiplicity of second LE elements distributed laterally uniformly across layer 222 and thus approximately uniformly among the first LE elements.
  • Each LE element lies between a small part of NE structure 224 and a generally oppositely situated small part of FE structure 226 for which these two parts of electrode structures 224 and 226 occupy approximately the same lateral area as that LE element.
  • Core segment 232 contains a submultiplicity of the first LE elements and a submultiplicity of the second LE elements.
  • the mechanisms causing the first and second LE elements to emit light are the same as those described above for causing the LE elements in the above-described version of the mid-emission ET or EN embodiment to emit light.
  • the first and second LE elements i.e., all the properly functioning ones, have the following light- emitting capabilities.
  • the first LE elements emit light of wavelength for a first LE emitted color P1Ec during the normal state in which voltage V nf between electrode structures 226 and 224 is at value V nfN such that P1Ec light leaves core layer 222 and exits VC region 106.
  • V nf voltage between electrode structures 226 and 224
  • VnfN voltage
  • the first LE elements outside segment 232 continue to emit P1Ec light leaving layer 222 and exiting region 106.
  • the first LE elements in segment 232 may or may not emit P1Ec light leaving segment 232 and exiting IDVC portion 138 during the changed state depending on which of the switching modes, described below, is used.
  • the circumstance of a first LE element in segment 232 not providing light leaving portion 138 during the changed state can be achieved by having that element temporarily be non-emissive or by having it emit light that temporarily does not leave portion 138, e.g., due to absorption in segment 232.
  • the second LE elements in core segment 232 emit light of wavelength for a second LE emitted color Q1Ec during the changed state such that Q1Ec light leaves segment 232 and exits IDVC portion 138.
  • the second LE elements outside segment 232 may or may not emit Q1Ec light which leaves core layer 222 and exits VC region 106 during the changed state depending on which of the switching modes is used. The same applies to the second LE elements during the normal state.
  • the circumstance of a second LE element not providing light leaving region 106 during the normal or changed state can be achieved by having that element normally or temporarily be non-emissive or by having it emit light that normally or temporarily does not leave region 106, e.g., due to absorption in layer 222.
  • the first LE elements usually reflect light striking them and of wavelength for a first LE reflected color P1Rc while absorbing or/and transmitting, preferably absorbing, other incident light.
  • P1Rc light may or may not leave core layer 222 and exit VC region 106 during the normal and changed states.
  • the second LE elements usually reflect light striking them and of wavelength for a second LE reflected color Q1Rc while absorbing or/and transmitting, preferably absorbing, other incident light.
  • Q1Rc light may or may not leave layer 222 and exit region 106 during the normal and changed states.
  • the first and second LE elements operate in one of the following three switching modes.
  • a first LE switching mode the first and second LE elements respectively normally emit P1Ec and Q1Ec light which forms AEcl light, usually a majority component of A light, leaving core layer 222 along NE structure 224 and then leaving VC region 106 via SF zone 112.
  • Total ATcl light consists of P1Ec and Q1Ec light and any ARcl and ARfe light, usually mostly P1Ec and Q1Ec light, where the ARcl light includes any P1Rc and Q1Rc light.
  • the first LE elements in core segment 232 respond to the general CC control signal by temporarily largely ceasing to emit light leaving IDVC portion 138 via print area 118.
  • the second LE elements in segment 232 continue to emit Q1Ec light which forms XEcl light, usually a majority component of X light, leaving segment 232 along NE segment 234 and then leaving portion 138 via area 118.
  • Total XTcl light consists largely of Q1Ec light and any XRcl and ARfe light, usually mostly Q1Ec light, where the XRcl light includes any P1Rc and Q1Rc light.
  • the first LE elements In a second LE switching mode, the first LE elements normally emit P1Ec light which forms AEcl light, usually a majority component of A light, leaving core layer 222 along NE structure 234 and then leaving VC region 106 via SF zone 112.
  • the second LE elements normally emit largely no light leaving region 106 along zone 112.
  • Total ATcl light consists largely of P1Ec light and any ARcl and ARfe light, usually mostly P1Ec light, where the ARcl light again includes any P1Rc and Q1Rc light.
  • the first LE elements in core segment 232 Upon occurrence of the general CC control signal, the first LE elements in core segment 232 continue to emit P1Ec light leaving it along NE segment 234 and then leaving IDVC portion 138 via print area 118.
  • the second LE elements in core segment 232 respond to the general CC control signal by temporarily emitting Q1Ec light leaving segment 232 via NE segment 234 and then leaving portion 138 via area 118.
  • P1Ec and Q1Ec light form XEcl light, usually a majority component of X light.
  • Total XTcl light consists of P1Ec and Q1Ec light and any XRcl and ARfe light, usually mostly P1Ec and Q1Ec light, where the XRcl light again includes any P1Rc and Q1Rc light.
  • the first and second LE elements operate the same during the normal state as in the second LE switching mode.
  • the first LE elements in core segment 232 respond to the general CC control signal by temporarily largely ceasing to emit light leaving IDVC portion 138 along print area 118.
  • the second LE elements in segment 232 respond to the control signal by temporarily emitting Q1Ec light which forms XEcl light, usually a majority component of X light, temporarily leaving segment 232 along NE segment 234 and then leaving portion 138 along area 118.
  • total XTcl light consists largely of Q1Ec light and any XRcl and ARfe light, usually mostly Q1Ec light, where the XRcl light includes any P1Rc and Q1Rc light.
  • the first and second LE elements are at fixed locations in core layer 222 and thus in CC component 184 in a version of the mid-emission EN-ET embodiment implementing each LE switching mode.
  • the first LE elements emit P1Ec light while the second LE elements emit no light.
  • the second LE elements in core segment 232 temporarily emit Q1Ec light in response to the general CC control signal while the first LE elements in segment 232 become non-emissive in response to the control signal.
  • each first or second LE element can include three or more LE subelements, each operable to emit light of a different one of three or more primary colors, e.g., again red, green, and blue, combinable to produce many colors usually including white.
  • the standard human eye/brain would interpret the combination of the primary colors of the light emitted by the first or second LE subelements in each LE element as color P1Ec or Q1Ec if the P1Ec or Q1Ec light traveled to the human eye unaccompanied by other light.
  • the radiosities of the light of the primary colors emitted from each emissive area can be programmably adjusted subsequent to manufacture of OI structure 200 for enabling AEcl and XEcl light, and thus A and X light, to be adjusted.
  • the programming is performed, as necessary, for each primary color, by providing the LE subelements operable for emitting light of that primary color with a selected programming voltage that causes those LE subelements to emit their primary color at radiosities suitable for the desired AEcl and XEcl light.
  • Another version of the mid-emission EN-ET embodiment implementing the third LE switching mode entails providing the two sets of LE elements in a supporting medium, usually a fluid such as a liquid, in core layer 222.
  • the supporting medium is again generally of medium color M1Rc.
  • the medium is preferably transparent so that the M1Rc radiosity is close to zero.
  • the LE elements have electrical characteristics, typically electrical charging, which enable the second LE elements to translate oppositely to the first LE elements in the presence of an electric field.
  • Setting voltage Vnf at normal value VnfN laterally along layer 222 causes the first LE elements to be adjacent to NE structure 224 while the second LE elements are averagely remote from structure 224.
  • the second LE elements are normally dispersed throughout the medium or situated adjacent to FE structure 226.
  • the first LE elements emit P1Ec light leaving layer 222 along NE structure 224 and then VC region 106 via SF zone 112.
  • the medium absorbs light emitted by the second LE elements and traveling toward structure 224. Since the medium reflects M1Rc light and since the first and second LE elements respectively reflect P1Rc and Q1Rc light, total ATcl light consists largely of P1Ec and P1Rc light and any Q1Rc, M1Rc, and ARfe light. Any Q1Rc light normally leaving layer 222 along structure 224 is of low radiosity compared to P1Rc light normally leaving layer 222 along structure 224.
  • VnfC polarity and the characteristics, e.g., charging, of the LE elements are chosen such that changing voltage Vnf along core segment 232 to value VnfC causes the second LE elements in segment 232 to translate so as to be adjacent to NE segment 234 while the first LE elements in core segment 232 oppositely translate so as to be averagely remote from NE segment 234.
  • the first LE elements in core segment 232 become temporarily dispersed throughout the segment of the medium in segment 232 or situated adjacent to FE segment 236.
  • the second LE elements in core segment 232 emit Q1Ec light leaving segment 232 along NE segment 234 and then IDVC portion 138 via print area 118.
  • the medium absorbs light emitted by the first LE elements in core segment 232 and traveling toward NE segment 234.
  • total XTcl light consists largely of Q1Ec and Q1Rc light and any P1Rc, M1Rc, and ARfe light and differs materially from the ATcl light normally leaving core layer 222.
  • any P1Rc light leaving segment 232 along NE segment 234 is of low radiosity compared to Q1Rc light leaving segment 232 along NE segment 234.
  • the first and second LE elements may emit light continuously during operation of OI structure 200 in the preceding version of the mid-emission EN-ET embodiment. This can occur in response to EM radiation provided from an EM radiation source. If so and if the radiation source can be switched between radiating and non-radiating states, the radiation source is usually placed in the non-radiating state when structure 200 is out of operation so as to save power.
  • the second LE elements in core segment 232 can emit XEcl light in response to the general CC control signal but be non-emissive at other times while the first LE elements emit AEcl light continuously during operation of structure 200 or normally emit AEcl light but become non-emissive in response to the control signal.
  • FA layer 206 is utilized in each deep-emission embodiment for emitting light in making color change.
  • the difference between the single deep-emission embodiments is that light emitted by layer 206 passes through core layer 222 only during the changed state in the deep-emission ET embodiment but only in the normal state in the deep-emission EN embodiment.
  • Light emitted by FA layer 206 passes through core layer 222 during both states in the deep- emission EN-ET embodiment.
  • the deep-emission ET embodiment employs normal ARab light reflection and temporary XEfa light emission-XRab/XRfa light reflection or, more specifically, normal ARne/ARcl/ARfe light reflection and temporary XEfa light emission-ARne/XRcl/XRfe/XRfa light reflection respectively due mostly to ARcl/ARfe light reflection and XEfa light emission.
  • the deep-emission ET embodiment is similar to the mixed-reflection RT embodiment except that FA layer 206 in the deep-emission ET embodiment emits light and lacks the light reflector of the mixed-reflection RT embodiment. During the normal state, the deep-emission ET embodiment operates the same as the mid-emission ET embodiment and thus the same as the mid-reflection embodiment.
  • Core segment 232 in the deep-emission ET embodiment responds to the general CC control signal applied between at least oppositely situated parts of electrode segments 234 and 236 during the changed state by allowing a substantial part of XEfa light, usually a majority component of X light, emitted by FA segment 216 and passing through FE segment 236 to temporarily pass through core segment 232.
  • Total XTfa light consists of XEfa light and any XRfa light reflected by FA segment 216, usually mostly emitted XEfa light.
  • Total XTcl light consists of XEfa light passing through segment 232, any XRfa light passing through it, any XRcl light reflected by it, and any FE-segment-reflected XRfe light passing through it, usually mostly XEfa light.
  • Total XTab light consists of XEfa light passing through NE segment 234, any XRfa light passing through it, and any XRab light formed with any ARne light reflected by it and any XRcl and XRfe light passing through it, likewise usually mostly XEfa light.
  • Total XTcc light consists of XEfa light passing through NA segment 214, any ARna light reflected by it, and any ARne, XRcl, XRfe, and XRfa light passing through it, again usually mostly XEfa light.
  • X light is formed with XEfa light and any ARis, ARna, ARne, XRcl, XRfe, and XRfa light temporarily leaving segment 192 and thus IDVC portion 138.
  • XEfa light is preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of each of XTfa, XTcl, XTab, XTcc, and X light.
  • the deep-emission EN embodiment employs normal AEfa light emission-ARab/ARfa light reflection and temporary XRab light reflection or, more specifically, normal AEfa light emission-ARne/ARcl/ARfe/ARfa light reflection and temporary ARne/XRcl/XRfe light reflection respectively due mostly to AEfa light emission and XRcl/XRfe light reflection.
  • the deep-emission EN embodiment is similar to the mixed-reflection RN embodiment except that FA layer 206 in the deep-emission EN embodiment emits light and lacks the light reflector of the single mixed-reflection RN embodiment.
  • core layer 222 in the deep-emission EN embodiment allows AEfa light, usually a majority component of A light, emitted by FA layer 206 and passing through FE structure 226 to pass through core layer 222.
  • Total ATfa light consists of AEfa light and any ARfa light reflected by FA layer 206, usually mostly emitted AEfa light.
  • Total ATcl light consists of AEfa light passing through layer 222, any ARfa light passing through it, any ARcl light reflected by it, and any FE-structure-reflected ARfe light passing through it, usually mostly emitted AEfa light.
  • Total ATab light consists of AEfa light passing through NE structure 224, any ARfa light passing through it, and any ARab light formed with any ARne light reflected by structure 224 and any ARcl and ARfe light passing through it, likewise usually mostly emitted AEfa light.
  • Total ATcc light consists of AEfa light passing through NA layer 204, any ARna light reflected by it, and any ARne, ARcl, ARfe, and ARfa light passing through it, again usually mostly AEfa light.
  • a light is formed with AEfa light and any ARis, ARna, ARne, ARcl, ARfe, and ARfa light temporarily leaving component 182 and thus VC region 106.
  • AEfa light is preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of each of ATfa, ATcl, ATab, ATcc, and A light.
  • Core segment 232 in the deep-emission EN embodiment responds to the general CC control signal the same as in the mid-emission EN embodiment. Consequently, the deep-emission EN embodiment operates the same during the changed state as the mid-reflection embodiment.
  • core layer 222 contains dimensionally anisotropic core particles distributed laterally across the layer's extent and switchable between light-transmissive and light-blocking states.
  • the core particles have the characteristics described above for the implementation of the mixed-reflection RT or RN embodiment utilizing dimensionally anisotropic core particles.
  • NA layer 204 may or may not be present in this deep-emission ET or EN implementation.
  • FA layer 206 in the deep-emission ET or EN implementation contains a light emitter extending along, and generally parallel to, FE structure 226.
  • the deep-emission ET or EN implementation is configured the same as the implementation of the mixed-reflection RT or RN embodiment utilizing anisotropic core particles except that the light emitter replaces the light reflector.
  • the deep-emission ET or EN implementation operates the same as the mixed- reflection RT or RN implementation utilizing anisotropic core particles except as described below.
  • the deep-emission ET implementation operates the same as the mixed-reflection RT
  • the light emitter may continuously emit XEfa light during operation of the deep-emission ET implementation.
  • the light emitter may respond to the general CC control signal by emitting XEfa light only during the changed state in order to reduce power consumption.
  • the deep-emission EN implementation operates the same as the mixed-reflection RN
  • the light emitter usually continuously emits AEfa light during operation of the deep-emission EN implementation.
  • Core layer 222 consists of LC material formed with elongated LC molecules constituting the core particles in one version of the deep-emission ET or EN implementation for which CC component 184 consists of a reflective LC arrangement, typically polarizer-free. In another version of the deep-emission ET or EN implementation, layer 222 is formed with a fluid, typically a liquid, in which dipolar particles constituting the core particles are colloidally suspended.
  • These two versions of the deep-emission ET or EN implementation are respectively configured and operable as described above for the two versions of the mixed-reflection RT or RN implementation utilizing anisotropic core particles formed respectively with elongated LC molecules and with dipolar particles subject to (a) the light emitter replacing the light reflector, (b) the changed-state combination of XEfa light emitted by the segment of the light emitter in FA segment 216 and any XRfa light reflected by segment 216 replacing XRfa light reflected by the segment of the light reflector in segment 216, and (c) the normal-state combination of AEfa light emitted by the light emitter and any ARfa light reflected by FA layer 206 replacing ARfa light reflected by the light reflector.
  • the deep-emission EN-ET embodiment employs normal AEfa light emission-ARab/ARfa light reflection and temporary XEfa light emission-XRab/XRfa light reflection or, more specifically, normal AEfa light emission-ARne/ARcl/ARfe/ARfa light reflection and temporary XEfa light emission-ARne/XRcl/XRfe/XRfa light reflection respectively due mostly to AEfa light emission and XEfa light emission.
  • the deep-emission EN-ET embodiment is similar to the deep-reflection embodiment except that FA layer 206 in the deep-emission EN-ET embodiment emits light and lacks the strong light-reflection capability of the deep-reflection embodiment.
  • Core layer 222 and auxiliary layers 204 and 206 are usually employed in the deep-emission EN-ET embodiment for imposing certain traits, usually WI traits such as PZ traits, on light emitted by FA layer 206 and passing through FE structure 226, core layer 222, NE structure 224, NA layer 204, and IS component 182.
  • WI traits such as PZ traits
  • the deep-emission EN-ET embodiment operates the same as the deep-reflection embodiment when WI traits are employed except as described below.
  • FA layer 206 emits AEfa light, usually a majority component of A light. Layer 206 also typically reflects ARfa light. Total ATfa light consists of AEfa light and any ARfa light, usually mostly emitted AEfa light. Layer 206 typically imposes the FA trait on the AEfa light and on at least part of the ARfa light. [0489]
  • the remaining light processing during the normal state in the deep-emission EN-ET embodiment is the same as in the deep-reflection embodiment except that the combination of AEfa light and any ARfa light replaces ARfa light.
  • Total ATfe light consists of AEfa light passing through FE structure 226, any ARfa light passing through it, and any ARfe light reflected by it, usually mostly AEfa light.
  • ATfe light passing through core layer 222 has the primary outgoing trait upon reaching NA layer 204.
  • Total ATcl light consists of AEfa light passing through core layer 222, any ARcl light reflected by it, and any ARfe and ARfa light passing through it, usually mostly AEfa light having the primary outgoing trait.
  • Total ATab light consists of AEfa light passing through NE structure 224, any ARfa light passing through it, and any ARab light formed with any ARne light reflected by structure 224 and any ARcl and ARfe light passing through it, likewise usually mostly AEfa light.
  • ATab light passing through NA layer 204 typically has the NA outgoing trait upon reaching IS component 182.
  • Total ATcc light consists of AEfa light passing through layer 204, any ARna light reflected by it, and any ARne, ARcl, ARfe, and ARfa light passing through it, again usually mostly AEfa light.
  • a light is formed with AEfa light and any ARis, ARna, ARne, ARcl, ARfe, and ARfa light normally leaving component 182 and thus VC region 106.
  • AEfa light is preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of each of ATfa, ATcl, ATab, ATcc, and A light.
  • core segment 232 responds to the general CC control signal applied between at least oppositely situated parts of electrode segments 234 and 236 by allowing XEfa light, usually a majority component of X light, emitted by FA segment 216 and passing through FE segment 236 to temporarily pass through core segment 232.
  • FA segment 216 typically reflects XRfa light, usually largely ARfa light.
  • Total XTfa light consists of XEfa light and any XRfa light, usually mostly emitted XEfa light. Segment 216 typically imposes the FA trait on the XEfa light and on at least part of the XRfa light.
  • Total XTfe light consists of XEfa light passing through FE segment 236, any XRfa light passing through it, and any ARfe light reflected by it, usually mostly XEfa light.
  • XTfe light passing through core segment 232 has the changed outgoing trait upon reaching NA segment 214.
  • Total XTcl light consists of XEfa light passing through core segment 232, any XRcl light reflected by it, and any XRfe and XRfa light passing through it, usually mostly XEfa light having the changed outgoing trait.
  • Total XTab light consists of XEfa light passing through NE segment 234, any XRfa light passing through it, and any XRab light formed with any ARne light reflected by segment 234 and any XRcl and XRfe light passing through it, likewise usually mostly XEfa light.
  • XTab light passing through NA segment 214 typically has the NA outgoing trait upon reaching IS segment 192.
  • Total XTcc light consists of XEfa light passing through NA segment 214, any ARna light reflected by it, and any ARne, XRcl, XRfe, and XRfa light passing through it, again usually mostly XEfa light.
  • X light is formed with XEfa light and any ARis, ARna, ARne, XRcl, XRfe, and XRfa light temporarily leaving segment 192 and thus IDVC portion 138.
  • XEfa light is preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of each of XTfa, XTcl, XTab, XTcc, and X light.
  • the material difference between them is chosen to result in temporary total core color XTcl differing materially from normal total core color ATcl in the deep-emission EN-ET embodiment.
  • Color X differs materially from color A.
  • One embodiment of the deep-emission EN-ET embodiment of CC component 184 is a backlit LC structure in which core layer 222 consists largely of LC material such as nematic liquid crystal formed with elongated LC particles.
  • FA layer 206 contains a light emitter such as a lamp extending parallel to, and along all of, assembly 202 so as to emit light, usually of uniform radiosity, leaving layer 206 along all of assembly 202.
  • the backlit LC structure is configured the same as the reflective LC structure of the deep-reflection embodiment except that the light emitter replaces the light reflector.
  • NA layer 204 again contains a near plane polarizer extending along, and generally parallel to, NE structure 224.
  • FA layer 206 contains a far plane polarizer extending along, and generally parallel to, FE structure 226 so as to lie between structure 226 and the light emitter.
  • the PZ direction of the far polarizer again typically extends perpendicular to, or parallel to, the PZ direction of the near polarizer but can extend at a non-zero angle materially different from 90° to the PZ direction of the near polarizer.
  • the backlit LC structure with perpendicular polarizers operates the same as the reflective LC structure with perpendicular polarizers except as described below.
  • the light emitter emits, usually continuously during operation of OI structure 200, AEfa light that impinges on the far polarizer.
  • the far polarizer transmits a high percentage of the s component and blocks, preferably absorbs, the p component.
  • Emitted AEfa light and any reflected ARfa light passing through the far polarizer so as to strike FE structure 226 and core layer 222 are plane polarized in the s direction. This action occurs during both the normal and changed states with structure 226 and layer 222.
  • the combination of AEfa light and any ARfa light undergoes the same further processing that ARfa light undergoes in the deep-reflection embodiment.
  • the LC material causes incident s polarized AEfa light and any ARfa light to undergo a rotation in PZ direction largely equal to the primary LC amount.
  • core layer 222 here responds to the general CC control signal the same as in the deep-reflection embodiment.
  • the combination of XEfa light and any XRfa light undergoes the same further processing that XRfa light undergoes in the deep-reflection embodiment. More particularly, to the extent that the PZ direction of any incoming p polarized XRna light leaving the near polarizer segment in NA segment 214 undergoes rotation in core segment 232, the LC segment in segment 232 causes incident s polarized XEfa light and any XRfa light to undergo the same rotation in PZ direction.
  • the near polarizer segment in NA segment 214 blocks, preferably absorbs, any incident light plane polarized in any direction other than the p direction so that light passing through the near polarizer segment in segment 214 includes XEfa light and any XRfa light plane polarized in the p direction.
  • colors AEfa and XEfa normally have the same wavelength characteristics.
  • the material difference in radiosity between the resultant p plane polarized XEfa light leaving NA segment 214 during the changed state and the resultant p plane polarized AEfa light leaving NA layer 204 during the normal state by itself, or in combination with other reflected light leaving print area 118 during the changed state and SF zone 112 during the normal state enables color X to differ materially from color A.
  • color XEfa being at materially lower radiosity than color AEfa, color X is again materially lighter than color A even though even though the wavelength
  • the mid-emission ET, mid-emission EN-ET, deep-emission ET, and deep-emission EN-ET embodiments are advantageous because use of light emission to produce changed color X enables print area 118 to be quite bright. Visibility of the color change is enhanced, especially in dark ambient environments where certain colors are difficult to distinguish.
  • Figs.13a - 13c illustrate an extension 240 of OI structure 130.
  • OI structure 240 is configured the same as structure 130, e.g., ISCC structure 132 can be embodied as CR or CE material, except that VC region 106 here includes a principal SF structure 242 extending from SF zone 112 to meet ISCC structure 132 along a flat principal structure-structure interface 244 extending parallel to zone 112. See Fig. 13a.
  • SF structure 242 performs various functions such as protecting ISCC structure 132 from damage and/or spreading pressure to improve the matching between print area 118 and OC area 116 during impact on zone 112.
  • structure 242 typically consists largely of insulating material along all of zone 112. Structure 242 may provide velocity restitution matching between SF zones 112 and 114 as discussed below for Figs.102a and 102b. Structure 242 is usually transparent but may nonetheless strongly influence principal color A or/and changed color X.
  • ISCC structure 132 here operates the same during the normal state as in OI structure 130 except that light leaving ISCC structure 132 via SF zone 112 in OI structure 130 leaves ISCC structure 132 via interface 244 here.
  • the total light, termed ATic light, normally leaving structure 132 consists of ARic light reflected by it, any AEic light emitted by it, and any substructure-reflected ARsb light passing through it.
  • Substantial parts of the ARic light, any AEic light, and any ARsb light pass through SF structure 242. Additionally, structure 242 may normally reflect light, termed ARss light, which leaves it via SF zone 112 after striking zone 112. ARic light and any AEic, ARss, and ARsb light normally leaving structure 242, and thus VC region 106, form A light.
  • Each of ADic light and either ARic or AEic light is again usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of A light.
  • ARss light may, however, be a majority component of A light if structure 242 strongly influences principal color A.
  • SF structure 242 usually absorbs some light. Hence, ATic light reaching SF zone 112 so as to leave VC region 106 can be of significantly lower radiosity than total ATic light directly leaving ISCC structure 132 along interface 244. To the extent that light absorption by SF structure 242 is significantly wavelength dependent, light incident on zone 112 and of wavelength significantly absorbed by structure 242 is considerably attenuated before reaching interface 244. ARic light reflected by ISCC structure 132 is of comparatively low spectral radiosity at the spectral radiosity constituency of incident light absorbed by SF structure 242 because that light does not reach interface 244 so as to be reflected by ISCC structure 132 and included in the ARic light leaving structure 132.
  • ARic light reaching zone 112 is usually of the same spectral radiosity constituency as the ARic light directly leaving structure 132. If ARic light leaving structure 132 is the same in both OI structures 130 and 240, the ARic light leaving structure 240 can be of considerably different spectral radiosity constituency than ARic light leaving structure 130 because it lacks SF structure 242 and does not undergo such wavelength- dependent absorption. Insofar as undesirable, this situation is alleviated by choosing the light-absorption characteristics of structure 242 to significantly avoid absorbing light at the spectral radiosity constituency of ARic light directly leaving ISCC structure 132.
  • AEic light reaching zone 112 so as to leave VC region 106 can be of considerably different spectral radiosity constituency than the AEic light directly leaving ISCC structure 132.
  • AEic light leaving structure 132 is the same in OI structures 130 and 240, AEic light leaving structure 240 can also be of considerably different spectral radiosity constituency than AEic light leaving structure 130 because it lacks structure 242 and does not undergo such wavelength- dependent absorption. To the extent undesirable, this situation is alleviated by choosing the light-absorption characteristics of structure 242 to significantly avoid absorbing light at the spectral radiosity constituency of AEic light directly leaving ISCC structure 132.
  • item 252 is the ID segment of SF structure 242 present in IDVC portion 138.
  • Print area 118, the upper surface of portion 138, is also the upper surface of surface-structure segment 252 here.
  • "SS" hereafter means surface-structure.
  • Item 254 is the ID segment of interface 244 present in portion 138.
  • ID IF segment 254 is shown with extra thick line to clearly identify its exemplary location along interface 244.
  • ID internal DP IF area 256 is situated opposite, and laterally outwardly conforms to, OC area 116.
  • IF area 256 is usually larger than, and usually extends laterally beyond, OC area 116 as shown in the example of Figs.13b and 13c and as arises when structure 242 provides pressure spreading. While IF area 256 can be smaller than OC area 116, this results in print area 118 being even smaller than OC area 116.
  • ISCC segment 142 responds (a) in some general OI embodiments to the excess internal pressure along DP IF area 256, specifically IF segment 254, by causing IDVC portion 138 to temporarily appear as color X if the excess internal pressure along segment 254 meets the above-described principal basic excess internal pressure criteria here requiring that the excess internal pressure at a point along interface 244 equal or exceed a local TH value in order for the corresponding point along SF zone 112 to temporarily appear as color X or (b) in other general OI embodiments to the general CC control signal generated in response to the excess internal pressure along segment 254 meeting the excess internal pressure criteria sometimes dependent on other impact criteria also being met in those other embodiments by causing portion 138 to temporarily appear as color X.
  • the changed state begins as portion 138 goes to a condition in which XRic light reflected by ISCC segment 142 and any XEic light emitted by it temporarily leave it along IF segment 254.
  • the total light, termed XTic light, temporarily leaving ISCC segment 142 consists of XRic light, any XEic light, and any substructure-reflected XRsb light passing through it.
  • Substantial parts of the XRic light, any XEic light, and any XRsb light pass through ID SS segment 252. If SF structure 242 reflects ARss light during the normal state, SS segment 252 reflects ARss light during the changed state.
  • XDic light differs materially from A and ADic light.
  • Each of XDic light and either XRic or XEic light is again usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of X light.
  • ARss light usually has a significant effect on X light.
  • the contributions of ARss light to A and X light are chosen so that color X materially differs from color A.
  • XTic light reaching print area 118 so as to leave IDVC portion 138 can be of significantly lower radiosity than total XTic light directly leaving ISCC segment 142 along IF segment 254 due to light absorption by SS segment 252.
  • light absorption by segment 252 is significantly wavelength dependent, light incident on area 118 and of wavelength significantly absorbed by segment 252 is considerably attenuated before reaching IF segment 254.
  • XRic light reflected by ISCC segment 142 is of comparatively low spectral radiosity at the spectral radiosity constituency of light absorbed by SF structure 242 because the light absorbed by SS segment 252 does not reach IF segment 254 so as to be reflected by ISCC segment 142 and included in the XRic light leaving segment 142.
  • XRic light reaching area 118 is usually of the same spectral radiosity constituency as XRic light directly leaving segment 142.
  • XRic light leaving area 118 is the same in both OI structures 130 and 240, XRic light leaving area 118 in structure 240 can be of considerably different spectral radiosity constituency than XRic light leaving area 118 in structure 130 because it lacks SF structure 242 and does not undergo such wavelength-dependent absorption. Insofar as undesirable, this situation is alleviated by choosing the light-absorption characteristics of structure 242 to significantly avoid absorbing light at the spectral radiosity constituency of XRic light directly leaving segment 142.
  • XEic light leaving area 118 is the same in both OI structures 130 and 240, XEic light leaving area 118 in structure 240 so as to leave IDVC portion 138 can be of considerably different spectral radiosity constituency than XEic light leaving area 118 so as to leave portion 138 in structure 130 because it lacks SF structure 242 and does not undergo such wavelength-dependent absorption. To the extent undesirable, this situation is alleviated by choosing the light-absorption characteristics of OI structure 240 to significantly avoid absorbing light at the spectral radiosity constituency of XEic light directly leaving ISCC segment 142.
  • SF structure 242 functions as a color filter for significantly absorbing light of selected wavelength in an embodiment of OI structure 240 in which structure 242 strongly influences principal SF color A or/and changed SF color X.
  • total ATic light as it leaves ISCC structure 132 along interface 244 during the normal state is of wavelength for a color termed principal internal color ATic.
  • SF structure 242 significantly absorbs light
  • ISCC structure 132 is not externally visible along interface 244 as principal internal color ATic during the normal state.
  • Total XTic light as it leaves ISCC segment 142 along IF segment 254 during the changed state is of wavelength for a color termed changed internal color XTic.
  • ISSC segment 142 is not externally visible along IF segment 254 as changed internal color XTic during the changed state.
  • a selected one of internal colors ATic and XTic is a principal comparatively light color LP.
  • the remaining one of colors ATic and XTic is a principal comparatively dark color DP darker than light color LP.
  • Lightness L* of light color LP is usually at least 70, preferably at least 80, more preferably at least 90.
  • Lightness L* of dark color DP is usually no more than 30, preferably no more than 20, more preferably no more than 10. If principal internal color ATic is light color LP, principal SF color A is darker than light color LP due to the light absorption by SF structure 242 while changed SF color X may be darker than dark color DP depending on the characteristics of the light absorption by structure 242 and on the lightness of dark color DP.
  • changed internal color XTic is light color LP
  • changed SF color X is darker than light color LP while principal SF color A may be darker than dark color DP.
  • the colors embodying colors A and X can be significantly varied by changing the light absorption characteristics of structure 242 without changing ISCC structure 132.
  • the pressure spreading performable by SF structure 242 enables print area 118 to closely match OC area 116 in size, shape, and location along SF zone 112.
  • Structure 242 is a principal pressure-spreading structure. "PS” hereafter means pressure-spreading.
  • Interface 244, spaced apart from zone 112 so as to be inside OI structure 240, is a principal internal PS surface.
  • ISCC structure 132 is a principal pressure-sensitive CC structure because it is sensitive to the excess internal pressure produced by PS structure 242 along PS surface 244.
  • PSCC hereafter means pressure sensitive color-change.
  • ISCC segment 142 is similarly a PSCC segment.
  • print area 118 is located inside OC area 116 with the perimeters of areas 116 and 118 separated by perimeter band 120 which appears as color A during the changed state because the excess SF pressure at each point in band 120 is less than the local TH excess SF pressure value for that point.
  • Perimeter band 120 generally becomes smaller as the TH excess SF pressure values decrease. This improves the size, shape, and location matching between OC area 116 and print area 118. However, reducing the TH excess SF pressure values makes it easier for color change to occur along SF zone 112 and can result in undesired color change. The area of band 120 usually cannot be reduced to essentially zero without introducing reliability difficulty into OI structure 130.
  • PS structure 242 laterally spreads the excess SF pressure caused by the impact so that DP IF area 256 is laterally larger than OC area 116.
  • An annular band (not labeled) of internal PS surface 244 extends between the perimeters of IF area 256 and IF segment 254. This band lies opposite a corresponding annular band (not separately indicated) of SF zone 112.
  • the excess internal pressure along IF area 256 reaches a maximum value within area 256 and drops to zero along its perimeter. This results in the excess internal pressure criteria not being met in the annular band between the perimeters of area 256 and IF segment 254.
  • the corresponding annular band of SF zone 112 appears as color A during the changed state.
  • area 256 is laterally larger than oppositely situated OC area 116, the size and shape of the annular band of zone 112 can be adjusted to achieve very close size, shape, and location matching between OC area 116 and print area 118.
  • the pressure spreading enables perimeter band 120 between areas 116 and 118 to be made quite small without introducing reliability difficulty into PSCC structure 132.
  • IDVC portion 138 temporarily appears as color X if PSCC segment 142 is provided with the general CC control signal generated in response to the excess internal impact criteria being met and sometimes other impact criteria also being met.
  • Print area 118 although shown as being smaller than OC area 116 in Figs.13b and 13c, can be larger than it in OI structure 240.
  • the perimeters of areas 116 and 118 in structure 240 can variously cross each other.
  • Print area 118 in structure 240 differs usually by no more than 20%, preferably by no more than 15%, more preferably by no more than 10%, even more preferably by no more than 5%, in area from OC area 116, at least when total OC area 124 is in SF zone 112 as arises in Fig.13b.
  • Fig.13c where area 124 extends beyond zone 112, the same percentages apply to an imaginary variation of structure 240 in which zone 112 is extended to encompass all of area 124.
  • SF structure 242 is located between ISCC structure 132 and the external environment. This shields structure 132 from the external environment.
  • protective SF structure 242 is sufficiently thick to materially protect ISCC structure 132 from being damaged by most matter impacting, lying on, and/or moving along SF zone 112 and thereby serves as a protective structure.
  • Part of the force exerted by object 104 dissipates in structure 242 so that the force exerted on DP IF area 256 due to the object impact is less, typically considerably less, than the force exerted by object 104 directly on OC area 116.
  • SF structure 242 blocks at least 80%, preferably at least 90%, more preferably at least 95%, of UV radiation striking it. As a result, structure 242 materially protects ISCC structure 132 from being damaged by UV radiation.
  • DP IF area 256 which is larger than IF segment 254 when protective structure 242 performs pressure spreading, is usually closer to segment 254 in size if structure 242 performs the protective function but does not (significantly) perform the PS function.
  • Figs.14a - 14c illustrate an embodiment 260 of OI structure 240.
  • OI structure 260 is also an extension of OI structure 180 to include SF structure 242.
  • ISCC structure 132 here is formed with components 182 and 184 configured the same as in OI structure 180. See Fig.14a.
  • ISCC structure 132 here operates the same during the normal state as in OI structure 180 except that light leaving structure 132 via SF zone 112 in OI structure 180 leaves structure 132 via interface 244 here.
  • Total ATcc light consists of ARcc light and any AEcc and ARsb light leaving CC component 184.
  • Total ATic light leaving IS component 182, and thus structure 132 consists of ARcc light passing through component 182, any AEcc and ARsb light passing through it, and any ARis light reflected by it. Substantial parts of the ARcc light and any AEcc, ARis, and ARsb light pass through SF structure 242. Including any ARss light reflected by structure 242, A light is formed with ARcc light and any AEcc, ARss, ARis, and ARsb light normally leaving structure 242 and therefore VC region 106.
  • ISCC segment 142 The changed-state light processing in ISCC segment 142 here is essentially the same as in OI structure 180 except that light leaving segment 142 via print area 118 in structure 180 leaves segment 142 via IF segment 254 here. See Figs.14b and 14c.
  • IS segment 192 provides a principal general impact effect if the impact meets the basic TH impact criteria. The general impact effect is specifically provided in response to the excess internal pressure along IF segment 254 meeting the basic excess internal pressure criteria which implement the TH impact criteria.
  • Total XTcc light consists of XRcc light and any XEcc and XRsb light leaving CC segment 194 in response (a) in some general OI embodiments to the general impact effect or (b) in other general OI embodiments to the general CC control signal generated in response to the effect sometimes dependent on other impact criteria also being met in those other embodiments.
  • Total XTic light leaving IS segment 192, and thus ISCC segment 142 consists of XRcc light passing through segment 192, any XEcc and XRsb light passing through it, and any ARis light reflected by it. Substantial parts of the XRcc light and any XEcc, ARis, and XRsb light pass through SS segment 252. Including any ARss light reflected by segment 252, X light is formed with XRcc light and any XEcc, ARss, ARis, and XRsb light leaving segment 252 and hence IDVC portion 138.
  • Figs.15a - 15c illustrate an embodiment 270 of OI structure 260 and thus of OI structure 240.
  • OI structure 270 is also an extension of OI structure 200 to include SF structure 242.
  • ISCC structure 132 here is formed with IS component 182 and CC component 184 consisting of NA layer 204, NE structure 224, core layer 222, FE structure 226, and FA layer 206 configured the same as in OI structure 200.
  • SF structure 242, which again meets component 182 along interface 244, is here configured and operable the same as in OI structure 260 and thus the same as in OI structure 240.
  • CC component 184 here operates the same during the normal state as in OI structure 200.
  • Total ATcc light consists of any ARab, AEab, ARfa, AEfa, ARna, and ARsb light leaving component 184.
  • IS component 182 here operates the same during the normal state as in structure 200 except that light leaving component 182 via SF zone 112 in structure 200 leaves component 182 via interface 244 here.
  • Total ATic light normally leaving component 182, and thus ISCC structure 132 consists of any ARab, AEab, ARfa, AEfa, ARna, and ARsb light passing through component 182 and any ARis light reflected by it.
  • Substantial parts of any ARab, AEab, ARfa, AEfa, ARis, ARna, and ARsb light pass through SF structure 242. Including any ARss light normally reflected by structure 242, A light is formed with any ARab, AEab, ARfa, AEfa, ARss, ARis, ARna, and ARsb light normally leaving structure 242 and thus VC region 106.
  • ARab, ARfa, and ARna light form ARcc light
  • ARab light consists of ARcl, ARne, and ARfe light
  • AEab and AEfa light form AEcc light
  • AEab light consists of AEcl light.
  • ID segments 214, 234, 232, 236, and 216 of respective subcomponents 204, 224, 222, 226, and 206 are not labeled in Fig.15b or 15c due to spacing limitations. See Fig.12b or 12c for identifying segments 214, 234, 232, 236, and 216 in Fig.15b or 15c.
  • IS segment 192 again provides a principal general impact effect in response to the excess internal pressure along IF segment 254 meeting the basic excess internal pressure criteria which implement the basic TH impact criteria.
  • the changed- state light processing in CC segment 194 here is then the same as in OI structure 200.
  • Total XTcc light consists of any XRab, XEab, XRfa, XEfa, XRna, and XRsb light leaving segment 194 in response (a) in some general OI embodiments to the general impact effect or (b) in the other general OI embodiments to the general CC control signal generated in response to the effect sometimes dependent on both the TH impact criteria and other criteria being met.
  • the changed-state light processing in IS segment 192 here is the same as in structure 200 except that light leaving segment 192 via print area 118 in structure 200 leaves segment 192 via IF segment 254 here.
  • Total XTic light leaving segment 192 and thus ISCC segment 142, consists of any XRab, XEab, XRfa, XEfa, XRna, and XRsb light passing through segment 192 and any ARis light reflected by it.
  • Substantial parts of any XRab, XEab, XRfa, XEfa, ARis, XRna, and XRsb light pass through SS segment 252. Including any ARss light reflected by segment 252, X light is formed with any XRab, XEab, ARfa, XEfa, XRss, ARis, XRna, and XRsb light normally leaving segment 252 and thus IDVC portion 138.
  • the general CC control signal to which core layer 222 responds as VC region 106 goes to the changed state can be generated by SF structure 242, IS component 182, or a portion, e.g., NA layer 204, of CC component 184 in response to the pressure-sensitive general impact effect.
  • the control signal can also be generated outside VC region 106.
  • XRab, XRfa, and XRna light form XRcc light
  • XRab light consists of XRcl, XRne, and XRfe light
  • XEab and XEfa light form XEcc light
  • XEab light consists of XEcl light.
  • Figs.16a - 16c illustrate an extension 280 of OI structure 130 for which the duration of each temporary color change along print area 118 is extended in a pre-established deformation- controlled manner.
  • OI structure 280 is configured the same as structure 130 except that VC region 106 here includes a principal duration-extension structure 282 extending from substructure 134 to meet ISCC structure 132 along a flat principal structure-structure interface 284 extending parallel to SF zone 112. See Fig.16a. "DE” hereafter means duration-extension.
  • DE structure 282 may normally reflect light, termed ARde light, which leaves it via interface 284. If any light passes through structure 282 and strikes substructure 134, substructure 134 may reflect ARsb light which passes in substantial part through structure 282.
  • the total light, termed ATde light, normally leaving structure 282 via interface 284 consists of any ARde and ARsb light. Substantial parts of any ARde and ARsb light pass through structure 132.
  • ARic light reflected by structure 132, any AEic light emitted by it, and any ARde and ARsb light together normally leaving it, and thus VC region 106, form A light.
  • Each of ADic light and either ARic or AEic light is once again usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of A light.
  • VC region 106 deforms along SF DF area 122 in response to object 104 impacting OC area 116, "DF" again meaning deformation. See Fig.16b or 16c. Since SF zone 112 is a surface of ISCC structure 132 in OI structure 280, ISCC structure 132 directly deforms along DF area 122. If the TH impact criteria are met, i.e., if the SF deformation along area 122, specifically print area 118, meets the principal basic SF DF criteria embodying the principal basic TH impact criteria, the SF deformation causes IDVC portion 138 to temporarily appear as color X for base duration ⁇ tdrbs as the changed state begins.
  • ISCC segment 142 cause portion 138 to change color in response to the SF deformation if the TH impact criteria are met.
  • Base duration ⁇ t drbs is passively determined largely by the properties of the material in ISCC structure 132 operating in response to the SF deformation along area 122. In the absence of DE structure 282, CC duration ⁇ t dr would be automatic value ⁇ tdrau equal to base duration ⁇ tdrbs.
  • DE structure 282 responds to the deformation along SF DF area 122, and thus to the impact, by deforming along an ID principal internal DF area 288 of interface 284. If the TH impact criteria are met, the internal deformation of ISCC structure 132 along ID internal DF area 288, spaced apart from DF area 122 and located opposite it, causes IDVC portion 138 to further temporarily appear as color X for extension duration ⁇ tdrext so that automatic duration ⁇ tdrau is the sum of durations ⁇ tdrbs and ⁇ tdrext. Subject to the TH impact criteria being met, ISCC segment 142 specifically responds to the internal deformation along DF area 288 by causing portion 138 to continue temporarily appearing as color X. Extension duration ⁇ t drext is passively determined largely by the properties of the material in DE structure 282 and ISCC structure 132 operating in response to the internal deformation along area 288.
  • item 292 in Figs.16b and 16c is the ID segment of DE structure 282 present in IDVC portion 138.
  • Item 294 is the ID segment of interface 284 present in portion 138.
  • ID IF segment 294 at least partly encompasses, and at least mostly outwardly conforms to, internal DF area 288.
  • Internal change sufficient to cause portion 138 to appear as color X occurs along segment 294 but usually not along perimeter band 298.
  • ISCC segment 142 specifically causes portion 138 to continue its color change in response to the deformation along segment 294.
  • ISCC structure 132 here can be embodied in many ways including as a single material consisting of IS CR or CE material which temporarily reflects X light due to the deformation at DF areas 122 and 288 caused by the impact.
  • the deformation along area 122 or 288 can be impact-caused compressive deformation or impact-caused vibrational deformation whose amplitude rapidly decreases largely to zero. If vibrational deformation along area 122 partly or fully causes structure 132 to temporarily reflect X light during base duration ⁇ tdrbs, vibrational deformation along internal area 288 usually partly or fully causes structure 132 to temporarily reflect X light during extension duration ⁇ tdrext.
  • ID DE segment 292 may reflect light, termed XRde light, which leaves it via IF segment 294 during the changed state.
  • XRde light can be the same as, or significantly differ from, ARde light depending on how the light processing in IDVC portion 138 during the changed state differs from the light processing in VC region 106 during the normal state. If any light passes through DE segment 292 so as to strike substructure 134 along portion 138, substructure 134 may reflect XRsb light which passes in substantial part through segment 292.
  • the total light, termed XTde light, temporarily leaving segment 292 via IF segment 294 consists of any XRde and XRsb light.
  • Each of XDic light and either XRic or XEic light is once again usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of X light.
  • Figs.17a - 17c illustrate an extension 300 of OI structure 200, and hence of OI structure 180, for which the duration of each color change along print area 118 is extended in a pre- established deformation-controlled manner.
  • VC region 106 of OI structure 300 contains a principal DE structure 302 located between overlying IS component 182 and underlying CC component 184 so that they are spaced apart from each other. See Fig.17a.
  • Direct electrical connections between components 182 and 184 in structure 200 are generally replaced here with electrical connections passing through DE structure 302.
  • CC component 184 here consists of auxiliary layers 204 and 206 and assembly 202 formed with core layer 222 and electrode structures 224 and 226.
  • DE structure 302 meets (a) IS component 182 along a flat principal near light-transmission interface 304 extending parallel to SF zone 112 and (b) CC component 184, specifically NA layer 204, along a flat principal far light-transmission interface 306 likewise extending parallel to zone 112 and thus to interface 304.
  • CC component 184 here operates the same during the normal state as in OI structure 200 except that light leaving component 184 via interface 186 in structure 200 leaves component 184 via interface 306 here.
  • Total ATcc light consists of ARcc light reflected by component 184, any AEcc light emitted by it, and any ARsb light passing through it.
  • ARab, ARfa, and ARna light form ARcc light
  • ARab light consists of ARcl, ARne, and ARfe light
  • AEab and AEfa light form AEcc light
  • AEab light consists of AEcl light.
  • Substantial parts of the ARcc light and any AEcc and ARsb light pass through DE structure 302.
  • Structure 302 may normally reflect ARde light.
  • Total ATde light leaving structure 302 via interface 304 consists of ARcc light and any AEcc, ARde, and ARsb light.
  • Substantial parts of the ARcc light and any AEcc, ARde, and ARsb light pass through IS component 182. Including any ARis light reflected by component 182, A light is formed with ARcc light and any AEcc, ARis, ARde, and ARsb light normally leaving component 182 and thus VC region 106.
  • ADcc light and any ARis light still form ADic light consisting of ARic light and any AEic light for which ARic light is formed with ARcc light and any ARis light while AEic light is formed with any AEcc light.
  • Each of ADcc light and either ARcc or AEcc light is again usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of each of A and ADic light.
  • IS component 182 deforms along SF DF area 122 in response to the impact. See Fig.17b or 17c. If the TH impact criteria are met, i.e., if the deformation along area 122, specifically print area 118, meets the principal basic SF DF criteria embodying the principal basic TH impact criteria, component 182, largely IS segment 192, provides the general impact effect, termed the principal general first impact effect. CC segment 194 responds to the principal general first impact effect by causing IDVC portion 138 to temporarily appear as color X for base duration ⁇ tdrbs, thereby beginning the changed state.
  • Duration ⁇ tdrbs is passively determined largely by the properties of (a) the material in component 182 operating in response to the SF deformation along SF DF area 122 and (b) the material in CC component 184 operating in response to the first general impact effect.
  • DE structure 302 responds to the deformation along SF DF area 122, and thus to the impact, by deforming along an ID principal internal DF area 308 of interface 304. Since interface 304 is also a surface of IS component 182, the deformation of structure 302 along ID internal DF area 308, spaced apart from SF DF area 122 and located opposite it, causes component 182 to deform along area 308. If the TH impact criteria are met, component 182, again largely IS segment 192, responds to the internal deformation along area 308 by providing another impact effect, termed the principal general second impact effect, slightly after providing the first general impact effect.
  • CC segment 194 responds to the principal general second impact effect by causing IDVC portion 138 to further temporarily appear as color X for extension duration ⁇ t drext .
  • Automatic duration ⁇ t drau is again extended from base duration ⁇ t drbs to the sum of durations ⁇ t drbs and ⁇ t drext .
  • Duration ⁇ t drext is passively determined largely by the properties of (a) the material in structure 302 and IS component 182 operating in response to the internal deformation along area 308 and/or (b) the material in CC component 184 operating in response to the second general impact effect.
  • item 312 in Figs.17b and 17c is the ID segment of DE structure 302 present in IDVC portion 138.
  • Items 314 and 316 respectively are the ID segments of interfaces 304 and 306 present in portion 138.
  • ID IF segment 314 at least partly laterally encompasses, and at least mostly outwardly conforms to, internal DF area 308.
  • Internal change sufficient to cause portion 138 to appear as color X occurs along segment 314 but usually not along perimeter band 318. Accordingly, ISCC segment 142 specifically causes portion 138 to continue its color change in response to the deformation along segment 314.
  • Each general impact effect provided by IS segment 192 is typically an electrical effect consisting of one or more electrical signals supplied to CC segment 194 via one or more of the above-mentioned electrical connections through DE structure 302.
  • the deformation along DF area 122 or 308 can be impact-caused compressive deformation or impact-caused vibrational deformation whose amplitude eventually decreases largely to zero.
  • the changed-state light processing in CC segment 194 here is the same as in OI structure 200 except that light leaving segment 194 via IF segment 196 in structure 200 leaves it via ID IF segment 316 here.
  • Total XTcc light consists of XRcc light reflected by CC segment 194, any XEcc light emitted by it, and any XRsb light passing through it.
  • the following changed-state relationships again apply to the extent that the indicated light species are present: XRab, XRfa, and XRna light form XRcc light;
  • XRab light consists of XRcl, XRne, and XRfe light;
  • XEab and XEfa light form XEcc light; and
  • XEab light consists of XEcl light.
  • Substantial parts of the XRcc light and any XEcc and XRsb light pass through ID DE segment 312. If ARde light is reflected by DE structure 302 during the normal state, segment 312 reflects ARde light during the changed state. Total XTde light leaving segment 312 via IF segment 314 consists of XRcc light and any XEcc, ARde, and XRsb light. Substantial parts of the XRcc light and any XEcc, ARde, and XRsb light pass through IS segment 192.
  • X light is formed with XRcc light and any XEcc, ARis, ARde, and XRsb light leaving segment 192 and thus IDVC portion 138.
  • the changed-state light processing is the same during both of durations ⁇ t drbs and ⁇ t drext .
  • XDcc light and any ARis light still form XDic light consisting of XRic light and any XEic light for which XRic light is formed with XRcc light and any ARis light while XEic light is formed with any XEcc light.
  • Each of XDcc light and either XRcc or XEcc light is again usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of each of X and XDic light.
  • Figs.18a - 18c illustrate an extension 320 of both OI structure 240 and OI structure 280.
  • OI structure 320 is configured the same as structure 280 except that VC region 106 here contains SF structure 242 extending from SF zone 112 to ISCC structure 132 to meet it along interface 244. See Fig. 18a.
  • Structure 242 here is configured and operable the same as in OI structure 240.
  • ISCC structure 132 and DE structure 282 here operate the same during the normal state as in OI structure 280 except that light leaving ISCC structure 132 via SF zone 112 in OI structure 280 leaves structure 132 via interface 244 here.
  • Total ATic light consists of ARic light reflected by structure 132, any AEic light emitted by it, and any ARde and ARsb light passing through it. Substantial parts of the ARic light and any AEic, ARde, and ARsb light pass through SF structure 242. Including any ARss light normally reflected by structure 242, A light is formed with ARic light and any AEic, ARss, ARde and ARsb light normally leaving structure 242 and thus VC region 106.
  • each of ADic light and either ARic or AEic light is usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of A light.
  • SF structure 242 here deforms along SF DF area 122 in response to the impact. See Fig.18b or 18c. The impact also creates excess SF pressure along OC area 116. The excess SF pressure is transmitted through structure 242 to produce excess internal pressure along DP IF area 256, causing it to deform. Because interface 244 is a surface of ISCC structure 132 here, structure 132 deforms along area 256.
  • the internal deformation causes IDVC portion 138 to temporarily appear as color X for base duration ⁇ tdrbs as the changed state begins. More particularly, ISCC segment 142 responds to the internal deformation along area 256, and thus to the impact- caused SF deformation along area 122, by causing portion 138 to begin temporarily appearing as color X if the TH impact criteria are met. Duration ⁇ t drbs is passively determined largely by the properties of the material in SF structure 242 and ISCC structure 132 operating in response to the internal deformation along area 256.
  • DE structure 282 here responds to the internal deformation along DP IF area 256 by deforming along internal DF area 288 of interface 284. Since interface 284 is a surface of ISCC structure 132, the deformation of DE structure 282 along area 288 causes ISCC structure 132 to deform along area 288. If the TH impact criteria are met, the internal deformation of structure 132 along area 288, specifically IF segment 294, causes IDVC portion 138 to further temporarily appear as color X for extension duration ⁇ tdrext. Subject to the TH impact criteria being met, ISCC segment 142 specifically responds to the internal deformation along area 288, and thus to the impact, by causing portion 138 to continue temporarily appearing as color X.
  • Duration ⁇ t drext is passively determined largely by the properties of the material in SF structure 242 and ISCC structure 132 operating in response to the internal deformation along area 288. Internal change sufficient to cause portion 138 to appear as color X again occurs along IF segment 294 but usually not along perimeter band 298 where the deformation is insufficient to meet the TH impact criteria. Consequently, ISCC segment 142 specifically causes portion 138 to continue its color change in response to the deformation along segment 294.
  • the changed-state light processing in ISCC segment 142 and DE segment 292 here is the same as in OI structure 280 except that light leaving ISCC segment 142 via print area 118 in structure 280 leaves segment 142 via IF segment 254 here.
  • Total XTic light consists of XRic light reflected by ISCC segment 142, any XEic light emitted by it, and any XRde and XRsb light passing through it. Substantial parts of the XRic light and any XEic, XRde, and XRsb light pass through SS segment 252.
  • X light is formed with XRic light and any XEic, ARss, XRde and XRsb light temporarily leaving segment 252 and thus IDVC portion 138.
  • each of XDic light and either XRic or XEic light is usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of X light.
  • Figs.19a - 19c illustrate an extension 330 of both OI structure 270 and OI structure 300.
  • OI structure 330 is configured and operable the same as structure 300 except that VC region 106 here contains SF structure 242 extending from SF zone 112 to ISCC structure 132 to meet it, specifically IS component 182, along interface 244. See Fig.19a.
  • SF structure 242 here is configured and operable the same as in OI structure 270 and thus the same as in OI structure 240.
  • IS component 182, DE structure 302, and CC component 184 here operate the same during the normal state as in OI structure 300 except that light leaving IS component 182 via SF zone 112 in structure 300 leaves component 182 via interface 244 here.
  • Total ATcc light consists of ARcc light reflected by CC component 184, any AEcc light emitted by it, and any ARsb light passing through it.
  • Total ATic light leaving IS component 182, and therefore ISCC structure 132 consists of ARcc light passing through component 182 and DE structure 302, any AEcc and ARsb light passing through component 182 and structure 302, any ARde light passing through component 182, and any ARis light reflected by it.
  • Substantial parts of the ARcc light and any AEcc, ARis, ARde, and ARsb light pass through SF structure 242. Including any ARss light reflected by structure 242, A light is formed with ARcc light and any AEcc, ARss, ARis, ARde, and ARsb light normally leaving structure 242 and thus VC region 106.
  • Each of ADcc light and either ARcc or AEcc light is once again usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of each of A and ADic light.
  • SF structure 242 here deforms along SF DF area 122 in response to the impact. See Fig.19b or 19c.
  • the attendant excess SF pressure along OC area 116 is transmitted through structure 242 to produce excess internal pressure along DP IF area 256, causing it to deform.
  • interface 244 is a surface of IS component 182 here, it deforms along area 256. If the TH impact criteria are met, i.e., if the internal deformation along area 256, specifically IF segment 254, meets principal basic internal DF criteria embodying the principal basic TH impact criteria, component 182, likewise largely IS segment 192, provides the general impact effect, again termed the principal general first impact effect.
  • CC segment 194 responds to the principal general first impact effect by causing IDVC portion 138 to temporarily appear as color X for base duration ⁇ tdrbs, thereby beginning the changed state.
  • Duration ⁇ tdrbs is passively determined largely by the properties of (a) the material in structure 242 and component 182 operating in response to the internal deformation along area 256 and (b) the material in CC component 184 operating in response to the first general impact effect.
  • DE structure 302 here responds to the internal deformation along DP IF area 256 by deforming along internal DF area 308 of interface 304. Because interface 304 is a surface of IS component 182, the deformation of structure 302 along area 308 causes component 182 to deform. If the TH impact criteria are met, component 182, largely IS segment 192, provides another impact effect, again termed the principal general second impact effect. CC segment 194 responds to the principal general second impact effect by further temporarily appearing as color X for extension duration ⁇ tdrext. Automatic duration ⁇ tdrau is again lengthened to ⁇ tdrbs + ⁇ tdrext.
  • Duration ⁇ tdrext is passively determined by the properties of (a) the material in structure 302 and component 182 operating in response to the internal deformation along area 308 and/or (b) the material in CC component 184 operating in response to the second general impact effect.
  • ISCC segment 142 specifically causes portion 138 to continue its color change in response to the deformation along segment 314.
  • the changed-state light processing in IS segment 192, DE segment 312, and CC segment 194 here is the same as in OI structure 300 except that light leaving IS segment 192 via print area 118 in structure 300 leaves segment 192 via IF segment 254 here.
  • Total XTcc light consists of XRcc light reflected by CC segment 194, any XEcc light emitted by it, and any XRsb light passing through it.
  • Total XTic light leaving IS segment 192 consists of XRcc light passing through IS segment 192 and DE segment 312, any XEcc and XRsb light passing through segments 192 and 312, any ARde light passing through IS segment 192, and any ARis light reflected by it.
  • Substantial parts of the XRcc light and any XEcc, ARis, ARde, and XRsb light pass through SS segment 252.
  • X light is formed with XRcc light and any XEcc, ARss, ARis, ARde and XRsb light temporarily leaving segment 252 and therefore IDVC portion 138.
  • Each of XDcc light and either XRcc or XEcc light is once again usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of each of X and XDic light.
  • VC region 106 contains (a) ISCC structure 132 formed with IS component 182 and CC component 184 consisting of NA layer 204, FA layer 206, and assembly 202 consisting of subcomponents 222, 224, and 226, (b) possibly SF structure 242, and (c) possibly DE structure 282 or 302 where the alphabetic notation used in these equations means the light described above using the same notation, e.g., "A” and "XDcc” in the equations respectively mean A light and XDcc light and where "XRde/ARde” means “XRde” for DE segment 292 and "ARde” for DE segment 312.
  • Each term in these equations is the normalized spectral radiosity for the light species identified by that term.
  • Light absorption by a region, e.g., SF structure 242 or SS segment 252, situated between ISCC structure 132 and zone 112 is ignored with regard to emitted light.
  • ISCC structure 132 consisting of IS component 182 and CC component 184:
  • A ARss + ARis + ARde + ADcc + ARsb (B3) CC component 184 consisting of NA layer 204, assembly 202, and FA layer 206:
  • Assembly 202 consisting of NE structure 224, core layer 222, and FE structure 226:
  • A ARss + ARde + ARis + ARna + ARne + ARcl + AEcl + ARfe
  • ISCC segment 142 consisting of IS segment 192 and CC segment 194:
  • CC segment 194 consisting of NA segment 214, AB segment 212, and FA segment 216:
  • AB segment 212 consisting of NE segment 234, core segment 232, and FE segment 236:
  • X ARss + XRde/ARde + ARis + XRna + XRne + XRcl + XEcl + XRfe
  • Radiosities of ARss, ARis, ARde, ARna, ARne, ARfe, ARsb, XRna, XRne, XRfe, and XRsb light are preferably as low as feasible. This provides flexibility in choosing colors A and X and their components.
  • the radiosities of these eleven light species can variously be set to zero so as to correspondingly eliminate them from the above equations and the description of OI structure 100 and its embodiments to provide simplifying approximations for design purposes.
  • Some of the present OI structures may be embodied to allow light to pass through one or more thickness locations of assembly 202 at certain times but not at other times during regular operation. Light then passes through one or more corresponding thickness locations of core layer 222 and FE structure 226 at certain times but not at other times.
  • the transmissivity of each of assembly 202, layer 222, and structure 226 to light incident perpendicularly on SF zone 112 at at least wavelengths of ADfa and XDfa light for either ARfa or ARfe light being a majority component of A light and for either XRfa or XRfe light being a majority component of X light is usually at least 60%, preferably at least 70%, more preferably at least 80%, even more preferably at least 90%, yet further preferably at least 95%, along that thickness location.
  • the composite transmissivity of the combination of SF structure 242 (if present), IS component 182, NA layer 204 (if present), and assembly 202 or the combination of structure 242 (if present), component 182, layer 204 (if present), NE structure 224, core layer 222, and FE structure 226 to light incident perpendicularly on zone 112 at at least wavelengths of ADfa and XDfa light is usually at least 30%, preferably at least 50%, more preferably at least 70%, even more preferably at least 80%, yet further preferably at least 90%, along such an assembly or core thickness location when it is light transmissive.
  • OI structure 100 including each embodiment 130, 180, 200, 240, 260, 270, 280, 300, 320, or 330, can be manufactured in various ways.
  • the materials of VC region 106 and FC region 108 are deposited on substructure 134.
  • the material of one of color regions 106 and 108 is deposited on substructure 134, and the other of regions 106 and 108 is formed separately and then attached to substructure 134.
  • regions 106 and 108 are formed separately and later attached to substructure 134.
  • the materials of regions 106 and 108 consist of polymer in order to provide them with impact resistance and bending flexibility.
  • region 106 or 108 may be fabricated as a relatively rigid structure or as a significantly bendable structure capable of, e.g., being rolled on substructure 134.
  • region 106 or 108 may be fabricated as a relatively rigid structure or as a significantly bendable structure capable of, e.g., being rolled on substructure 134.
  • VC region 106 consists of two or more subregions, such as components 182 and 184, one of the subregions is typically initially fabricated. Each other subregion is then typically formed over the initially fabricated subregion.
  • Figs.20a and 20b present side cross sections of a more easily manufacturable variation 340 of OI structure 100.
  • OI structure 340 is configured the same as OI structure 130 except that structure 340 lacks FC region 108. Instead, OI substructure 134 is externally exposed to the side(s) of VC region 106. The absence of region 108 in structure 340 enables it to be manufactured more easily than structure 100.
  • the surface of the exposed portion of substructure 134 is indicated as item 342 and is termed the exposed substructure SF zone. Due to the absence of FC region 108, VC region 106 is externally exposed along a principal side SF zone 344 extending from VC SF zone 112 to exposed substructure SF zone 342. Side SF zone 344 is shown in Figs.20a and 20b as being flat and extending perpendicular to SF zones 112 and 342. However, zone 344 can be significantly curved. Also, even if zone 344 is flat, it can extend significantly non- perpendicular to zones 112 and 342. Zones 112, 342, and 344 form surface 102 here.
  • Substructure 134 appears along substructure SF zone 342 as a substructure color A".
  • VC region 106 appears alongside SF zone 344 as a side color A"'.
  • Each color A" or A"' is often the same as, but can differ significantly from, color A. If region 106 consists of multiple subregions extending to zone 344, color A"' can be a group of different colors.
  • region 106 may include a generally homogeneous layer (not shown) whose outer surface largely forms zone 344 so that color A"' is usually a single color often the same as color A.
  • VC region 106 here operates the same as in OI structure 130.
  • Fig.20a corresponding to Fig.6a, shows how OI structure 340 normally appears.
  • Fig.20b corresponding to Fig.6b, presents an example in which object 104 contacts surface 102 fully within SF zone 112.
  • Figs.21a and 21b present side cross sections of an embodiment 350 of OI structure 340 and thus a more easily manufacturable variation of OI structure 100.
  • ISCC structure 132 here consists of IS component 182 and CC component 184 formed with auxiliary layers 204 and 206 and assembly 202 consisting of subcomponents 224, 222, and 226 arranged as in OI structure 200.
  • VC region 106 here operates the same as in OI structure 200.
  • Fig.21a corresponding to Fig.12a
  • Fig.21b corresponding to Fig.12b
  • ID segments 214, 234, 232, 236, and 216 of respective subcomponents 204, 224, 222, 226, and 206 are not labeled in Fig.21b due to spacing limitations. See Fig.12b for identifying segments 214, 234, 232, 236, and 216 in Fig.21b.
  • OI structure 100 Analogous to OI structures 340 and 350, other more easily manufacturable variations of OI structure 100 are configured the same as OI structures 180, 200, 240, 260, 270, 280, 300, 320, and 330 except that each of these other variations lacks FC region 108.
  • VC region 106 in each such variation of structure 180, 200, 240, 260, 270, 280, 300, 320, or 330 operates the same as in that OI structure.
  • Structures 340 and 350 and these other variations of structure 100 are suitable for applications in which region 106 is sufficiently thin that the distance from SF zone 112 to substructure SF zone 342 does not significantly affect structure usage.
  • a wedge is optionally placed alongside SF zone 344 to produce a relatively gradual transition from SF zone 112 to substructure SF zone 342 if the distance from zone 112 to zone 342 would detrimentally affect structure usage.
  • the wedge dimension along zone 342 usually exceeds the wedge dimension along zone 344.
  • the wedge can be of roughly right triangular cross section with the longest surface extending approximately from zone 342 to the intersection of zones 112 and 344. The wedge can be truncated slightly where the longest surface would otherwise meet zone 342.
  • a removable protective cover can be placed over SF zone 112 of each of OI structures 180, 200, 240, 260, 270, 280, 300, 320, 330, 340, and 350, including the wedge-containing variations, when that OI structure is not in use for reducing damage that it would otherwise incur if not so protected.
  • the protective cover is removed before the OI structure is used and reinstalled after use is completed.
  • each OI structure 180, 200, 240, 260, 270, 280, 300, 320, or 330 is mounted in a cavity along surface 102 so that the exposed surface of the cover is approximately coplanar with surface 102 along the cavity opening.
  • SF zone 112 then lies below the cavity opening at least when the OI structure is not in use.
  • the OI structure is preferably provided with apparatus, usually located at least partly along substructure 134, for enabling the OI structure to be moved toward the cavity opening so that zone 112 is approximately coplanar with surface 102 along the cavity opening when the OI structure is in use.
  • the cover is removed shortly before or after the movement is performed. After usage is complete, the OI structure is returned to the cavity, and the cover is reinstalled over the OI structure.
  • Figs.5b and 5c present, as described above, examples of object 104 impacting OC area 116 in OI structure 100 such that print area 118 consists of the area within perimeter band 120.
  • Figs.22a and 22b depict what occurs along surface 102 of structure 100 when object 104 contacts surface 102 such that area 118 lies at least partly around a generally unchanged area 360 of SF zone 112.
  • Area 118 in Figs.22a and 22b has an outer perimeter and an inner perimeter relative to the area's center.
  • VC region 106 appears along unchanged area 360 as color A, rather than as color X, when the IDVC portion (138) temporarily appears as color X.
  • Unchanged area 360 can arise due to various phenomena such as the shape of object 104, the momentum with which it impacts SF zone 112, and deformation that it may undergo in impacting zone 112. If object 104 has a depression along its outer surface at the location where it contacts zone 112, area 360 can arise if the momentum of the impact is insufficient to cause the entire surface of the depression to contact zone 112 with sufficient force to meet the principal TH impact criteria. Deformation incurred by object 104 in impacting zone 112 can be of such a nature as to result in area 360.
  • Fig.22a analogous to Fig.5b, presents an example in which object 104 impacts surface 102 fully within VC SF zone 112.
  • Print area 118 in Fig.22a fully surrounds unchanged area 360 and is shaped like a fully annular band. Area 118 in Fig.22a thus fully outwardly conforms to OC area 116 but does not fully inwardly conform to it. Areas 116 and 118 are, nonetheless, largely concentric.
  • Fig.22b presents an example in which object 104 contacts surface 102 partly within VC SF zone 112 and partly within FC SF zone 114 in the same impact.
  • print area 118 lies partly around unchanged area 360 and is shaped like a partially annular band.
  • OC area 116 extending along part of the SF edge of interface 110 here, print area 118 extends along only a fraction of that SF edge interface part.
  • Area 118 in Fig.22b outwardly conforms mostly, but not fully, to OC area 116 and does not inwardly conform mostly to it.
  • Areas 116 and 118 here are largely concentric.
  • Figs.23a and 23b respectively corresponding to Figs.22a and 22b are side cross sections illustrating what occurs in embodiment 130 of OI structure 100 when object 104 contacts surface 102 so that print area 118 lies at least partly around unchanged area 360 of VC SF zone 112.
  • the presence of area 360 causes IDVC portion 138 to have a shape matching that of print area 118.
  • portion 138 is shaped like a full hollow cylinder in Fig.23a and like a partial hollow cylinder in Fig.23b.
  • Each of OC areas 116 and 124 and SF DF area 122 is shaped like a fully annular band in Fig.23a.
  • each of areas 116 and 122 and OC area 126 is shaped like a partially annular band while total OC area 124 is shaped like a fully annular band.
  • Portion 138 and areas 116, 122, and 124 and, when present, area 126 have the same shapes in embodiments 180, 200, 240, 260, 270, 280, 300, 320, and 330 of structure 100.
  • Figs.24a and 24b depict two embodiments of ISCC structure 132 suitable for OI structure 180, 200, 260, 270, 300, or 330.
  • Each electrical effect mentioned below consists of one or more electrical signals.
  • IS component 182 contains piezoelectric structure 370.
  • the segment of piezoelectric structure 370 in IS segment 192 provides the general impact effect as an electrical effect in response to pressure, specifically excess SF pressure, of object 104 impacting OC area 116 if the impact meets the TH impact criteria.
  • the electrical effect is supplied from structure 370 along an electrical path 372 to CC component 184, specifically CC segment 194.
  • the segment of piezoelectric structure 370 in IS segment 192 provides the first general impact effect as an electrical effect in response to deformation along SF DF area 122 due to pressure, specifically excess SF pressure, caused by object 104 impacting OC area 116.
  • the segment of structure 370 in segment 192 similarly provides the second general impact effect as an electrical effect in response to deformation along internal DF area 308 caused by pressure, specifically excess internal pressure, exerted by DE structure 302 on area 308 due to the impact. Both electrical effects are supplied along path 372 to CC segment 194.
  • IS component 182 in Fig.24b contains piezoelectric structure 374 and effect-modifying structure 376.
  • the segment of piezoelectric structure 374 in IS segment 192 provides an initial electrical effect along an electrical path 378 to effect-modifying structure 376, largely the segment of structure 376 in IS segment 192, in response to pressure, specifically excess SF pressure, of the impact.
  • Structure 376 likewise largely the structure segment in segment 192, modifies the initial electrical effect to produce the general impact effect as a modified electrical effect supplied to CC segment 194 along path 372.
  • the segment of piezoelectric structure 374 in IS segment 192 provides an initial first electrical effect in response to deformation along SF DF area 122 due to pressure, specifically excess SF pressure, caused by the impact.
  • the segment of structure 374 in segment 192 similarly provides an initial second electrical effect in response to deformation along internal DF area 308 due to pressure, specifically excess internal pressure, exerted by DE structure 302 on area 308 caused by the impact.
  • Both initial electrical effects are supplied along path 378 to effect-modifying structure 376, largely the structure segment in IS segment 192.
  • Structure 376 again largely the structure segment in segment 192, modifies the initial first and second electrical effects to produce the first and second general impact effects respectively as modified first and second electrical effects supplied to CC segment 194 along path 372.
  • Effect-modifying structure 376 usually modifies the voltage or/and current of each initial electrical effect to produce the resultant modified electrical effect at modified voltage or/and current suitable for CC component 184.
  • Structure 376 may amplify, or attenuate, the voltage or/and current of each initial electrical effect as well as shifting its voltage level(s).
  • Figs.25a and 25b depict two embodiments of ISCC structure 132 suitable for OI structure 200, 270, 300, or 330.
  • IS component 182 contains piezoelectric structure 370 arranged and operable the same as in Fig.24a.
  • CC component 184 in Fig.25a contains assembly 202 formed with subcomponents 222, 224, and 226.
  • Auxiliary layers 204 and 206, neither shown in Fig.25a, may be present in component 184 of Fig. 25a.
  • ISCC structure 132 in Fig.25a converts the electrical effect on path 372 into principal general CC control signal VnfC formed by the difference between CC values VnC and VfC.
  • Fig.25a illustrates this conversion as occurring within CC component 184, the conversion may occur earlier in the signal processing.
  • Control signal V nfC is applied between electrode structures 224 and 226 so that near CC value V nC is present at the VA location in the segment of the electrode layer in NE segment 234, and far CC value V fC is present at the VA location in the segment of the electrode layer in FE segment 236.
  • IS component 182 in Fig.25b consists of piezoelectric structure 374 and effect-modifying structure 376 arranged and operable the same as in Fig.24b.
  • CC component 184 in Fig.25b contains assembly 202 arranged and operable the same as in Fig.25a.
  • Fig.25b illustrate the conversion of the electrical effect on path 372 into general CC control signal V nfC as occurring within component 184, this conversion may occur earlier in the signal processing.
  • structure 376 in Fig.25b may perform the conversion.
  • Piezoelectric structure 370 or 374 can be any one or more of numerous piezoelectric materials such as ammonium dihydrogen phosphate NH 4 H 2 P0 4 , potassium dihydrogen phosphate KH 2 PO 4 ,
  • Figs.26a and 26b depict how color changing occurs by light reflection in VC region 106 of OI structure 130 or 340.
  • Figs.27a and 27b depict how color changing occurs by light reflection in region 106 of OI structure 180.
  • Figs.28a and 28b depict how color changing occurs by light reflection in some embodiments of region 106 of OI structure 200 or 350.
  • Figs.29a and 29b depict how color changing occurs by light reflection in region 106 of OI structure 240.
  • Figs.30a and 30b depict how color changing occurs by light reflection in region 106 of OI structure 260.
  • Figs.31a and 31b depict how color changing occurs by light reflection in some embodiments of region 106 of OI structure 270.
  • Incident light 380 consists of a mixture of wavelengths across at least one relatively broad part of the visible spectrum.
  • Incident broad-spectrum light 380 typically consists of an appropriate mixture of wavelengths across the entire visible spectrum so as to form light, termed "white light", further labeled with the letter W.
  • white light further labeled with the letter W.
  • Arrows 382 directed away from VC region 106 along SF zone 112 in Fig.26a, 27a, 28a, 29a, 30a, or 31a represent rays of A light leaving region 106.
  • Region 106 reflects part of light 380 and absorbs or/and transmits, preferably absorbs, the remainder of light 380. No internally emitted light leaves region 106 via zone 112 in Fig.26a, 27a, 28a, 29a, 30a, or 31a.
  • a light 382 consists nearly entirely of the reflected part of light 380.
  • a light 382 usually has multiple components as described above but, for simplicity, not indicated in Fig.26a, 27a, 28a, 29a, 30a, or 31a.
  • the light reflection to form most of light 382 can occur along or/and below SF zone 112.
  • the places where the arrows representing light 382 originate in Figs.27a, 28a, 29a, 30a, and 31a indicate the minimum depths below zone 112 at which light forming most of light 382 is reflected.
  • the light reflection forming most of light 382 in Fig.27a occurs along or/and below interface 186.
  • items 384 in core layer 222 are examples of particles off which part of broad-spectrum light 380 reflects to form most of light 382.
  • IDVC portion 138 temporarily reflects part of broad-spectrum light 380 to form reflected light 386 whose rays are represented by arrows leaving portion 138.
  • Portion 138 absorbs or/and transmits, preferably absorbs, the remainder of light 380 striking it. No internally emitted light leaves portion 138 via print area 118 in Fig.26b, 27b, 28b, 29b, 30b, or 31b.
  • X light thus consists nearly entirely of reflected light 386. Also, the remainder of VC region 106 continues to reflect A light 382.
  • Reflected X light 386 usually has multiple components as described above but, for simplicity, not shown in Fig.26b, 27b, 28b, 29b, 30b, or 31b.
  • the light reflection to form most of light 386 can occur along or/and below print area 118.
  • the places where the arrows representing light 386 originate in Figs.27b, 28b, 29b, 30b, and 31b indicate the minimum depths below area 118 at which light forming most of light 386 is reflected.
  • the light reflection forming most of light 386 in Fig.27b occurs along or/and below IF segment 196.
  • items 388 in ID segment 232 of core layer 222 are examples of selected ones of particles 384.
  • Selected particles 388 have translated or/and rotated so that part of broad- spectrum light 380 striking particles 388 reflects to form most of light 386.
  • Figs.28b and 31b depict particles 388 as being adjacent to NE segment 234 and thus averagely remote from FE segment 236 as arises in the version of the mid-reflection embodiment of CC component 184 where layer 222 contains charged particles of one color distributed in a fluid of another color.
  • selected particles 388 can translate or/and rotate as described above for any of the other versions of the mid-reflection embodiment of component 184.
  • Figs.32a and 32b depict how color changing occurs primarily by light emission in VC region 106 of OI structure 130 or 340.
  • Figs.33a and 33b depict how color changing occurs primarily by light emission in region 106 of OI structure 180.
  • Figs.34a and 34b depict how color changing occurs primarily by light emission in region 106 of OI structure 200 or 350.
  • Figs.35a and 35b depict how color changing occurs primarily by light emission in region 106 of OI structure 240.
  • Figs.36a and 36b depict how color changing occurs primarily by light emission in region 106 of OI structure 260.
  • Figs.37a and 37b depict how color changing occurs primarily by light emission in region 106 of OI structure 270.
  • FIG.32a The normal state is presented in Figs.32a, 33a, 34a, 35a, 36a, and 37a where the arrows representing rays of broad-spectrum light 380 are shown in dotted line because change in the reflection of part of light 380 is usually a secondary contributor to color changing.
  • Arrows 392 directed away from VC region 106 along SF zone 112 represent A light leaving region 106.
  • Region 106 again reflects part of light 380 and absorbs or/and transmits, preferably absorbs, the remainder of light 380.
  • internally emitted light can leave region 106 via zone 112 during the normal state.
  • a light 392 consists of the reflected part of light 380 and any such emitted light.
  • a light 392 usually has multiple components as described above but, for simplicity, not shown in Fig.32a, 33a, 34a, 35a, 36a, or 37a.
  • the locations where the arrows representing light 392 originate in Figs. 32a, 33a, 34a, 35a, 36a, and 37a indicate depths below SF zone 112 at which any emitted part of light 392 can be emitted. Because no significant amount of light emission may occur during the normal state, the arrows representing light 392 are shown in dashed line extending from their potential emission-origination locations upward to the locations of the minimum depths below zone 112 at which reflected light in light 392 is reflected.
  • arrows representing light 392 in Fig.32a are shown in dashed line extending from zone 112 to underlying locations because any emitted light in light 392 is usually emitted below zone 112.
  • the arrows representing light 392 are shown without dashed-line as originating at the interface between FE structure 226 and FA layer 206 because (i) reflected light in light 392 can be reflected at that interface and (ii) any emitted light in light 392 can be emitted by layer 206.
  • X light 396 directed away from IDVC portion 138 along print area 118 represent X light leaving portion 138.
  • X light 396 consists of a reflected part of broad-spectrum light 380 striking portion 138 and usually light emitted by it.
  • Portion 138 absorbs or/and transmits, preferably absorbs, the remainder of light 380 striking it.
  • X light 396 contains light emitted by portion 138, the emitted light usually forms most of light 396.
  • the remainder of VC region 106 continues to reflect A light 392.
  • X light 396 usually has multiple components as described above, but for simplicity, not indicted in Fig.32b, 33b, 34b, 35b, 36b, or 37b.
  • the locations where the arrows representing light 396 originate in Figs. 32b, 33b, 34b, 35b, 36b, and 37b indicate depths below print area 118 at which the emitted part, if any, of light 396 can be emitted. Because no significant amount of light emission sometimes occurs during the changed state, the arrows representing light 396 are shown in dashed line extending from their potential emission- origination locations upward to the locations of the minimum depths below area 118 at which reflected light in light 396 is reflected.
  • the arrow representing light 396 in Fig.32b is shown in dashed line extending from area 118 to an underlying location because any emitted light in light 396 is usually emitted below area 118.
  • the arrows representing light 396 are shown without dashed line as originating at the interface between FE segment 236 and FA segment 216 because (i) reflected light in light 396 can be reflected at that interface and (ii) any emitted light in light 396 can be emitted by segment 216.
  • Figs.38a and 38b depict the layout of a general embodiment 400 of OI structure 100 in which VC region 106 is allocated into a multiplicity, at least four, usually at least 100, typically thousands to millions, of principal independently operable VC cells 404 arranged laterally in a layer as a two- dimensional array, each VC cell 404 extending to a corresponding part 406 of SF zone 112.
  • the dotted lines in Fig.38 indicate interfaces between SF parts 406 of adjacent cells 404.
  • the general layout of OI structure 400 is shown in Fig.38a.
  • Fig.38b depicts an example of color change that occurs along surface 102 upon being impacted by object 104 indicated in dashed line at a location subsequent to impact.
  • Each cell 404 functions as a pixel cell, its SF part 406 being a pixel.
  • VC cells 404 consist of (a) peripheral cells along the lateral periphery 408 of VC region 106, each peripheral cell having sides respectively adjoining sides of at least two other peripheral cells, and (b) interior cells spaced apart from lateral periphery 408, each interior cell having sides respectively adjoining sides of at least four other cells 404.
  • Cells 404 usually arrayed in rows and columns across region 106, are preferably identical but can variously differ.
  • the row and column directions respectively are the horizontal and vertical directions in Fig.38.
  • Peripheral cells 404 may sometimes differ from interior cells 404.
  • Cell SF parts 406 are usually shaped like polygons, preferably quadrilaterals, more preferably rectangles, typically squares as shown in the example of Fig.38. For rectangles, including squares, each cell column extends perpendicular to each cell row. Other shapes for SF parts 406 are discussed below in regard to Figs.87a and 87b.
  • Cells 404 appear along their parts 406 of SF zone 112 as principal color A during the normal state, A light normally leaving each cell 404 along its SF part 406.
  • a cell 404 is a principal CM cell if it temporarily appears as changed color X along its part 406 of zone 112 as a result of object 104 impacting OC area 116, X light temporarily leaving each CM cell 404 along its part 406 of print area 118 during the changed state.
  • CM means criteria-meeting.
  • OC area 116 is again capable of being of substantially arbitrary shape.
  • Each cell 404 that meets principal cellular TH impact criteria in response to object 104 impacting OC area 116 is a principal TH CM cell.
  • the principal cellular TH impact criteria embody the principal basic TH impact criteria. Since the principal basic TH impact criteria can vary with where print area 118 occurs in SF zone 112, the cellular TH impact criteria can vary with where each cell's SF part 406 occurs in zone 112.
  • each TH CM cell 404 temporarily appears as color X during the changed state.
  • other impact criteria must also be met for a TH CM cell 404 to appear as color X during the changed state.
  • Each such TH CM cell 404 then becomes a principal full CM cell, sometimes simply a CM cell.
  • a cell 404 significantly affected by the impact is a candidate for a CM cell.
  • a candidate cell 404 meeting the cellular TH impact criteria temporarily becomes a TH CM cell and either temporarily appears as color X during the changed state or, if subject to other impact criteria, becomes a full CM cell and temporarily appears as color X if the other impact criteria are met.
  • a cell 404, including a candidate cell 404, not meeting the cellular TH impact criteria appears as color A during the changed state. The same applies to a cell 404 for which the other impact criteria are not met in a cellular OI embodiment subject to the other impact criteria.
  • ID group of cells 404 that temporarily constitute CM cells, the ID cell group being a plurality of less than all cells 404.
  • the ID cell group termed ID cell group 138*, embodies IDVC portion 138.
  • SF parts 406 of CM cells 404 in ID cell group 138* constitute print area 118 and temporarily appear as color X.
  • CM cells 404 in cell group 138* are usually cell-wise continuous in that each CM cell 404 adjoins, or is connected 404 via one or more other CM cells 404 to, each other CM cell 404.
  • the cellular TH impact criteria for each cell 404 can consist of multiple sets of different principal cellular TH impact criteria having the same characteristics as, and employable the same as, the sets of principal basic TH impact criteria. Hence, the sets of different principal cellular TH impact criteria respectively correspond to different specific changed colors (X 1 - X n ). Each cell 404 meeting the cellular TH impact criteria in a cellular OI embodiment not subject to other impact criteria appears as the specific changed color (X i ) for the set of cellular TH impact criteria actually met by the impact.
  • Each cell 404 meeting the cellular TH impact criteria in a cellular OI embodiment subject to other impact criteria appears as the specific changed color (Xi) for the set of cellular TH impact criteria actually met by the impact if the other impact criteria are met.
  • each cell 404 meeting the cellular TH impact criteria is solely capable of appearing as the specific changed color (X i ) for the set of cellular TH impact criteria actually met by the impact.
  • Print area 118 usually variously extends inside and outside OC area 116 depending on the cellular TH impact criteria. Arranging for areas 116 and 118 to have this type of relationship to each other generally enables the contour of print area 118 to better match the contour of OC area 116 because cell SF parts 406 are of finite size, quadrilaterals here, rather than being points.
  • An indicator ⁇ Rproc of how close the contour of print area 118 matches the contour of OC area 116 is the sum of the fractional differences in area by which print area 118 extends inside and outside OC area 116.
  • a pri and A pro respectively represent the areas by which print area 118 extends inside and outside OC area 116.
  • Fractional inside-and-outside area difference ⁇ R proc is then (A pri + A pro )/A oc where A oc is again the area of OC area 116.
  • Fractional area difference ⁇ Rproc devolves to Apri/Aoc if print area 118 only extends inside OC area 116 and to Apro/Aoc if print area 118 only extends outside OC area 116.
  • fractional difference ⁇ Rproc averages usually no more than 10%, preferably no more than 8%, more preferably no more than 6%, even more preferably no more 4%, further preferably no more than 2%, further more preferably no more than 1%.
  • Figs.39a and 39b depict quantized print area 118 at two different cell densities for an example in which OC area 116 is a true circle.
  • Quantized print area 118 here is a quantized "circle” lying fully within the true circle, subject to certain edges of the quantized circle possibly touching the true circle.
  • Cell SF parts 406 in Fig.39 are identical squares, the squares within the quantized circle shown in solid line for clarity.
  • Area At of the true circle formed by OC area 116 in Fig.39 is pidt 2 /4 where dt is the diameter of the true circle. Letting d s represent the dimension of each side of each square, area A q of the quantized circle is n min d 5 2 where n min is the minimum number of squares fully within the true circle, with certain edges of certain squares possibly touching the true circle, for any location of the true circle on the grid of squares. The ratio R qt of area Aq of the quantized circle to area At of the true circle is 4nminds 2 /pidt 2 .
  • circle area ratio Rqt is then 4n min /piR cs 2 .
  • Circle area ratio R qt approaches 1 as the quantized circle approaches a true circle of diameter d t .
  • fractional circle area difference ⁇ R qt between the contours of the true and quantized circles is 1 - Rqt. Fractional circle area difference ⁇ Rqt approaches zero as the quantized circle approaches the true circle and is another indicator of how close the contour of print area 118 matches the contour of OC area 116.
  • the quantized circle often contains more squares than minimum number n min used in deriving fractional difference ⁇ R qt .
  • Difference ⁇ R qt represents the "worst-case" matching because the difference between the contours of the quantized and true circles is often less than that indicated by difference ⁇ R qt .
  • Fig.40 shows how fractional circle area difference ⁇ Rqt decreases with increasing even-integer values of circle-diameter-to-square-side ratio Rcs.
  • Table 2 presents the data, including minimum number n min of squares and quantized-circle-to-true-circle area ratio R qt , used in generating Fig.40.
  • diameter- to-side ratio R cs only has even integer values in Fig.40 and Table 2, ratio R cs can have odd integer values as well as non-integer values.
  • Object 104 occupies a maximum area Aoc along SF zone 112 while contacting OC area 116.
  • true circle area A t is approximately OC area A oc .
  • N L represent the lineal density (or resolution), in squares per unit length, of squares needed to achieve a particular value of fractional difference ⁇ R qt .
  • lineal square density NL is estimated as (nmin/Aoc) 1/2 for any ⁇ Rqt value in Table 2.
  • lineal density NL is estimated using the same formula by extending Table 2 to suitably higher values of minimum square number n min . Because number n min can become very high, extending Table 2 may entail using a suitable computer program.
  • OC area A oc for a tennis ball embodying object 104 is typically 15 - 20 cm 2 .
  • a ⁇ Rqt value of 5 - 6% is desired.
  • the corresponding nmin value is roughly 1,500 - 2,000.
  • the desired NL value is approximately 10 squares/cm or 10 pixels/cm since each square is a pixel.
  • State-of-the art imaging systems easily achieve resolutions of 100 pixels/cm and can usually readily achieve resolutions of 200 pixels/cm.
  • a ⁇ R qt value of 5 - 6% is well within the state of the art. ⁇ Rqt values considerably less than 5 - 6% are expected to be readily achievable with OI structure 400.
  • print area 118 often extends partly outside OC area 116 as occurs in the example of Fig.38b. Also, some cell SF parts 406 along the perimeter of OC area 116 may not form part of print area 118. In the example of Fig.38b, each cell SF part 406 along the perimeter of OC area 116 forms a portion of print area 118 only when approximately half or more of that SF part's area is within OC area 116.
  • Fractional inside-and-outside area difference ⁇ Rproc for the model of Fig.39 equals fractional circle area difference ⁇ Rqt when the number of squares fully within area 116 is minimum number nmin.
  • Circle area difference ⁇ R qt can then serve as an estimate of inside-and-outside area difference ⁇ R proc for approximately determining the minimum linear cell density needed to achieve a particular ⁇ R proc value.
  • Lineal density N L in cells 404 per unit length is usually at least 10 cells/cm, preferably at least 20 cells/cm, more preferably at least 40 cells/cm, even more preferably at least 80 cells/cm, in both the row and column directions.
  • Figs.41a, 41b, 42a, 42b, 43a, 43b, 44a, 44b, 45a, 45b, 46a, 46b, 47a, 47b, 48a, 48b, 49a, 49b, 50a, and 50b present side cross sections of ten embodiments of OI structure 400 where each pair of Figs. ja and jb for integer j varying from 41 to 50 depicts a different embodiment.
  • the basic side cross sections, and thus now the ten embodiments appear in the normal state, are respectively shown in Figs.41a, 42a, 43a, 44a, 45a, 46a, 47a, 48a, 49a, and 50a corresponding to Fig.38a.
  • Figs.41b, 42b, 43b, 44b, 45b, 46b, 47b, 48b, 49b, and 50b corresponding to Fig.38b present examples of changes that occur during the changed state when object 104 contacts surface 102 fully within SF zone 112.
  • SF DF area 122 which usually encompasses most of principal OC area 116
  • total OC area 124 which is identical to OC area 116 in the examples of Figs.41b, 42b, 43b, 44b, 45b, 46b, 47b, 48b, 49b, and 50b, are not separately labeled in those figures to simplify the labeling.
  • each cell 404 consists of multiple parts
  • the parts of each cell 404 are not separately labeled to simplify the labeling.
  • each such cell part meets the transmissivity specification given above for corresponding subregion 242, 182, 302, 204, 224, 202, 222, or 226 containing that cell part.
  • each such combination of functionally different cell parts meets the transmissivity specification given above for the corresponding combination of subregions 242, 182, 302, 204, 224, 202, 222, and 226 containing that combination of cell parts.
  • Figs.41a and 41b they illustrate a general embodiment 410 of OI structure 400 for which automatic duration ⁇ t drau of the changed state is passively determined by the properties of the material in ISCC structure 132.
  • OI structure 410 is also an embodiment of OI structure 130.
  • the lateral (side) boundary of each cell 404 usually extends perpendicular to its part 406 of SF zone 112 so as to appear largely as a pair of straight lines along a plane extending through that cell 404 perpendicular to zone 112. See Fig.41a.
  • Each cell 404 here consists of a part, termed an ISCC part (or element), of ISCC structure 132.
  • Each cell 404 here operates the same during the normal state as VC region 106 in OI structure 130.
  • a light normally leaving each cell 404 via its SF part 406 is formed with ARic light reflected by its ISCC part, any AEic light emitted by its ISCC part, and any substructure-reflected ARsb light passing through its ISCC part.
  • Each cell 404 normally appears as color A.
  • Each cell 404 having its SF part 406 partly or fully in OC area 116 is a candidate for a CM cell.
  • Each CM cell 404 operates the same during the changed state as IDVC portion 138 in structure 130.
  • X light temporarily leaving each CM cell 404 via its part 406 of print area 118 is formed with XRic light reflected by its ISCC part, any XEic light emitted by its ISCC part, and any substructure-reflected XRsb light passing through its ISCC part.
  • CM cells 404 usually enter the changed state simultaneously and leave the changed state simultaneously.
  • CC duration ⁇ t dr of each CM cell 404 is largely equal to CC duration ⁇ t dr of OI structure 400 as a whole.
  • Automatic duration ⁇ tdrau of each CM cell 404 is likewise largely equal to automatic duration ⁇ tdrau of structure 400 as a whole.
  • each cell 404 can, subject to the potential modifications described below for Fig.51, be embodied in any of the ways described above for embodying ISCC structure 132 in OI structure 130.
  • each cell's ISCC part can be formed essentially solely with IS CR or CE material.
  • Automatic CC duration ⁇ tdrau for each cell 404 when it is a CM cell is then base portion ⁇ tdrbs.
  • Figs.42a and 42b illustrate an embodiment 420 of OI structure 410.
  • OI structure 420 is also an embodiment of OI structure 180.
  • ISCC structure 132 of VC region 106 here consists of components 182 and 184 deployed as in OI structure 180 to meet at interface 186.
  • Each cell 404 here consists of an ISCC part of ISCC structure 132, the ISCC part formed with (a) a part, termed an IS part, of IS component 182 and (b) a part, termed a CC part, of underlying CC component 184.
  • the IS part of each cell 404 extends to its SF part 406 and between its boundary portions in IS component 182.
  • the CC part of each cell 404 extends to substructure 134 and between that cell's boundary portions in CC component 184.
  • the cell's IS and CC parts meet along a corresponding part 424 of interface 186.
  • each cell 404 respectively operate the same during the normal state as components 182 and 184 in OI structure 180.
  • Total ATcc light normally leaving the CC part of each cell 404 via its IF part 424 consists of ARcc light reflected by its CC part, any AEcc light emitted by its CC part, and any ARsb light passing through its CC part.
  • a light normally leaving each cell 404 via its SF part 406 consists of ARcc light and any AEcc and ARsb light passing through its IS part and any ARis light reflected by its IS part.
  • Each cell 404 having its SF part 406 partly or fully in OC area 116 is a candidate for a CM cell.
  • Each CM cell 404 operates essentially the same during the changed state as IDVC portion 138 in structure 130.
  • each CM cell 404 temporarily appears as color X (a) in some general OI embodiments if it meets the cellular TH impact criteria so as to be a TH CM cell or (b) in other general OI embodiments if it is provided with a principal cellular CC control signal generated in response to it meeting the cellular TH impact criteria sometimes dependent on other impact criteria also being met in those other embodiments so that it becomes a full CM cell.
  • X light temporarily leaving each CM cell 404 via its part 406 of print area 118 is formed with XRic light reflected by its ISCC part, any XEic light emitted by its ISCC part, and any substructure- reflected XRsb light passing through its ISCC part.
  • a light continues to leave each other cell 404 during the changed state.
  • the cellular CC control signals provided to all CM cells 404 implement the general CC control signal.
  • each CM cell 404 responds to object 104 impacting OC area 116 so as to meet the cellular TH impact criteria for that CM cell 404 by providing a principal cellular ID impact effect usually resulting from the pressure of the impact on area 116 or from deformation that object 104 causes along SF DF area 122.
  • the CC part of each CM cell 404 responds (a) in some general OI embodiments to its cellular ID impact effect by causing that CM cell 404 to temporarily appear as color X or (b) in other general OI embodiments to its cellular CC control signal generated in response to its cellular impact effect sometimes dependent on other impact criteria also being met in those other embodiments by causing that CM cell 404 to temporarily appear as color X.
  • each CM cell 404 changes in such a way that XRcc light reflected by its CC part and any XEcc light emitted by its CC part temporarily leave its CC part.
  • Total XTcc light temporarily leaving the CC part of each CM cell 404 via its IF part 424 consists of XRcc light, any XEcc light, and any XRsb light passing through its CC part.
  • X light temporarily leaving each CM cell 404 via its part 406 of print area 118 consists of XRcc light and any XEcc and XRsb light passing through its IS part and any ARis light reflected by its IS part. A light continues to leave the remainder of cells 404.
  • the cellular impact effects of all CM cells 404 implement the general impact effect.
  • each cell 404 here can, subject to the potential modifications described below for Fig.52, be respectively embodied in any of the ways described above for embodying components 182 and 184 of OI structure 180.
  • the cell's CC part can be embodied as reduced-size CR or CE CC structure in basically any of the ways that CC component 184 is embodied as a CR or CE CC component.
  • Figs.43a and 43b illustrate an embodiment 430 of OI structure 420.
  • OI structure 430 is also an embodiment of OI structure 200 and thus of OI structure 180.
  • CC component 184 is formed with assembly 202 and optional auxiliary layers 204 and 206. See Fig.43a.
  • the CC part of each cell 404 consists of (a) a part, termed an (electrode) AB part, of assembly 202, (b) a part, termed an NA part, of NA layer 204, and (c) a part, termed an FA part, of FA layer 206.
  • the AB, NA, and FA parts of each cell 404 each extend between the cell's lateral boundary portions in component 184.
  • the NA part of each cell 404 extends to its part 424 of interface 186.
  • the FA part of each cell 404 extends to its part of interface 136.
  • the AB part of each cell 404 extends between its NA and FA parts.
  • each cell 404 respectively operate the same during the normal state as assembly 202 and auxiliary layers 204 and 206 in OI structure 200.
  • the cell's FA part specifically operates during the normal state according to a light non-outputting normal cellular far auxiliary mode or one of several versions of a light outputting normal cellular far auxiliary mode.
  • CFA hereafter means cellular far auxiliary. Largely no light leaves the FA part of each cell 404 along its AB part in the light non-outputting normal CFA mode.
  • the light outputting normal CFA mode consists of one or both of the following actions: (a) a substantial part of any ARsb light leaving substructure 134 along the FA part of each cell 404 passes through its FA part and (b) ADfa light formed with any ARfa light reflected by its FA part and any AEfa light emitted by its FA part leaves its FA part along its AB part.
  • Total ATfa light normally leaving the FA part of each cell 404 along its AB part consists of any such ARfa, AEfa, and ARsb light.
  • each cell 404 operates during the normal state according to a light non-outputting normal cellular assembly mode or one of a group of versions of a light outputting normal cellular assembly mode.
  • CAB hereafter means cellular assembly. Largely no light leaves the AB part of each cell 404 along its NA part in the light non-outputting normal CAB mode.
  • the light outputting normal CAB mode consists of one or more of the following actions: (a) a substantial part of any ARsb light passing through the FA part of each cell 404 passes through its AB part, (b) substantial parts of any ARfa and AEfa light provided by its FA part pass through its AB part, and (c) ADab light formed with any ARab light reflected by its AB part and any AEab light emitted by its AB part leaves its AB part along its NA part.
  • Total ATab light normally leaving the AB part of each cell 404 along its NA part consists of any such ARab, AEab, ARfa, AEfa, and ARsb light.
  • Each cell's NA part operates as follows during the normal state.
  • Substantial parts of any ARab, AEab, ARfa, AEfa, and ARsb light leaving the AB part of each cell 404 pass through its NA part.
  • the NA part of each cell 404 may normally reflect ARna light.
  • Total ATcc light normally leaving the NA part of each cell 404, and thus its CC part, via its IF part 424 consists of any such ARab, AEab, ARfa, AEfa, ARna, and ARsb light.
  • each cell 404 operates the same during the normal state as IS component 182 of OI structure 420 where ARcc light in structure 420 consists of any ARab, ARfa, ARna, and ARsb light and where AEcc light in structure 420 consists of any AEab and AEfa light. Substantial parts of any ARab, AEab, ARfa, AEfa, ARna, and ARsb light leaving the NA part of each cell 404 pass through its IS part.
  • any ARis light normally reflected by the IS part of each cell 404 any ARab, AEab, ARfa, AEfa, ARis, ARna, and ARsb light normally leaving its IS part, and thus that cell 404 itself, via its SF part 406 form A light.
  • each CM cell 404 Upon going to the changed state, the AB, NA, and FA parts of each CM cell 404 respectively respond to the cellular impact effect provided by its IS part the same as AB segment 212 and auxiliary segments 214 and 216 in IDVC portion 138 of OI structure 200 respond to the general impact effect. See Fig.43b. More particularly, the FA part of each CM cell 404 temporarily operates, usually passively, according to a light non- outputting changed CFA mode or one of several versions of a light outputting changed CFA mode. Largely no light leaves the FA part of each CM cell 404 along its AB part in the light non-outputting changed CFA mode.
  • the light outputting changed CFA mode consists of one or both of the following actions: (a) a substantial part of any XRsb light leaving substructure 134 along the FA part of each CM cell 404 passes through its FA part and (b) XDfa light formed with any XRfa light reflected by its FA part and any XEfa light emitted by its FA part leaves its FA part along its AB part.
  • Reflection of XRfa light or/and emission of XEfa light leaving the FA part of each CM cell 404 usually occur under control of its AB part operating in response (a) in first cellular OI embodiments to its cellular impact effect for the impact meeting its cellular TH impact criteria or (b) in second cellular OI embodiments to its cellular CC control signal generated in response to its cellular impact effect sometimes (conditionally) dependent on other impact criteria also being met in the second embodiments.
  • FA layer 206 normally reflects ARfa light or/and emits AEfa light
  • a change in which largely no light temporarily leaves the FA part of each CM cell 404 likewise usually occurs under control of its AB part responding to its cellular impact effect or its cellular control signal.
  • Total XTfa light leaving the FA part of each CM cell 404 along its AB part consists of any such XRfa, XEfa, and XRsb light.
  • each CM cell 404 responds (a) in the first cellular OI embodiments to its cellular impact effect or (b) in the second cellular OI embodiments to its cellular CC control signal generated in response to the effect sometimes dependent on both its cellular TH impact criteria and other criteria being met by temporarily operating according to a light non-outputting changed CAB mode or one of a group of versions of a light outputting changed CAB mode. Largely no light leaves the AB part of each CM cell 404 along its NA part in the light non-outputting changed CAB mode.
  • the light outputting changed CAB mode consists of one or more of the following actions: (a) a substantial part of any XRsb light passing through the FA part of each CM cell 404 passes through its AB part, (b) substantial parts of any XRfa and XEfa light provided by its FA part pass through its AB part, and (c) XDab light formed with any XRab light reflected by its AB part and any XEab light emitted by its AB part leaves its AB part along its NA part.
  • Total XTab light leaving the AB part of each CM cell 404 along its NA part consists of any such XRab, XEab, XRfa, XEfa, and XRsb light.
  • the NA part of each CM cell 404 operates as follows during the changed state. Substantial parts of any XRab, XEab, XRfa, XEfa, and XRsb light leaving the AB part of each CM cell 404 pass through its NA part. If NA layer 204 reflects ARna light during the normal state, the NA part of each CM cell 404 reflects XRna light, usually largely ARna light, during the changed state.
  • Total XTcc light leaving the NA part of each CM cell 404, and thus its CC part, along its IF part 424 consists of any such XRab, XEab, XRfa, XEfa, XRna, and XRsb light.
  • each CM cell 404 operates the same during the changed state as IS segment 192 of OI structure 420 where XRcc light consists of any XRab, XRfa, XRna, and XRsb light and where XEcc light consists of any XEab and XEfa light. Substantial parts of any XRab, XEab, XRfa, XEfa, XRna, and XRsb light leaving the AB part of each CM cell 404 pass through its IS part.
  • either of the changed CAB modes can generally be combined with either of the normal CAB modes, including any of the versions of the light outputting normal CAB mode, in an embodiment of CC component 184 except for combining the light non-outputting changed CAB mode with the light non-outputting normal CAB mode provided, however, that the operation of the changed CAB mode is compatible with the operation of the normal CAB mode.
  • this compatibility requirement may effectively preclude combining certain versions of the light outputting changed CAB mode with certain versions of the light outputting normal CAB mode.
  • Assembly 202 here consists of core layer 222 and electrode structures 224 and 226.
  • Each cell's AB part is formed with (a) a part, termed a core part, of layer 222, (b) a part, termed an NE part, of NE structure 224, and (c) a part, termed an FE part, of FE structure 226.
  • the core part of each cell 404 extends between its NE and FE parts which respectively meet its NA and FA parts.
  • the core, NE, and FE parts of each cell 404 also each extend between its lateral boundary portions in assembly 202.
  • Each cell's NE part contains a near electrode of the electrode layer in NE structure 224.
  • Each cell's FE part similarly contains a far electrode of the electrode layer in FE structure 226.
  • the electrodes in each cell 404 are at least partly located opposite each other.
  • At least part, termed the core section, of the core part of each cell 404 is located at least partly between its electrodes.
  • Fig.53 dealt with below, presents an example of this configuration for the core section and electrodes of each cell 404.
  • each cell 404 respectively operate the same during the normal state as core layer 222, NE structure 224, and FE structure 226 in OI structure 200.
  • Controllable voltage V n on each cell's near electrode is normally at near normal control value VnN.
  • Controllable voltage Vf on each cell's far electrode is normally at far normal control value VfN.
  • Control voltage Vnf applied by the electrodes in each cell 404 across its core section is normally at normal control value V nfN equal to V nN - V fN .
  • Value V nfN is chosen such that each cell 404 normally appears as color A.
  • each cell's FE part undergoes the following normal-state light processing. Largely no light leaves the FE part of each cell 404 along its core part if its AB part is in the light non-outputting normal CAB mode.
  • One or more of the following actions occur with the FE part of each cell 404 if its AB part is in the light outputting normal CAB mode: (a) a substantial part of any ARsb light passing through its FA part passes through its FE part, (b) substantial parts of any ARfa and AEfa light provided by its FA part pass through its FE part, and (c) its FE part reflects ARfe light leaving its FE part along its core part.
  • Total ATfe light normally leaving the FE part of each cell 404 along its core part consists of any such ARfa, AEfa, ARfe, and ARsb light.
  • Each cell's core part undergoes the following normal-state light processing. Largely no light leaves the core part of each cell 404 along its NE part if its AB part is in the light non-outputting normal CAB mode.
  • One or more of the following actions occur in the core part of each cell 404 if its AB part is in the light outputting normal CAB mode so as to implement that mode for its core part: (a) a substantial part of any ARsb light passing through its FE part passes through its core part, (b) substantial parts of any ARfa and AEfa light passing through its FE part pass through its core part, (c) a substantial part of any ARfe light reflected by its FE part passes through its core part, and (d) ADcl light formed with any ARcl light reflected by its core part and any AEcl light emitted by its core part leaves its core part along its NE part.
  • Total ATcl light normally leaving the core part of each cell 404 along its NE part consists of any such ARcl
  • Each cell's NE part undergoes the following normal-state light processing. Substantial parts of any ARcl, AEcl, ARfa, AEfa, ARfe, and ARsb light leaving the core part of each cell 404 pass through its NE part. In addition, the NE part of each cell 404 may normally reflect ARne light. Total ATab light normally leaving the NE part, and thus the AB part, of each cell 404 along its NA part consists of any such ARcl, AEcl, ARfa, AEfa, ARne, ARfe, and ARsb light.
  • Total ATcc light of each cell 404 consists of any ARcl, AEcl, ARfa, AEfa, ARna, ARne, ARfe, and ARsb light leaving that cell 404 along its IF part 424. Any ARcl, AEcl, ARfa, AEfa, ARis, ARna, ARne, ARfe, and ARsb light normally leaving each cell 404 via its SF part 406 form A light.
  • control voltage Vnf applied by the two electrodes in each CM cell 404 across its core section goes to changed control value VnfC equal to VnC - VfC in response (a) in the first cellular OI embodiments to its cellular impact effect provided by its IS part for the impact meeting its cellular TH impact criteria or (b) in the second cellular OI embodiments to its cellular CC control signal generated in response to the effect sometimes dependent on other impact criteria also being met in the second embodiments.
  • Voltage Vn on the near electrode in each CM cell 404 is at near CC value VnC.
  • Voltage Vf on the far electrode in each CM cell 404 is at far CC value VfC.
  • CC values VnC and VfC are chosen such that changed value V nfC differs materially from normal value V nfN .
  • the V nf change across the core section in each CM cell 404 causes total light XTcl leaving its core part during the changed state to differ materially from total light ATcl leaving its core part during the normal state.
  • Total XTab light of each CM cell 404 differs materially from its total ATab light. This enables each CM cell 404 to temporarily appear as color X.
  • the FE part of each CM cell 404 undergoes the following changed-state light processing. Largely no light leaves the FE part of each CM cell 404 if its AB part is in the light non-outputting changed CAB mode.
  • One or more of the following actions occur with the FE part of each CM cell 404 if its AB part is in the light outputting changed CAB mode: (a) a substantial part of any XRsb light passing through its FA part passes through its FE part, (b) substantial parts of any XRfa and XEfa light provided by its FA part pass through its FE part, and (c) its FE part reflects XRfe light leaving its FR part along its core part. Total XTfe light leaving the FE part of each CM cell 404 along its core part consists of any such XRfa, XEfa, XRfe, and XRsb light.
  • each CM cell 404 responds (a) in the first cellular OI embodiments to its cellular impact effect or (b) in the second cellular OI embodiments to its cellular CC control signal generated in response to the effect sometimes dependent on both its cellular TH impact criteria and other criteria being met by undergoing the following changed-state light processing. Largely no light leaves the core part of each CM cell 404 along its NE part if its AB part is in the light non-outputting changed CAB mode.
  • One or more of the following actions occur in the core part of each CM cell 404 if its AB part is in the light outputting changed CAB mode so as to implement that mode for its core part: (a) a substantial part of any XRsb light passing through its FE part passes through its core part, (b) substantial parts of any XRfa and XEfa light passing through its FE part pass through its core part, (c) a substantial part of any XRfe light reflected by its FE part passes through its core part, and (d) XDcl light formed with XRcl light reflected by its core part and any XEcl light emitted by its core part leaves its core part along its NE part.
  • Total XTcl light of each CM cell 404 consists of any such XRcl, XEcl, XRfa, XEfa, XRfe, and XRsb light.
  • Substantial parts of any XRcl, XEcl, XRfa, XEfa, XRfe, and XRsb light leaving the core part of each CM cell 404 pass through its NE part. If the NE part of each cell 404 reflects ARne light during the normal state, the NE part of each CM cell 404 reflects XRne light, usually largely ARne light, during the changed state.
  • Total XTab light leaving the NE part, and thus the AB part, of each CM cell 404 along its NA part consists of any such XRcl, XEcl, XRfa, XEfa, XRne, XRfe, and XRsb light.
  • Total XTcc light of each CM cell 404 consists of any XRcl, XEcl, XRfa, XEfa, XRna, XRne, XRfe, and XRsb light leaving that CM cell 404 via its IF part 424.
  • each cell 404 can, subject to the potential modifications described below for Fig.53, be embodied in any of the ways described above for respectively embodying assembly 202 and auxiliary layers 204 and 206 in OI structure 200. Also subject to those potential modifications, the core, NE, and FE parts of each cell's AB part can be embodied in any of the ways described above for respectively embodying core layer 222 and electrode structures 224 and 226 in OI structure 200.
  • the NA part of each cell 404 can include a programmable RA part (not separately shown), typically separated from that cell's AB part by insulating material, for being electrically programmed subsequent to manufacture of OI structure 430 for adjusting colors A and X for that cell 404.
  • the RA cell parts are preferably clear transparent prior to programming. The programming causes the RA part to become tinted transparent or more tinted transparent if it was originally tinted transparent. ARna and Xna light are thereby adjusted for each cell 404. As a result, colors A and X for each cell 404 are respectively adjusted from pre-programming colors Ai and Xi to post-programming colors Af and Xf.
  • the programming of the RA cell parts can be done by various techniques.
  • a blanket conductive programming layer is temporarily deployed on SF zone 112 prior to programming.
  • a programming voltage is applied between the programming layer and the NE part of each cell 404 sufficiently long to cause its RA part to change to a desired tinted transparency.
  • the programming layer is usually removed from zone 112.
  • each cell 404 includes a permanent conductive programming part, typically constituted with part of the NA part of that cell 404, lying between its SF part 406 and its RA part.
  • a programming voltage is applied between the programming part of each cell 404 and its NE part sufficiently long to cause its RA part to change to a desired tinted transparency.
  • the tinted adjustment can be caused by introduction of RA ions into the RA parts.
  • the core part of each cell 404 can include a programmable RA part lying along that cell's NE part and having the foregoing transparency characteristics.
  • the core RA part of each cell 404 is programmed to a desired tinted transparency by applying a programming voltage between its NE and FE parts for a suitable time period. Introduction of RA ions into each cell's core RA part can cause the tinting adjustment.
  • the magnitude of the programming voltage is usually much greater than the VnfN and VnfC magnitudes.
  • the programming voltage can be a selected one of plural different programming values for causing final color A f or X f to be a corresponding one of like plural different specific final principal or changed colors.
  • the RA part of each cell 404 can include three or more transparent RA subparts, each programmable to reflect light of a different one of three or more primary colors, e.g., red, green, and blue, combinable to produce many colors usually including white.
  • the NE part of each cell 404 then includes three or more NE subparts respectively adjacent the RA subparts.
  • One or more, up to all, of the RA subparts of each cell 404 are programmed to cause each programmed RA subpart to change to a desired tinted transparency of that subpart's primary color.
  • Color A can thus be adjusted across a broad realm of specific colors during the normal state.
  • color X for each CM cell 404 during the changed state.
  • Programming is the same as described above except that, depending on which of the preceding cell arrangements is used, a programming voltage is applied between the NE subpart of each programmed RA subpart and its FE part, its programming part, or the programming layer. Adjusting the programming voltage, value or/and duration, for each programmed RA subpart usually enables its final tinted transparency to be programmably adjusted.
  • the core part of each cell 404 has a core-part emissive area across which AEcl light is emitted during the normal state in the mid-emission EN and EN-ET embodiments and XEcl light is emitted during the changed state in the mid- emission ET and EN-ET embodiments if that cell 404 is a CM cell.
  • the core part of each cell 404 can include three or more core subparts, each containing one or more LE elements operable to emit light of a different one of three or more primary colors, e.g., again red, green, and blue, combinable to produce many colors usually including white.
  • each cell 404 usually emits that subpart's primary color across a core-part emissive subarea of that core part's emissive area.
  • the standard human eye/brain would interpret the combination of the primary colors of the light emitted by the core subparts in each cell 404 as color AEcl during the normal state in the mid-emission EN and EN-ET embodiments if the AEcl light traveled to the human eye unaccompanied by other light.
  • color XEcl and XEcl light for each CM cell 404 during the changed state in the mid-emission ET and EN-ET embodiments.
  • Each core subpart can be configured to receive a voltage causing the radiosity of the primary-color light emitted from that subpart's emissive subarea to be fixedly adjusted.
  • the radiosities of the light of the primary colors emitted from each core-part emissive area can then be programmably adjusted subsequent to manufacture of OI structure 430 for enabling AEcl light, and thus A light, in the mid-emission EN and EN-ET embodiments to be fixedly adjusted and for enabling XEcl light, and thus X light, in the mid-emission ET and EN- ET embodiments to be fixedly adjusted.
  • the programming is performed, as necessary, for each primary color, by providing the core subparts operable to emit light of that primary color with a programming voltage that causes them to emit light of their primary color at radiosity suitable for the desired AEcl light in the mid-emission EN and EN-ET embodiments and suitable for the desired XEcl light in the mid-emission ET and EN-ET embodiments.
  • Programming of the RA cell parts and core-part emissive areas can be used in the mid-emission embodiments to expand the realms of specific colors that embody colors A and X.
  • Figs.44a and 44b illustrate an extension 440 of OI structure 410.
  • OI structure 440 is also an embodiment of OI structure 240.
  • VC region 106 here consists of SF structure 242 and underlying ISCC structure 132 which meet along interface 244. See Fig.44a.
  • SF structure 242 again performs various functions usually including protecting ISCC structure 132 from damage and/or spreading pressure to improve the matching between print area 118 and OC area 116 during impact.
  • Structure 242 here likewise may provide velocity restitution matching or/and strongly influence principal color A or/and changed color X.
  • Each cell 404 here consists of (a) a part, termed the SS part, of structure 242 and (b) the underlying ISCC part of ISCC structure 132. The SS and ISCC parts of each cell 404 meet along a part 444 of interface 244.
  • Each cell's ISCC part here operates the same during the normal state as in OI structure 410 except that light leaving the ISCC part of each cell 404 via its SF part 406 in structure 410 leaves its ISCC part via its part 444 of interface 244 here.
  • Total ATic light normally leaving the ISCC part of each cell 404 via its IF part 444 consists of ARic light reflected by its ISCC part, any AEic light emitted by its ISCC part, and any ARsb light passing through its ISCC part.
  • a light is formed with ARic light and any AEic, ARss, and ARsb light normally leaving its SS part, and thus that cell 404, via its SF part 406.
  • each cell 404 having its IF part 444 partly or fully located in area 256 is a candidate for a CM cell.
  • a candidate cell 404 temporarily becomes a CM cell if the excess internal pressure along its IF part 444 meets principal cellular excess internal pressure criteria which embody the cellular TH impact criteria.
  • the cellular excess internal pressure criteria require that the excess internal pressure at one or more points along IF part 444 of a cell 404 equal or exceed a local TH value for that cell 404 to temporarily be a CM cell.
  • the ISCC part of each CM cell 404 responds (a) in some cellular OI embodiments to the excess internal pressure along its IF part 444 meeting its cellular excess internal pressure criteria or (b) in other OI embodiments to its cellular CC control signal generated in response to the excess internal pressure along its IF part 444 meeting its cellular excess internal pressure criteria sometimes dependent on other impact criteria also being met in those other embodiments by changing in such a way that XRic light reflected by the ISCC part of that CM cell 404 and any XEic light emitted by its ISCC part temporarily leave that part via its IF part 444.
  • Total XTic light leaving the ISCC part of each CM cell 404 via its IF part 444 consists of XRic light, any XEic light, and any XRsb light passing through its ISCC part.
  • X light is formed with XRic light and any XEic, ARss, and XRsb light leaving its SS part, and thus that CM cell 404, via its part 406 of print area 118.
  • the SS part of each cell 404 protects its ISCC part from damage in the above-described way that SF structure 242 in OI structure 240 protects ISCC structure 132 from damage.
  • SF structure 242 is again a PS structure, "PS" again meaning pressure- spreading.
  • the SS and ISCC parts of each cell 404 respectively are PS and PSCC parts which adjoin each other along its part 444 of interface 244 again serving as an internal PS surface, "PSCC” again meaning pressure-sensitive color-change.
  • the PSCC part of each cell 404 causes it to temporarily appear as color X if excess internal pressure along its IF part 444 meets the principal cellular excess internal pressure criteria.
  • each cell 404 having its SF part 406 located partly or fully in OC area 116 in OI structure 410 is, as mentioned above, a candidate for a CM cell. Certain of those candidate cells 404 in structure 410 become CM cells which temporarily appear as color X.
  • more cells 404 here are candidates for CM cells than in structure 410 because DP IF area 256 extends laterally beyond oppositely situated area 116.
  • more cells 404 can be CM cells here than in structure 410.
  • appropriate choice of the cellular excess internal pressure criteria enables print area 118 to closely match OC area 116.
  • Figs.45a and 45b illustrate an embodiment 450 of OI structure 440.
  • OI structure 450 is also an extension of OI structure 420 and an embodiment of OI structure 260.
  • VC region 106 here consists of SF structure 242 and underlying ISCC structure 132 formed with components 182 and 184. See Fig.45a.
  • SF structure 242 here is configured and operable the same as in OI structure 440.
  • Each cell 404 consists of an SS part of structure 242 and the underlying ISCC part of ISCC structure 132, the ISCC part being formed with an IS part of IS component 182 and a CC part of CC component 184 deployed as in OI structure 420.
  • Each cell's IS and CC parts here are configured and operable the same as in OI structure 420.
  • Total ATic light normally leaving the IS part, and thus the ISCC part, of each cell 404 via its IF part 444 consists of ARcc light and any AEcc, ARis, and ARsb light.
  • ARcc light and any AEcc, ARss, ARis, and ARsb light normally leave each cell 404 via its part 406 of SF zone 112 to form A light.
  • each CM cell 404 provides a principal cellular impact effect in response to object 104 impacting the SS part of that CM cell 404 along its surface part 406 so as to meet its cellular TH impact criteria.
  • the cellular impact signal of each CM cell 404 is specifically provided during the changed state in response to the excess internal pressure along IF part 444 of that CM cell 404 meeting the above-mentioned cellular excess internal pressure criteria which embody the cellular TH impact criteria.
  • each CM cell 404 responds (a) in some cellular OI embodiments to its cellular impact effect or (b) in other cellular OI embodiments to its cellular CC control signal generated in response to its impact effect sometimes dependent on other impact criteria also being met in those other embodiments by changing in such a way that total XTic light leaving its IS part, and thus its ISCC part, via its IF part 444 consists of XRcc light and any XEcc, ARis, and XRsb light.
  • XRcc light and any XEcc, ARss, ARis, and XRsb light leave each CM cell 404 via its part 406 of area 118 to form X light.
  • Figs.46a and 46b illustrate an embodiment 460 of OI structure 450.
  • OI structure 460 is also an extension of OI structure 430 and an embodiment of OI structure 270.
  • VC region 106 here consists of SF structure 242 and ISCC structure 132 formed with IS component 182 and underlying CC component 184 consisting of subcomponents 204, 224, 222, 226, and 206 deployed as in OI structure 430. See Fig.46a.
  • SF structure 242 here is configured and operable the same as in OI structure 450 and thus the same as in OI structure 440.
  • Each cell 404 consists of an SS part of SF structure 242 and the underlying ISCC part of ISCC structure 132, the ISCC part being formed with an IS part of IS component 182 and the underlying CC part of CC component 184.
  • Each cell's CC part consists of an NA part of NA layer 204, an NE part of NE structure 224, a core part of core layer 222, an FE part of FE structure 226, and an FA part of FA layer 206 deployed as in OI structure 430.
  • each cell 404 The IS, NA, NE, core, FE, and NA parts of each cell 404 are configured and operable the same as in OI structure 430.
  • Total ATab light of each cell 404 consists of any ARcl, AEcl, ARfa, AEfa, ARne, ARfe, and ARsb light normally leaving that cell 404 along its NA part. Any ARcl, AEcl, ARfa, AEfa, ARss, ARis, ARna, ARne, ARfe, and ARsb light normally leave each cell 404 via its part 406 of SF zone 112 to form A light.
  • each CM cell 404 again provides a principal cellular impact effect in response to object 104 impacting the SS part of that CM cell 404 along its SF part 406 so as to meet its cellular TH impact criteria.
  • the cellular impact signal of each CM cell 404 is specifically provided during the changed state in response to the excess internal pressure along IF part 444 of that CM cell 404 meeting the cellular excess internal pressure criteria which embody the cellular TH impact criteria.
  • each CM cell 404 responds (a) in some cellular OI embodiments to its cellular impact effect or (b) in other cellular OI embodiments to its cellular CC control signal generated in response to its impact effect sometimes dependent on both its cellular TH impact criteria and other criteria being met by changing so that its total XTab light consists of any XRcl, XEcl, XRfa, XEfa, XRne, XRfe, and XRsb light leaving that CM cell 404 along its NA part.
  • Any XRcl, XEcl, XRfa, XEfa, ARss, ARis, XRna, XRne, XRfe, and XRsb light leave each CM cell 404 along its part 406 of SF zone 112 to form X light.
  • the cellular impact effects can be transmitted outside VC region 106.
  • the cellular impact effects can respectively take the form of multiple cellular location-identifying impact signals supplied to a separate cell CC duration controller as described below for Figs.59a and 59b or multiple characteristics- identifying impact signals supplied to a separate intelligent cell CC controller as described below for Figs.69a and 69b.
  • Figs.47a and 47b illustrate an extension 470 of OI structure 410 provided with CC duration extended in a pre-established deformation-controlled manner.
  • OI structure 470 is also an embodiment of OI structure 280.
  • VC region 106 here consists of ISCC structure 132 and underlying DE structure 282. See Fig. 47a.
  • Each cell 404 consists of (a) an ISCC part of ISCC structure 132 and (b) a part, termed a DE part, of DE structure 282. The ISCC and DE parts of each cell 404 meet along a part 474 of interface 284.
  • Each cell 404 here operates the same during the normal state as VC region 106 in OI structure 280.
  • a light normally leaving each cell 404 via its SF part 406 is formed with ARic light reflected by its ISCC part, any AEic light emitted by its ISCC part, any ARde passing through its ISCC part, and any ARsb light passing through its ISCC and DE parts.
  • each cell 404 having its SF part 406 partly or fully in SF DF area 122 responds to object 104 impacting its SF part 406 by deforming along a cellular SF DF area constituted partly or fully with its SF part 406 so as to become a candidate for a CM cell.
  • a candidate cell 404 temporarily becomes a CM cell if the impact on that cell's SF DF area meets the cellular TH impact criteria, i.e., if that cell's SF deformation meets principal cellular SF DF criteria embodying the cellular TH impact criteria.
  • the deformation along the SF DF area of each CM cell 404 then causes it to temporarily appear as color X for base duration ⁇ t drbs during the changed state.
  • each candidate cell 404 responds to the deformation along its SF DF area, and thus to object 104 impacting its SF part 406, by deforming along a cellular internal DF area constituted partly or fully with its part 474 of interface 284. Since interface 284 is a surface of ISCC structure 132, the deformation of the DE part of each candidate cell 404 along its internal DF area causes its ISCC part to deform. If a candidate cell 404 is a CM cell, the internal deformation of its ISCC part along its internal DF area causes that CM cell 404 to further temporarily appear as color X for extension duration ⁇ tdrext. Automatic duration ⁇ tdrau for that CM cell 404 lengthens from ⁇ tdrbs to ⁇ tdrbs + ⁇ tdrext.
  • Each CM cell 404 here undergoes the same changed-state light processing as in IDVC portion 138 of OI structure 280.
  • X light leaving each CM cell 404 via its part 406 of print area 118 is formed with XRic light reflected by its ISCC part, any XEic light emitted by its ISCC part, any XRde passing through its ISCC part, and any XRsb light passing through its ISCC and DE parts.
  • Figs.48a and 48b illustrate an extension 480 of OI structure 430 provided with CC duration extended in a pre-established deformation-controlled manner.
  • OI structure 480 is also an embodiment of OI structure 300.
  • VC region 106 here contains DE structure 302 lying between overlying IS component 182 and underlying CC component 184 to respectively meet them along interfaces 304 and 306. See Fig.48a.
  • Each cell 404 consists of (a) an ISCC part of ISCC structure 132 and (b) a part, termed a DE part, of DE structure 302, the ISCC part being formed with (a) an IS part of IS component 182 located above the DE part and (b) a CC part of CC component 184 located below the DE part.
  • Each cell's IS and DE parts meet along a part 484 of interface 304.
  • Each cell's DE and CC parts meet along a part 486 of interface 306.
  • Each cell's CC part is formed with an NA part of NA layer 204, an NE part of NE structure 224, a core part of core layer 222, an FE part of FE structure 226, and an FA part of FA layer 206 deployed as in OI structure 430.
  • Each cell 404 here operates the same during the normal state as VC region 106 of OI structure 300.
  • Total ATcc light of each cell 404 consists of ARcc light reflected by its CC part, any AEcc light emitted by its CC part, and any ARsb light passing through its CC part.
  • a light normally leaving each cell 404 via its SF part 406 is formed with ARcc light passing through its IS and DE parts, any AEcc and ARsb light passing through its IS and DE parts, any ARde light passing through its IS part, and any ARis light reflected by its IS part.
  • Each cell's NA, NE, core, FE, and FA parts here operate the same during the normal state as in OI structure 430.
  • each cell 404 having its SF part 406 partly or fully in SF DF area 122 responds to object 104 impacting its SF part 406 by deforming along a cellular SF DF area constituted partly or fully with its SF part 406. See Fig.48b. That cell 404 temporarily becomes a CM cell if the cellular TH impact criteria are met, i.e., if the SF deformation meets principal cellular SF DF criteria embodying the cellular TH impact criteria so that the changed state begins.
  • the IS part of each CM cell 404 then provides a cellular impact effect, termed the principal cellular first impact effect.
  • the principal cellular first impact effects provided by the IS parts of all CM cells 404 form the principal general first impact effect provided by IS component 182 of OI structure 300 in response to the impact.
  • each CM cell 404 here responds to the cellular first impact effect provided from its IS part by changing the same as CC segment 194 in OI structure 300 changes in response to the general first impact effect.
  • Total XTcc light of each CM cell 404 consists of XRcc light reflected by its CC part, any XEcc light emitted by its CC part, and any XRsb light passing through its CC part.
  • X light leaving each CM cell 404 via its part 406 of print area 118 is formed with XRcc light passing through its IS and DE parts, any XEcc and XRsb light passing through its IS and DE parts, any ARde light passing through its IS part, and any ARis light reflected by its IS part.
  • This enables each CM cell 404 to temporarily appear as color X for base duration ⁇ t drbs as VC region 106 enters the changed state.
  • the NA, NE, core, FE, and FA parts of each CM cell 404 here operate the same during the changed state as in OI structure 430.
  • each candidate cell 404 responds to the deformation along its SF DF area, and thus to object 104 impacting its SF part 406, by deforming along an ID internal DF area constituted partly or fully with its IF part 484. Since interface 304 is also a surface of IS component 182, the deformation of the DE part of each candidate cell 404 along its internal DF area causes its IS part to deform.
  • its IS part responds to the deformation along its internal DF area by providing another cellular impact effect, termed the principal cellular second impact effect.
  • each CM cell 404 responds to its principal cellular second impact effect by causing it to further temporarily appear as color X for extension duration ⁇ tdrext.
  • Automatic duration ⁇ tdrau again lengthens to ⁇ tdrbs + ⁇ tdrext.
  • the light processing in each CM cell 404 is the same during extension duration ⁇ tdrext as during base duration ⁇ tdrbs.
  • Figs.49a and 49b illustrate an extension 490 of both OI structure 440 and OI structure 470.
  • OI structure 490 also an embodiment of OI structure 320, is configured the same as structure 470 except that VC region 106 here contains SF structure 242 extending from SF zone 112 to ISCC structure 132 so as to meet it along interface 244. See Fig.49a. SF structure 242 is again configured and operable the same as in OI structure 440.
  • Each cell 404 consists of an SS part of SF structure 242, the underlying ISCC part of ISCC structure 132, and the further underlying DE part of DE structure 282.
  • Each cell 404 here operates the same during the normal state as VC region 106 in OI structure 320.
  • Total ATic light of each cell 404 consists of ARic light reflected by its ISCC part, any AEic light emitted by its ISCC part, any ARde light passing through its ISCC part, and any ARsb light passing through its ISCC and DE parts.
  • a light normally leaving each cell 404 via its SF part 406 is formed with ARic light passing through its SS part, any AEic, ARde, and ARsb light passing through its SS part, and any ARss light reflected by its SS part.
  • SF structure 242 deforms along SF DF area 122 in response to object 104 impacting OC area 116. See Fig.49b. The attendant excess SF pressure along area 116 is transmitted through structure 242 to produce excess internal pressure along DP IF area 256.
  • Each cell 404 having its IF part 444 partly or fully in area 256 specifically deforms along a first cellular internal DF area constituted partly or fully with its IF part 444, thereby becoming a candidate for a CM cell.
  • a candidate cell 404 temporarily becomes a CM cell if the internal deformation along that cell's first internal DF area meets cellular internal DF criteria embodying the cellular TH impact criteria.
  • the internal deformation along the first internal DF area of each CM cell 404 causes it to temporarily appear as color X for base duration ⁇ t drbs as the changed state begins.
  • each candidate cell 404 responds to the deformation along its first internal DF area, and thus to the impact, by deforming along a second cellular internal DF area constituted partly or fully with its IF part 474. Consequently, the ISCC part of each candidate cell 404 deforms along its second cellular internal DF area. If a candidate cell 404 is a CM cell, the deformation of its ISCC part along its second internal DF area causes it to further temporarily appear as color X for extension duration ⁇ tdrext. Automatic duration ⁇ tdrau for that CM cell 404 is lengthened to ⁇ tdrbs + ⁇ tdrext.
  • Each CM cell 404 here undergoes the same changed-state light processing as in IDVC portion 138 of OI structure 320.
  • Total XTic light of each CM cell 404 consists of XRic light reflected by its ISCC part, any XEic light emitted by its ISCC part, any XRde light passing through its ISCC part, and any XRsb light passing through its ISCC and DE parts.
  • X light temporarily leaving each CM cell 404 via its part 406 of print area 118 is formed with XRic light passing through its SS part, any XEic, XRde, and XRsb light passing through its SS part, and any ARss light reflected by its SS part.
  • Figs.50a and 50b illustrate an extension 500 of both OI structure 460 and OI structure 480.
  • OI structure 500 also an embodiment of OI structure 330, is configured the same as structure 480 except that VC region 106 here contains SF structure 242 extending from SF zone 112 to ISCC structure 132 to meet it, specifically IS component 182, along interface 244. See Fig.50a.
  • Structure 242 here is configured and operable the same as in OI structure 460 and thus the same as in OI structure 440.
  • Each cell 404 consists of an SS part of SF structure 242, an ISCC part of ISCC structure 132, and a DE part of DE structure 302, the ISCC part being formed with (a) an IS part of IS component 182 located below the SS part and above the DE part (b) a CC part of CC component 184 located below the DE part.
  • Each cell's CC part is formed with an NA part of NA layer 204, an NE part of NE structure 224, a core part of core layer 222, an FE part of FE structure 226, and an FA part of FA layer 206 deployed as in OI structure 480.
  • Each cell 404 here operates the same during the normal state as VC region 106 in OI structure 330.
  • Total ATcc light of each cell 404 consists of ARcc light reflected by its CC part, any AEcc light emitted by its CC part, and any ARsb light passing through its CC part.
  • Total ATic light normally leaving the IS part of each cell 404, and thus its ISCC part, via its IF part 444 consists of ARcc light passing through its IS and DE parts, any AEcc and ARsb light passing through its IS and DE parts, any ARde light passing through its IS part, and any ARis light reflected by its IS part.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Physical Education & Sports Medicine (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Architecture (AREA)
  • Civil Engineering (AREA)
  • Structural Engineering (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • Credit Cards Or The Like (AREA)
  • Printing Methods (AREA)
  • Toys (AREA)
  • Illuminated Signs And Luminous Advertising (AREA)
  • Ink Jet (AREA)

Abstract

Un impact approprié d'un objet (104) sur une surface exposée (102) d'une structure d'impact (100) d'objet d'une structure de présentation d'informations pendant une activité telle qu'un sport amène la surface à changer temporairement de couleur en grande partie au niveau de la zone d'impact. Spécifiquement, une région à couleur variable (106) de la structure d'Ol s'étend jusqu'à la surface au niveau d'une zone de surface (112) et apparaît normalement le long de celle-ci en tant que couleur principale. Une partie (138) dépendant de l'impact de la région à couleur variable répond à l'objet impactant la zone de surface au niveau d'une zone de contact avec l'objet dépendant de l'impact (116) en apparaissant temporairement le long d'une zone d'impression (118) dépendant de l'impact de la zone sous la forme d'une couleur modifiée matériellement différente de la couleur principale si certaines conditions sont satisfaites. La zone d'impression correspond étroitement à la zone de contact avec l'objet en taille, forme et emplacement.
EP17867105.3A 2016-11-03 2017-10-23 Structure de présentation d'informations avec changement de couleur temporaire au niveau d'une zone d'impact d'objet Active EP3535034B1 (fr)

Applications Claiming Priority (23)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US15/343,134 US9764216B1 (en) 2016-11-03 2016-11-03 Information-presentation structure with impact-sensitive color change to different colors dependent on location in variable-color region of single normal color
US15/343,149 US10010751B2 (en) 2016-11-03 2016-11-03 Information-presentation structure with impact-sensitive color changing incorporated into football or baseball/softball field
US15/343,137 US10112101B2 (en) 2016-11-03 2016-11-03 Information-presentation structure with impact-sensitive color change and sound generation
US15/343,133 US10252108B2 (en) 2016-11-03 2016-11-03 Information-presentation structure with impact-sensitive color change dependent on object tracking
US15/343,125 US10363474B2 (en) 2016-11-03 2016-11-03 Information-presentation structure with impact-sensitive color change by light emission
US15/343,123 US10279215B2 (en) 2016-11-03 2016-11-03 Information-presentation structure with impact-sensitive color change of pre-established deformation-controlled extended color-change duration
US15/343,115 US10288500B2 (en) 2016-11-03 2016-11-03 Information-presentation structure using electrode assembly for impact-sensitive color change
US15/343,148 US10071283B2 (en) 2016-11-03 2016-11-03 Information-presentation structure with impact-sensitive color changing incorporated into sports-playing structure such as basketball or volleyball court
US15/343,118 US10328306B2 (en) 2016-11-03 2016-11-03 Information-presentation structure with impact-sensitive color change and overlying protection or/and surface color control
US15/343,130 US10258826B2 (en) 2016-11-03 2016-11-03 Information-presentation structure with post-impact duration-adjustable impact-sensitive color change
US15/343,121 US9789381B1 (en) 2016-11-03 2016-11-03 Information-presentation structure with pressure spreading and pressure-sensitive color change
US15/343,131 US9855485B1 (en) 2016-11-03 2016-11-03 Information-presentation structure with intelligently controlled impact-sensitive color change
US15/343,101 US10258825B2 (en) 2016-11-03 2016-11-03 Information-presentation structure with separate impact-sensitive and color-change components
US15/343,143 US10004948B2 (en) 2016-11-03 2016-11-03 Information-presentation structure with impact-sensitive color changing incorporated into tennis court
US15/343,153 US9744429B1 (en) 2016-11-03 2016-11-03 Information-presentation structure with impact-sensitive color change and restitution matching
US15/343,132 US10258827B2 (en) 2016-11-03 2016-11-03 Information-presentation structure with impact-sensitive color-change and image generation
US15/343,113 US10357703B2 (en) 2016-11-03 2016-11-03 Information-presentation structure having rapid impact-sensitive color change achieved with separate impact-sensing and color-change components
US15/343,136 US10130844B2 (en) 2016-11-03 2016-11-03 Information-presentation structure with impact-sensitive color change to different colors dependent on impact conditions
US15/343,127 US10300336B2 (en) 2016-11-03 2016-11-03 Information-presentation structure with cell arrangement for impact-sensing color change
US15/343,140 US9925415B1 (en) 2016-11-03 2016-11-03 Information-presentation structure with impact-sensitive color change chosen to accommodate color vision deficiency
US15/597,050 US10258859B2 (en) 2016-11-03 2017-05-16 Information-presentation structure with visible record of color-changed print area at impact location
US15/597,054 US10258860B2 (en) 2016-11-03 2017-05-16 Information-presentation structure with compensation to increase size of color-changed print area
PCT/US2017/057934 WO2018085073A2 (fr) 2016-11-03 2017-10-23 Structure de présentation d'informations avec changement de couleur temporaire au niveau d'une zone d'impact d'objet

Publications (3)

Publication Number Publication Date
EP3535034A2 true EP3535034A2 (fr) 2019-09-11
EP3535034A4 EP3535034A4 (fr) 2020-09-16
EP3535034B1 EP3535034B1 (fr) 2022-06-01

Family

ID=62076249

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
EP17867105.3A Active EP3535034B1 (fr) 2016-11-03 2017-10-23 Structure de présentation d'informations avec changement de couleur temporaire au niveau d'une zone d'impact d'objet

Country Status (4)

Country Link
EP (1) EP3535034B1 (fr)
AU (2) AU2017355301B2 (fr)
CA (1) CA3042871A1 (fr)
WO (1) WO2018085073A2 (fr)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11278784B2 (en) 2021-02-14 2022-03-22 Breakout Hitting Llc Training systems and methods

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN109886200B (zh) * 2019-02-22 2020-10-09 南京邮电大学 一种基于生成式对抗网络的无人驾驶车道线检测方法
CN114667464A (zh) * 2019-11-06 2022-06-24 观察者人工智能公司 用作变换光学器件的具有无源元件的平面光学器件
CN114913473B (zh) * 2022-03-21 2023-08-15 中国科学院光电技术研究所 一种轻量化单体式成像的接触网安全巡检仪

Family Cites Families (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
DE4100434A1 (de) * 1991-01-09 1992-07-16 Eugen Wohllaib Einrichtung zum anzeigen von ballkontakten auf sportflaechen
BE1006121A3 (fr) * 1992-08-21 1994-05-17 Locotrans Sprl Terrain de sport et bande pour former et delimiter une ligne d'un terrain de sport.
US5394824A (en) * 1992-10-07 1995-03-07 Johnson, Jr.; Lawrence F. Thermochromic sensor for locating an area of contact
KR20060130740A (ko) * 2004-03-16 2006-12-19 유니버시티 오브 델라웨어 활성 및 적응성 광색성 섬유, 직물 및 멤브레인
US7632197B2 (en) * 2006-04-21 2009-12-15 Write Stuff Enterprises, Inc. System for confirming hit locations on tennis court boundaries
US8092315B2 (en) * 2007-04-13 2012-01-10 Karsten Manufacturing Corporation Methods and apparatus to indicate impact of an object
KR101458658B1 (ko) * 2007-04-25 2014-11-05 크리에이터 테크놀로지 비.브이. 압력 스프레딩 수단을 갖는 가요성 디스플레이를 포함하는 전자 장치
WO2011045361A1 (fr) * 2009-10-14 2011-04-21 Novo Nordisk A/S Indicateur de temporisation
US8544337B2 (en) * 2010-04-06 2013-10-01 International Business Machines Corporation Piezoelectric chromic impact sensor
TWI467306B (zh) * 2012-01-19 2015-01-01 E Ink Holdings Inc 使用顯示器之球場邊線模組

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11278784B2 (en) 2021-02-14 2022-03-22 Breakout Hitting Llc Training systems and methods
US11911682B2 (en) 2021-02-14 2024-02-27 Vxt Sports Llc Training systems and methods
US11911681B2 (en) 2021-02-14 2024-02-27 Vxt Sports Llc Training systems and methods

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
AU2017355301A1 (en) 2019-06-13
AU2022205247B2 (en) 2024-08-29
CA3042871A1 (fr) 2018-05-11
WO2018085073A2 (fr) 2018-05-11
AU2022205247A1 (en) 2022-08-04
EP3535034B1 (fr) 2022-06-01
EP3535034A4 (fr) 2020-09-16
WO2018085073A3 (fr) 2018-06-14
AU2017355301B2 (en) 2022-08-25

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
AU2022205247B2 (en) Information-presentation structure with intelligently controlled impact-sensitive color change
US11931640B2 (en) Information-presentation structure with visible record of color-changed print area at impact location
US9855485B1 (en) Information-presentation structure with intelligently controlled impact-sensitive color change
US10004948B2 (en) Information-presentation structure with impact-sensitive color changing incorporated into tennis court
US10258860B2 (en) Information-presentation structure with compensation to increase size of color-changed print area
US9744429B1 (en) Information-presentation structure with impact-sensitive color change and restitution matching
US10288500B2 (en) Information-presentation structure using electrode assembly for impact-sensitive color change
US9789381B1 (en) Information-presentation structure with pressure spreading and pressure-sensitive color change
US10279215B2 (en) Information-presentation structure with impact-sensitive color change of pre-established deformation-controlled extended color-change duration
US10328306B2 (en) Information-presentation structure with impact-sensitive color change and overlying protection or/and surface color control
US10010751B2 (en) Information-presentation structure with impact-sensitive color changing incorporated into football or baseball/softball field
US10258825B2 (en) Information-presentation structure with separate impact-sensitive and color-change components
US10252108B2 (en) Information-presentation structure with impact-sensitive color change dependent on object tracking
US10130844B2 (en) Information-presentation structure with impact-sensitive color change to different colors dependent on impact conditions
US10258827B2 (en) Information-presentation structure with impact-sensitive color-change and image generation
US10112101B2 (en) Information-presentation structure with impact-sensitive color change and sound generation
US10071283B2 (en) Information-presentation structure with impact-sensitive color changing incorporated into sports-playing structure such as basketball or volleyball court
US10357703B2 (en) Information-presentation structure having rapid impact-sensitive color change achieved with separate impact-sensing and color-change components
US9925415B1 (en) Information-presentation structure with impact-sensitive color change chosen to accommodate color vision deficiency
US9764216B1 (en) Information-presentation structure with impact-sensitive color change to different colors dependent on location in variable-color region of single normal color
US10258826B2 (en) Information-presentation structure with post-impact duration-adjustable impact-sensitive color change
US10300336B2 (en) Information-presentation structure with cell arrangement for impact-sensing color change
US10363474B2 (en) Information-presentation structure with impact-sensitive color change by light emission

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: THE INTERNATIONAL PUBLICATION HAS BEEN MADE

PUAI Public reference made under article 153(3) epc to a published international application that has entered the european phase

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009012

STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: REQUEST FOR EXAMINATION WAS MADE

17P Request for examination filed

Effective date: 20190423

AK Designated contracting states

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AL AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC MK MT NL NO PL PT RO RS SE SI SK SM TR

AX Request for extension of the european patent

Extension state: BA ME

DAV Request for validation of the european patent (deleted)
DAX Request for extension of the european patent (deleted)
A4 Supplementary search report drawn up and despatched

Effective date: 20200814

RIC1 Information provided on ipc code assigned before grant

Ipc: A63B 24/00 20060101ALI20200807BHEP

Ipc: A63B 71/06 20060101AFI20200807BHEP

Ipc: G02F 1/23 20060101ALI20200807BHEP

Ipc: G02F 1/155 20060101ALI20200807BHEP

Ipc: A63C 19/06 20060101ALI20200807BHEP

GRAP Despatch of communication of intention to grant a patent

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSNIGR1

STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: GRANT OF PATENT IS INTENDED

RIC1 Information provided on ipc code assigned before grant

Ipc: A63B 71/06 20060101AFI20210630BHEP

Ipc: G02F 1/23 20060101ALI20210630BHEP

Ipc: A63C 19/06 20060101ALI20210630BHEP

Ipc: G02F 1/155 20060101ALI20210630BHEP

Ipc: A63B 24/00 20060101ALI20210630BHEP

Ipc: A63B 69/38 20060101ALI20210630BHEP

INTG Intention to grant announced

Effective date: 20210719

GRAJ Information related to disapproval of communication of intention to grant by the applicant or resumption of examination proceedings by the epo deleted

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSDIGR1

STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: REQUEST FOR EXAMINATION WAS MADE

GRAP Despatch of communication of intention to grant a patent

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSNIGR1

STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: GRANT OF PATENT IS INTENDED

INTC Intention to grant announced (deleted)
INTG Intention to grant announced

Effective date: 20211215

GRAS Grant fee paid

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSNIGR3

GRAA (expected) grant

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009210

STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: THE PATENT HAS BEEN GRANTED

AK Designated contracting states

Kind code of ref document: B1

Designated state(s): AL AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC MK MT NL NO PL PT RO RS SE SI SK SM TR

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: GB

Ref legal event code: FG4D

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: AT

Ref legal event code: REF

Ref document number: 1494971

Country of ref document: AT

Kind code of ref document: T

Effective date: 20220615

Ref country code: CH

Ref legal event code: EP

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: IE

Ref legal event code: FG4D

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: R096

Ref document number: 602017058140

Country of ref document: DE

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: LT

Ref legal event code: MG9D

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: NL

Ref legal event code: MP

Effective date: 20220601

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: SE

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20220601

Ref country code: NO

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20220901

Ref country code: LT

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20220601

Ref country code: HR

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20220601

Ref country code: GR

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20220902

Ref country code: FI

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20220601

Ref country code: ES

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20220601

Ref country code: BG

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20220901

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: AT

Ref legal event code: MK05

Ref document number: 1494971

Country of ref document: AT

Kind code of ref document: T

Effective date: 20220601

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: RS

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20220601

Ref country code: PL

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20220601

Ref country code: LV

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20220601

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: NL

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20220601

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: SM

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20220601

Ref country code: SK

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20220601

Ref country code: RO

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20220601

Ref country code: PT

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20221003

Ref country code: EE

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20220601

Ref country code: CZ

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20220601

Ref country code: AT

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20220601

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: IS

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20221001

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: R097

Ref document number: 602017058140

Country of ref document: DE

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: AL

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20220601

PLBE No opposition filed within time limit

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009261

STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: NO OPPOSITION FILED WITHIN TIME LIMIT

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: DK

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20220601

26N No opposition filed

Effective date: 20230302

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: SI

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20220601

Ref country code: MC

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20220601

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: CH

Ref legal event code: PL

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: BE

Ref legal event code: MM

Effective date: 20221031

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: LU

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES

Effective date: 20221023

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: LI

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES

Effective date: 20221031

Ref country code: CH

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES

Effective date: 20221031

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: BE

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES

Effective date: 20221031

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: IE

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES

Effective date: 20221023

PGFP Annual fee paid to national office [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: GB

Payment date: 20231017

Year of fee payment: 7

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: IT

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20220601

PGFP Annual fee paid to national office [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: FR

Payment date: 20231017

Year of fee payment: 7

Ref country code: DE

Payment date: 20231030

Year of fee payment: 7

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: HU

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT; INVALID AB INITIO

Effective date: 20171023

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: CY

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20220601

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: MK

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20220601

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: TR

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20220601